Home

PowerFlex 700 AC Drives

1. Kaz ei 556 0 lt 21 90 201 0 14 0 7 90 0 60 gt lt es k SE EE elo SE i le See im JEE 4 17 Ab i 1100 0 mE ue 43 30 ZE 43 30 f O WEE 10780 m po MM E i 763 3 i JI 30 0 H ER P IE j Ale le Dr 137 2 1273 p 5 40 5 00 11 0 A Ground h A 0 43 Mo PEM Stud 5 5 0 22 Dia Holes for oe Supplied Mounting Hardware 294 7 z 44 Places 11 60 HE ala SIS 24 010 Te CIE a Compressed jl Ill d Ko Gasket ll il y Y Lee D ee 131 6 g amp n o o 5 20 e e E gt A gt 57 9 468 2 2 30 1840 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight kg Ibs Drive amp Packaging 119 75 264 0 Description Flange Mount 99 79 220 0 1 Weights include HIM and Standard I O 6 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 13 Frame 6 Flange Mount Cutout 4 00 0 157 Dia Holes 44 Places in Minimum 14 GA 1 9 Steel 156 Mounting Surface Deburr Pilot Holes 0 50 a and Drive Cutout A 33 1043 0 41 10 hog A 971 0 38 20 899 0 35 40 d 827 0 32 60 755 0 29 70 4 683 0 26 90
2. e coooa Frames 0 amp 1 TA e Frame 2 n of T SS d L 1 T POr EE T 5 3 o oa e Common Bus Drives Only Frame 6 Publication 20B UM002C EN P 1 12 Installation Wiring Figure 1 4 Power Terminal Block Frame Terminal Block 0 1 Note Shaded BR1 amp BR2 Terminals will only be 2 present on drives ordered with the Brake Option BRI BR2DC DC U V W PER S T T T2 T3 L1 L2 L3 3 A EEN 4 f BR1 BR2 DC DC U V W R S T T1 T2 T3 Lt L2 L3 AC Input Ratings are Normal Duty DC Input Ratings are Normal Duty 5 240V 40 HP 480V 75 HP 690V 45 90 kW 240V 40HP 480V 75 HP 690V 45 90 kW 400V 55 KW 600V 75 HP 400V 55 KW 600V 7
3. 00t 009 009 osz ost 0Sc Oly 80 S0c 86L 66L 90S 2 OLL 00v 087 087 Ose oss ose 06 982 09 ZZL ODC gS H C amp L 9 z 09c080c 0Sc 00S 009 osz GLE osz ele gcc 0ZL gel Y9L 90v Pl 06 oor om 009 ml oe osz el ee sozleri e orl gt Tal 9 ensozogoz z osz 00t oss 00c 00 002 WER Olc OrL EOL 96L 90S Y GL zi E osz 00S 009 osz GIE osz Eer 484 0ZL oe Y9L ep v 06 9 z 0Z1080c x m a 2 OSH 00 00 DCL D DCL 061 ZSL SOL 9 69 LOL web Pl SG mee om ml ml oo ooz el me Ovi 6 6 ae orl sz S yorlogoz OSL GLE GLE Gel 002 Gel 891 trl 96 29 616 eg v Sv S S osz GIE 00S OSI Sle DCL 9L SCT SZL 6 8 beet eg v GS S z ScLO80c zi m m m OSH 00 00 OLL SLL OLL OZ 82 G8 79S 718 eg t SV ost ooe ml eil e ser gel a S01 9 69 soor qos ssl s ensorogoz E 55 00L 00 SZZ 06 GIL 06 vv 80L cL 84 v 6989 Sy bi Le x E m osL 00 00 OLL 00c DL CL v6 G8 79S v18 Sy v Sv FI z 880080c z n m 00L osz 0Sc 06 DCL 06 e v8 eL 827 689 01 0S t 0 46 409807 001 002 002 OL Sel 04 98 9 99 L9E EG 08 Pl cc DEI 9909907 m 09 Ost ost 09 06 09 vL 99 t r c8c L0v 0S PERL ec v0980c GpO 383 N 06 Sel Sel Sy 08 Sy 09 Sy LE eve GE
4. Number Parameter Name Setting Number Parameter Name Setting 40 Motor Type 133 PI Preload 41 Motor NP Volts 139 PI BW Filter 42 Motor NP FLA 140 141 Accel Time X 43 Motor NP Hertz 142 143 Decel Time X 44 Motor NP RPM 145 DB While Stopped 45 Motor NP Power 146 S Curve 46 Mtr NP Pwr Units 147 Current Lmt Sel 47 Motor OL Hertz 148 Current Lmt Val 48 Motor OL Factor 149 Current Lmt Gain 49 Motor Poles 150 Drive OL Mode 53 Motor Cntl Sel 151 PWM Frequency 54 Maximum Voltage 152 Droop RPM FLA 55 Maximum Freq 153 Regen Power Limit 56 Compensation 154 Current Rate Limit 57 Flux Up Mode 155 156 Stop Mode X 58 Flux Up Time 157 DC Brk Lvl Sel 59 SV Boost Filter 158 DC Brake Level 61 Autotune 159 DC Brake Time 62 IR Voltage Drop 160 Bus Reg Ki 63 Flux Current Ref 161 162 Bus Reg Mode X 64 Ixo Voltage Drop 163 DB Resistor Type 66 Autotune Torque 164 Bus Reg Kp 67 Inertia Autotune 165 Bus Reg Kd 69 Start Acc Boost 166 Flux Braking 70 Run Boost 167 Powerup Delay 7 Break Voltage 168 Start At PowerUp 72 Break Frequency 169 Flying Start En 79 Speed Units 170 Flying StartGain 80 Feedback Select 174 Auto Rsirt Tries 81 Minimum Speed 175 Auto Rstrt Delay 82 Maximum Speed 177 Gnd Warn Level 83 Overspeed Limit 178 Sleep Wake Mode 84 86 Skip Frequency X 179 Sleep Wake Ref 87 Skip Freq Band 180 Wake Level 88 Speed To
5. Number Parameter Name Group Page Number Parameter Name Group Page 167 Powerup Delay Restart Modes 3 30 249 Fault 4 Code Faults 3 43 168 Start At PowerUp Restart Modes 3 30 250 Fault 4 Time Faults 3 43 169 Flying Start En Restart Modes 3 30 251 Fault 5 Code Faults 3 43 170 Flying StartGain Restart Modes 3 30 252 Fault 5 Time Faults 3 43 174 Auto Rstrt Tries Restart Modes 3 30 253 Fault 6 Code Faults 3 43 175 Auto Rstrt Delay Restart Modes 3 30 254 Fault 6 Time Faults 3 43 177 Gnd Warn Level Power Loss 3 32 255 Fault 7 Code Faults 3 43 178 Sleep Wake Mode Restart Modes 3 31 256 Fault 7 Time Faults 3 43 179 Sleep Wake Ref Restart Modes 3 32 257 Fault 8 Code Faults 3 43 180 Wake Leve Restart Modes 3 32 258 Fault 8 Time Faults 3 43 181 Wake Time Restart Modes 3 32 259 Alarm Config 1 Alarms 3 44 182 Sleep Leve Restart Modes 3 32 261 Alarm Clear Alarms 3 44 183 Sleep Time Restart Modes 3 32 262 269 Alarm X Code Alarms 3 44 184 Power Loss Mode Power Loss 3 32 270 DPI Baud Rate Comm Control 3 46 185 Power Loss Time Power Loss 3 32 271 Drive Logic Rslt Comm Control 3 46 186 Power Loss Level Power Loss 3 33 272 Drive Ref Rslt Comm Control 3 46 187 Load Loss Level Power Loss 3 33 273 Drive Ramp Helt Comm Control 3 46 188 Load Loss Time Power Loss 3 33 274 DPI Port Sel Comm Control 3 47 189 Shear Pin Time Power Loss 3 33 275 DPI Port
6. 12 5 0 49 59 0 2 32 131 0 5 16 203 0 7 99 275 0 10 83 0 39 347 0 13 66 419 0 16 50 478 0 18 82 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 31 Figure A 11 Frame 6 NEMA UL Type 12 Standalone 400 690V drives only 711 3 28 00 24 1 0 90 lte 663 1 26 10 123 6 4 90 gt S k X R 5 e 8 Allen Bradley E PowerFiex 1828 8 e S 72 00 1795 2 70 70 e 1279 5 50 40 283 3 e 11 20 c k 16 8 0 66 13 5 0 53 Dia 12 7 0 50 Dia 4 Places See Note A Lifting Holes Note A 487 8 Mount with 0 50 Inch UNC Grade 5 or Higher Screws 19 20 Max or M12 Material Class 5 6 or Higher Screws E Use Flat Washer with each Fastener 80 Air Inlet 0 30 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight Hl kg Ibs Description Drive amp Packaging 176 90 390 0 229 07 505 0 1 Weights include HIM and Standard 1 0 Publication 20B UM002C EN P A 32 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 12 Frame 6 NEMA UL Type 12 Flange Mount 400 690V drives only
7. 3 41 cs ao Parameter Name amp Description E See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Fault Amps Default Read Only 224 Captures and displays motor amps atthe Min Max 0 0 Rated Amps x 2 time of the last fault Units 0 1 Amps imd Fault Bus Volts Default Read Only 224 Captures and displays the DC bus Min Max 0 0 Max Bus Volts B voltage of the drive at the time of the last Units 0 1 VDC ee fault Status 1 Fault Read Only 209 Captures and displays Drive Status 1 bit pattern at Co the time of the last fault x 230 AAA e Q S S S ASA EES SESS NASA DE DS SEI ES Ge e e D IVP NS y NE SE GNE QU 0 0 0 01 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 A 00 rue 0 Condition False pits 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 y Reserved Bit Status 2 Fault Read Only 210 Captures and displays Drive Status 2 bit pattern at the time of the last fault ru 230 R V 5 5 S S OS S N EE SLIL I I A ICA EE DS WI T STE IE S A I A S QUSS IIS S QUSE QJ G7 SI NJ QS 1 Condition True 0 0j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 oed 0 Condition False pus 14 13 12 11 10 987 6543210 x Reserved Bit Alarm 1 Fault Read Only 211 Captures and displays Drive Alarm 1 at the time of ren the last fault r 230 UE ASAAN RAE VS REA AOI quis es OSESSSIIS SSIES GIS ISS SILAS RU 0jojo o o o ojojo x ojo o o o O Hare da prits 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210 x Beserved Bit Ss EI ei ed ESE X XIX
8. Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 72 Programming and Parameters Parameter Cross Reference by Name Parameter Name Number Group Page Parameter Name Number Group Page Accel Mask 281 Masks amp Owners 3 48 Data Out XX 310 317 Datalinks 3 50 Accel Owner 293 Masks amp Owners 3 49 DB Resistor 647 Oil Well Pump 3 62 Accel Time X 140 141 Ramp Rates 3 26 DB Resistor Type 163 Stop Brake Modes 3 29 Adj Volt AccTime 675 Adjust Voltage 3 64 DB While Stopped 145 Stop Brake Modes 3 28 Adj Volt Command 662 Adjust Voltage 3 63 DC Brake Level 158 Stop Brake Modes 3 28 Adj Volt DecTime 676 Adjust Voltage 3 64 DC Brake Time 159 Stop Brake Modes 3 28 Adj Volt Phase 650 Adjust Voltage 3 63 DC Brk Lvl Sel 157 Stop Brake Modes 3 28 Adj Volt Preseti 7 654 660 Adjust Voltage 3 63 DC Bus Memory 13 Metering 3 7 Adj Volt Ref Hi 652 Adjust Voltage 3 63 DC Bus Voltage 12 Metering 3 7 Adj Volt Ref Lo 653 Adjust Voltage 3 63 Decel Mask 282 Masks amp Owners 3 48 Adj Volt S Curve 677 Adjust Voltage 3
9. Publication 20B UM002C EN P File POS SPD PROFILE Ke ao Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E Adj Volt S Curve Default 0 096 Sets the percentage of accel or decel Min Max 0 0 100 0 time to be applied to the voltage ramp as Units 0 1 S curve Time is added 1 2 at the beginning and 1 2 at the end Sweep Auto Tune Sweep Volt Min Sweep Volt Max Sweep Freq Min Sweep Freq Max Sweep Freq Detec Sweep Time Ampl Detect Sel These parameters are not functional at this time Pos Spd Profile File 9 Parameter Name amp Description E See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Pos Spd Prof Sts Read Only Provides status of the profile indexer Bits 0 4 are a binary value i SLES ROS S 5 EE EE E se ojojojo ojo o o x x x o o o o o j Enabled pits 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 y nBeseryeg Bit 0 0 0 0 1 gei 0 0 0 1 0 Step2 0 0 0 1 1 Sen 0 0 1 0 0 Step4 0 0 1 0 1 Steps 0 0 1 1 0 geg 0 0 1 1 1 Step7 0 1 0 0 0 Steps 0 1 0 0 1 Step9 0 1 0 1 0 Step to 0 1 0 1 1 Step 11 0 1 1 0 0 Step 12 0 1 1 0 1 Step 13 0 1 1 1 0 Step 14 O 1 1 1 1 Step 15 11010 0101 Step 16 Units Traveled Default Read Only Number of units traveled from the home Min Max 21474836 47 position Units 0 01 Adjust Voltage Group No ProfSetup Status 677 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 70 e 70
10. ES 00s 009 ei ml ec mei O22 O8t ml 691 90S Z ost Ss 00t 004 004 00 066 00 745 LZ S9vc P eez St 002 9 8rcago0c 0sz osr 009 ooz ose ooz ei vez gst ect Jil os t stb en osz 00 009 Sec 00t Sec 022 861 08L Lvl 69L 60S Y OSL 9 08LG80c osz gle oos ol osz oul osz ol szt 60t IEL os rl oor a 0Sc Dk 009 002 DEE 00c vec cLL 98L col ZYL eg Y SEL 9 9G6La80c Sei ose ose ee ooz el moi mi alen V06 90S vy sz ki 7 ost GLE 00s DCL osz DCL 9L BEL Sel 976 JIL g0S Y 00L S ScLagoc 0006 NO 001 00 ooe col oz ml ml al ZZ 1 09 ezz 90S Hl mi a Scl ose ose Sel 00c Scl vv 901 96 672 106 eg Y GZ S 960d80c 0006 NINO 00L Dec osz 08 Sl ogl oer gei S9 967 ges os H mei e 0006 NINO E 001 00 00 001 0ZL 00L EI S8 ZL 09 eel 06 Y 09 FI 140080c 0006 NWO 001 osz mes 08 Sl 08 vol al eine gesl 0S ml os el So0d80c 00 9 NNO B Se Se OL 00c 00c 09 OLL 09 08 09 c6 166 Zi 06 t 0 Or zsoagoz 000 NWO St9 384 N 0S ost met 0S 06 os 89 IS Or sOc zoel o v el gel el oroagoz 000p NN Sp2 383 IN 0s Sc S Ov OL ov rei em velesz ei os v o Sc z veoagoz 000 NWO 2 0 383 N 0S oo mt ES 09 sel ml s l 22 902 el o el oz z zzoagoz 00S2 NWO SZ9 384 SZ9 380 W 20 320 IN 0 08 08 Sz 0S Sz wi elen ee oS
11. Mask OR If Any bits in the value are set in the mask then the output is On Selected Value 0 O JO 0 1 1 jO jO 1 1 1 1 0 0 JO JO Mask 0 i0 jo jO O JO O O 1 JO 0 0 O J1 JO J0 Result Output On Mask AND If All bits in the value are set in the mask then the output is On Selected Value O 0 IO JO 1 1 JO O 1 1 1 1 JO JO JO JO Mask 0 0000 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Result Output Off 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q BitMasked pris 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x Reserved 2 Bit amp Factory Default Bit Values e Example 53 9 a INPUTS amp OUTPUTS Applications File Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 600 TorgProve Cnfg Enables disables torque brake proving feature When Enabled Digital Out1 Sel becomes the brake control Note this value is not changed when parameters are o reset to factory defaults page 3 35 Related NS CH Sege SE EE AALA GSES 1 Enabled X XIXIX X X X X X x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Disabled o e EE x Reserved 3 Bit a Factory Default Bit Values Ei Option Descriptions 2 e Enable Enables TorqProve features Encoderless Enables encoderless operation bit 0 must also be enabled MicroPosSel A 1 allows the Micro Position digital input to change the speed
12. Yous Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 32 Group File No 179 180 181 Restart Modes 182 183 177 184 Power Loss 185 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Sleep Wake Ref Selects the source of the input controlling the Sleep Wake function Wake Level Defines the analog input level that will start the drive Wake Time Defines the amount of time at or above Wake Level before a Start is issued Sleep Level Defines the analog input level that will stop the drive Sleep Time Defines the amount of time at or below Sleep Level before a Stop is issued Gnd Warn Level Sets the level at which a ground warning fault will occur Configure with Alarm Config 1 Power Loss Mode Sets the reaction to a loss of input power Power loss is recognized when e DC bus voltage is lt 73 of DC Bus Memory and Power Loss Mode is set to Coast e DC bus voltage is lt 82 of DC Bus Memory and Power Loss Mode is set to Decel Power Loss Time Sets the time that the drive will remain in power loss mode before a fault is issued Publication 20B UM002C EN P Values Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default
13. Programming and Parameters 3 65 Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 66 Programming and Parameters File 705 707 70 CO POS SPD PROFILE ProfSetup Status 711 713 714 71 CO 719 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Pos Spd Prof Cmd Control word for the profile indexer The control functions are the same as those in the digital input section If a digital input is configured to provide the starting step bits 0 4 then its starting step value takes priority over Pos Spd Prof Cmd If a digital input is configured for any of bits 8 12 the corresponding functions will respond to the digital input status or the status of Pos Spd Prof Cmq Se 4S Se E EE Vey x xix x ojo o o x x x o o o o o j Brailed KEE 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 y Beserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Encoder Pos Tol Default 10 Sets the At Position tolerance window Min Max 1 50000 see Pos Spd Prof Sts bit 12 around Units 1 the encoder count The value is subtracted from and added to the encoder unit value It is applied to all steps using encoder units Counts per Unit Default 4096 Sets the number of encoder counts equal Min Max 1 1000000 to one unit A 1024 PPR quadrature Units
14. Fan Voltage 690 Volt Tap 600 Volt Tap 480 Volt Tap 400 Volt Tap l n nl Publication 20B UM002C EN P Installation Wiring 1 9 Frame 6 Transformer Tap Access The transformer is located behind the Power Terminal Block in the area shown in Figure 1 2 Access is gained by releasing the terminal block from the rail To release terminal block and change tap 1 2 Auxiliary Control Power Supply An Auxiliary Control Power Supply such as the 20 24V AUX1 can provide control power for certain PowerFlex 700 drives See details below used with any PowerFlex 700 Standard Control drive or 200 240 Volt Vector Control drive Using the power supply with these drives will cause equipment component damage ATTENTION The Auxiliary Control Power Supply Must Not be Locate the small metal tab at the bottom of the end block Press the tab in and pull the top of the block out Repeat for next block if desired Select appropriate transformer tap Replace block s in reverse order The Auxiliary Control Power Supply Must Not be used with Any Standard Control drive 15 position of the catalog number string equals A B or N Any 200 240V PowerFlex 700 drive Standard or Vector Control 4 position of the catalog number string equals B The Auxiliary Control Power Supply Can be used with 400 480 and 600 690 Volt drives with Vector Co
15. Factory Default Bit Values 240 Fault Clear Resets a fault and clears the fault queue Publication 20B UM002C EN P Default Options Default is 1 for Frames 8 10 2 When enabled the drive ignores the shear pin fault during any accel decel 0 Ready Ready Clear Faults Clr Fit Que Mi ch CH 242 243 245 247 249 251 253 255 257 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Fault Clear Mode Default 1 Enabled Enables disables a fault reset clear Options 0 Disabled faults attempt from any source This 1 Enabled does not apply to fault codes which are cleared indirectly via other actions Power Up Marker Default Read Only Elapsed hours since initial drive power Min Max 0 0000 214748 3647 Hr up This value will rollover to 0 after the Units 0 1 Hr drive has been powered on for more than the max value shown For relevance to most recent power up see Fault x Time Fault 1 Code Default Read Only Fault 2 Code Fault 3 Code Un s m Fault 4 Code i Fault 5 Code Fault 6 Code Fault 7 Code Fault 8 Code A code that represents the fault that tripped the drive The codes will appear in these parameters in the order they occur Fault 1 Code the most recent fault Fault 1 Time Default Read Only En Min Max 0 0000 214748 3647 H
16. PI Pre load Value 0 PI Pre load Value gt 0 PI Enabled mM CEET er gt 3 500 Fee eee so tart t SpdiCmd L4 II g v PI Output p momo LI 1111 m 1000 000 750 500 250 00 250 500 750 1000 II Normalized Feedback Spd Cmd Pre load to Command Speed Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 30 Figure C 13 Process Trim unus yg M Jejeurereg eu PREY k EE Eiere mewer eumee D 0 lt le sojowered UO peu lt gt cD E sa les epow biyypds o1 Z Ur gt enbio eousigjay anbi f t P ET 1 T T E D ECH SC Ewe DS DER lt dum Es ke lt dwey IL I d lt OF H NE HE Deeg kA paedg 0 f 1eeun 1 fo o w gt leg v jeg enbio Je paeds pepuewwog TC pang EOJ Des 10 s aen peod Io ED m ng uo
17. Type Alarm Description D User Configurable These alarms can be enabled or disabled through Alarm Config 1 on page 3 44 Non Configurable These alarms are always enabled Publication 20B UM002C EN P 4 2 Troubleshooting Drive Status The condition or state of your drive is constantly monitored Any changes will be indicated through the LEDs and or the HIM if present Front Panel LED Indications Figure 4 1 Typical Drive Status Indicators Flex Powertizx E o J N f Name Color State Description PWR Green Steady Illuminates when power is applied to the drive Power STS Green Flashing Drive ready but not running amp no faults are present Status Steady Drive running no faults are present Yellow Flashing A start inhibit condition exists the drive cannot be See Drive Stopped started Check parameter 214 Start Inhibits page 4 10 Flashing An intermittent type 1 alarm condition is occurring Drive Running Check parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Steady A continuous type 1 alarm condition exists Drive Running Check parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Red Flashing Fault has occurred Check Fault x Code or Fault Queue See Steady A non resettable fault has occurred page 4 4 PORT Green Status of DPI port internal communications if present MOD Yellow Status of communications module when installed NETA Bed Status of netw
18. 670 Adj Volt Trim Hi Default 100 0 9 Scales the upper value of the Adj Volt Min Max 0 0 100 0 of Drive Rated TrimSel selection when the source is an Volts analog input Units 0 1 671 Adj Volt Trim Lo Default 0 0 Scales the lower value of the Adj Volt Min Max 0 0 100 0 of Drive Rated as TrimSel selection when the source is an Volts g analog input Units 0 1 S 672 Adj Volt Trim 96 Default 0 096 B Scales the total voltage trim value from Min Max 100 0 of Drive Rated E all sources Analog In 1 amp 2 are scaled Volts separately with Adj Volt Trim Hi amp Adj Units 0 196 Volt Trim Lo then Adj Volt Trim sets the trim value The sign of this value will determine if trim is added or subtracted from the reference 675 Adj Volt AccTime Default 0 0 Secs Sets the rate of voltage increase The Min Max 0 0 3600 0 Secs value will be the time it takes to ramp the Units 0 1 Secs voltage from Min Adj Voltage to Maximum Voltage An S curve can be applied to the ramp using Adj Volt Scurve 676 Adj Volt DecTime Default 0 0 Secs Sets the rate of voltage decrease The Min Max 0 0 3600 0 Secs value will be the time it takes to ramp the Units 0 1 Secs voltage from Maximum Voltage to Min Adj Voltage An S curve can be applied to the ramp using Adj Volt Scurve Important This ramp and Decel Time 1 2 parameters 142 143 must ramp to zero for drive to Stop
19. Connector Description DPI Port 1 HIM connection when installed in cover DPI Port 3 or 2 Splitter cable connected to DPI Port 2 provides additional port No o DPIPort2 Cable connection for handheld and remote options e o DPI Port 5 Cable connection for communications adapter Publication 20B UM002C EN P B 2 HIM Overview LCD Display Elements Display Description Direction Drive Status Alarm Auto Man Information Hz Commanded or Output Frequency Main Menu Diagnostics Parameter Device Select Programming Monitoring Troubleshooting The top line of the HIM display can be configured with DPI Fdbk Select parameter 299 ALT Functions To use an ALT function start at the Main Menu and press the ALT key release it then press the programming key associated with one of the following functions Table B A ALT Key Functions ALT Key and then Performs this function ce SMART Displays the S M A R T screen View Allows the selection of how parameters will be viewed or detailed information about a parameter or component Lang Displays the language selection screen v Auto Man Switches between Auto and Manual Modes Remove Allows HIM removal without causing a fault if the ALT e HIM is not the last controlling device and does not have Manual control of the drive en Exp Allows value to be entered as an exponent N
20. Powerup Delay Time Expired Yes All Start Permissives Met 1 No fault conditions present 2 No Type 2 alarm conditions present No 3 The terminal block programmed enable input is closed 4 The Stop input from all sources is received Yes Is the terminal block Run Run Forward or Run Reverse Input Closed Yes Y Powerup Start Powerup Terminated Normal Mode Stop Mode The PowerFlex 700 offers several methods for stopping a load The method mode is defined by Stop Brk Mode A B parameters 155 amp 156 These modes include e Coast e Ramp e Ramp to Hold e DC Brake e Fast Brake Additionally Flux Braking parameter 166 can be selected separately to provide additional braking during a Stop command or when reducing the speed command For Stop commands this will provide additional braking power during Ramp or Ramp to Hold selections Publication 20B UM002C EN P Mode Coast to Stop Application Notes C 37 only If Fast Brake or DC Brake is used Flux Braking will only be active during speed changes if enabled A Ramp selection will always provide the fastest stopping time if a method to dissipate the required energy from the DC bus is provided i e resistor brake regenerative brake etc The alternative braking methods to external brake requirements can be enabled if the stopping time is not as restrictive Each of these methods
21. Restore defaults 2 Reprogram parameters Read the Attention on page C 5 relating to the use of TorqProve with no encoder Check load requirements and Current Lmt Val setting Replace Main Control Board Replace Main Control Board Check for excess load improper DC boost setting DC brake volts set too high Check wiring between drive and motor Check release of mechanical brake m Fault No Type Description Troubleshooting 4 9 Action Output transistors have exceeded Trnsistr OvrTemp UnderVoltage UserSet1 Chksum UserSet2 Chksum eo 101 102 103 Q Q their maximum operating temperature DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 407V DC at 400 480V input or 204V DC at 200 240V input Enable Disable with Fault Config 1 page 3 42 The checksum read from the user set does not match the checksum calculated 1 Verify that maximum ambient temperature has not been exceeded 2 Check fan 3 Check for excess load Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption Re save user set UserSet3 Chksum 1 See page 4 1 for a descri ption of fault types Table 4 B Fault Cross Reference No Fault No 1 Fault No Fault 2 Auxiliary Input 38 Phase U to Grnd 87 IXo VoltageRange 3 Power Loss 39 Phase V to Grnd 88 Software Fault
22. of WY A gt 5 5 0 22 Frames 0 1 8 0 7 0 0 28 Frames 2 3 0 31 3 Places Dimensions are in millimeters and inches g Weight 2 kg Ibs E Drive amp A B C D E Drive Packaging O 110 0 4 33 336 0 13 23 200 0 7 87 80 0 3 15 320 0 12 60 5 22 11 5 8 16 18 1 135 0 5 31 336 0 13 23 200 0 7 87 105 0 4 13 320 0 12 60 7 03 15 5 9 98 22 2 222 0 8 74 342 5 13 48 200 0 7 87 192 0 7 56 320 0 12 60 12 52 27 6 15 20 33 5 3 222 0 8 74 517 5 20 37 200 0 7 87 192 0 7 56 500 0 19 69 18 55 40 9 22 68 50 BSS Publication 20B UM002C EN P Refer to Table A L for frame information Weights include HIM and Standard I O Supplemental Drive Information A 21 Figure A A PowerFlex 700 Frame 4 Le A 15 0 0 59 gt 7 0 0 28 dia E D gt e 65 Kk ET n parie i II we H Lee 8 D Powertiex o o B E o o Y C H g ni p A 7 1 7 0 0 28 gt lt uM 3 Places 031 Lifting Holes 4 Places Dimensions are in millimeters and inches oes tee o 220 0 8 66 758 8 29 87 1201 7 7 94 192 0 7 56 738 2 29 06 24 49 54 0 1 Refer to Table A L for frame information 2 Weights include HIM and Standard I O Approx Weight 2
23. 185 1 7 29 Ee E Lei 2 99 lt gt 2 All 167 5 6 59 gt 156 9 6 18 28 7 1 13 Dia 3 Places 22 4 0 88 Dia T A meoo 15 5 Eim 7 28 6 20 150 9 is shoal T 6 94 j 1121 id ange 4 41 Meets IS Hn H D 39 3 1 55 lt gt 57 2 2 25 72 7 2 86 lt gt 106 0 4 17 139 4 5 49 1774 6 98 Ei g co Publication 20B UM002C EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 25 Frame Rating Dimensions 3 All Le 105 3 4 15 except 222 0 87 Dia T 947 973 gt 37 3 1 47 Dia 50 HP oy 2 Places 28 7 1 13 Dia 480V 2 Places 37 kW GENE 400V 1845 E 7 26 1514 160 1 5 95 d l l 6 30 1277 D 40990 O 5 03 OO OO CH HLH HEH PEIO n n 227 0 89 gt BN 29 0 1 14 gt 66 0 2 60 lt gt 97 0 3 82 187 2 5 40 187 0 7 36 v Le
24. 1 00 1 00 40 00 0 01 10 00 Inch 0 25 25 00 Inch 0 01 Inch Read Only 0 00 32000 00 0 01 10 4 Ohms 0 0 100 0 Ohms 0 1 Ohms Related Io CO zx o ES IO o Ico IND o LR IO LA Ico Ic IND Kai Ico 63 Programming and Parameters 3 d Parameter Name amp Description Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 648 Gearbox Limit Default 100 096 Gen Sets the gearbox torque limit This value Min Max 0 0 200 0 is used in determining the Pos Torque Units 0 1 Limit amp Neg Torque Limit Related Oil Well Pump Group 650 Adj Volt Phase Default 1 3 Phase 1 Phase 0 Select to operate single Options 0 1 Phase phase loads connected to the U amp V 1 3 Phase phases Not designed to operate single phase motors 9 Phase 1 Select to operate three phase loads 651 Adj Volt Select Default 2 Analog In 2 9 Selects the source of the voltage Options 0 Reserved reference to the drive 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 3 6 Reserved 7 8 Not Used 9 MOP Level 10 Reserved 11 17 Preset Volt 1822 DPI Port 1 5 652 Adj Volt Ref Hi Default 100 0 9 Scales the upper value of the Adj Volt Min Max 100 0 of Drive Rated 2 Select selection when the source is an Units Volts 9 analog input 0 196 E 653 Adj Volt Ref Lo Default 0 096 zl 9 Scale
25. 611 0 24 10 i y 539 0 21 20 467 0 18 40 P 395 0 15 60 323 0 12 70 A 251 0 9 90 YYYvYYYYYY 1078 0 42 40 f Ee i A Cutout 1054 0 41 5 44 0 1 70 122 0 4 80 200 0 7 90 278 0 10 90 356 0 14 00 434 0 17 10 512 0 20 20 12 0 0 50 Publication 20B UM002C EN P A 34 Supplemental Drive Information Frame Cross Reference Table A L PowerFlex 700 Frames Frame Frame AC Input 208 240 400V 480V 600V 690V ND HP HDHP ND kW HDkW NDHP HDHP NDHP HD HP ND kW HD kW 0 5 0 33 0 37 0 25 0 5 0 33 1 0 5 1 0 75 0 75 0 55 1 0 75 2 1 1 5 0 75 2 1 5 3 2 2 2 1 5 3 2 5 3 4 2 2 5 3 7 5 5 55 4 7 5 5 2 1 5 75 5 5 10 75 10 7 5 3 2 11 75 15 10 15 10 5 3 7 5 5 ni Sg 10 75 15 11 20 15 20 15 18 5 15 25 20 25 20 15 10 22 18 5 30 25 30 25 20 15 30 22 40 30 40 30 37 30 50 40 50 40 25 20 45 37 60 50 60 50 30 25 40 30 55 45 75 60 75 60 45 37 5 50 40 75 55 100 75 100 75 55 45 75 55 90 75 60 50 90 75 125 100 125 100 110 90 75 60 110 90 150 125 150 125 132 110 100 75 132 110 200 150 540V 650V NDHP HDHP ND
26. 9 D ev 9t Lel be L 06 v L 2 0 Zde380c 5 9L8 320 W SL 9 H v H D H ZT aal T 0 v 90 L 0 Zdi380c I DV HOA 009 9 OPL SIBQUNN DOE Sepe XEN a XEN XEN 1 YIN eme auw 29S UNL 109 vA sduy A ZH GH QN 3 On ei Buey 9 D sn4 Aejaq asny ejog sduyinding sBuneu vulbeu Buney 3 Bop Wan ajqeisnipy ui 40128304d Joo WOH 0199 0Jd 1942319 euu uoN oul Wee ynduy duet WMd dH eau uo mam end Joo gi Se1oN 40 CL ebed ees seoinag uotoeio1d Pdu 2v HOA 009 3 V a0eL Publication 20B UM002C EN P A 15 Supplemental Drive Information sueis s eyeq eieq A009 10 AO uo esn 10 P S TIN JON A009 10 72 2 A08t EHEC 10 OAM OFZ eyed 10 e M BOZ 104 P S TIN rejouo 104014 uoneurquio 3 ed p3499401d H9S jenuejy ONJO9JIP JWI eui 0 eouerduioo au get 0 JASN eui jo Ajiiqisuodse eui si ewioeirq eDejoA MO7 eu JOOW 0 perejoep eje p Q swei sduiy 11 Mojeq Soup sse A009 SON Bune ag ye pejejedo eq eu ewup eu suoneordde np Aneay 10 euo pue suoreoridde Ajnp jeuuou 10 euo sPumel zuana penp eeu seAuq leqe do eeu jou op 9 G seureJ4 einjejeduje siy 1e Aup ejeredo 0 parowa aq snw jaqe do euseupe eu uado ed 7N VWAN JO si Dune einjereduie p 0 sowed e uq uedQ ed TN VWINAN 00dI eq iji Buea einsojoue eAup od Wan pue jeqe do sAow a Isny 2 o0p SI SOALIP euoe puejs vSdl cL d L 1 eui 10 aunyesoduua juerquie eu SG S eJnsojoue episui uoniod
27. parameter 088 Parameters 700 877 set up the indexer profiler e Motor Control Modes For Position Indexing with an encoder only FVC Vector Control should be used for optimum performance For Velocity Profiling any motor control mode can be used However Sensorless Vector or FVC Vector Control modes will offer the best performance e Direction Control The drive must be configured to allow the profile to control the direction This is accomplished by setting Direction Mode parameter 190 to Bipolar default is Unipolar Publication 20B UM002C EN P C 18 Application Notes e Limits Many threshold values can affect the performance of the profile indexer To help minimize the possibility of overshooting a position ensure that the following parameters are set for the best performance No Parameter Description 153 Regen Power Limit Default is 50 and will likely require a greater negative value A brake or other means of dissipating regenerative energy is recommended 147 Current Lmt Sel By default these parameters are set to provide 150 of 148 Current Lmt Val drive rating If lowered the performance may be degraded 161 Bus Reg Mode A The default setting will adjust frequency to regulate the 162 Bus Reg Mode B DC Bus voltage under regenerative conditions This will e Speed Regulator most likely cause a position overshoot To resolve this select Dynamic Brak and size
28. 001 084 001 Ort SOL 08 S0 cel os t Sc O v 0808907 0006 NIN2 001 S z S z o osi o6 sop ai wll zm os rel er ozoggoz 00 9 NWO a z 001 00 002 09 001 09 08 9 Za 861 Ip os t St 0c cSsoggoc DESMET S 0 383 W og os me e os os ol zo ail ege os v orf gu gl zrogaoz RO SCHEER og DU oo se ml s ml mi Selm ss os zu OL c ecoggoc 00SZ NNO EREECHEN 0 08 og s os se gl om orl 661 os gei zzoggoz 919 383 IN 919 380 910 420 W oe 09 09 0c oe 0c tc 89L St ZS ZEL os v 8 S LI Si0ggoc 010 383 W 010 38G W 010 320 W Sh ge ge c oz at ml om 96 vej es os nz CU Sep 010 384 010 38G W 010 320 gl ES sz o al of z 6 s9 vc 69 os st z 8499907 9 380 W 98 32O N n gl gl S 8 s v9 8v cv vt ee os v s 0 Un edvagoc SC amp 38 HN S8 320 N gl Ok 9 e t v2 zz co Di os v tc0 sojo zazagoz OV HOA Orc VU OI Siaquiny De aigeneny a EN a XEN a XEN jj UIN on yun 999 uw L 1009 vay sdwy 2 zay GH ON 3 sequnN 9 eBuey Di esni ejeg esnj ejeg sduyindino sBupeu j beu Guney 3 Bo juaun ejqeisn py YUM 20128301d 1016 WOY 10129 01d 1042319 eujj UoN eui jueuig 3 ndul dway Wad dH eng HNDID uno leng 1010 seioN 104 71 9Bed aag see uonaejoid Indu JY HOA DEZ gg elder Publication 20B UM002C EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 12
29. 1 encoder has 4096 pulses counts in one revolution Vel Override Default 100 0 This value is a multiplier to the Step x Min Max 10 0 150 0 Velocity value when Vel Override bit of Units 0 196 Pos Spd Prof Cmd is set to 1 This is applicable to all step types Find Home Speed Default 10 0 of Maximum Sets the speed and direction that are Speed active when Find Home of Pos Spd Min Max 50 0 of Maximum Prof Cmd is active The sign of the value Speed defines direction Forward Units 0 1 Hz Reverse 0 1 RPM Find Home Ramp Default 10 0 Secs Sets the rate of acceleration and deceler Min Max 0 0 3600 0 Secs ation of the Find Home moves Units 0 1 Secs Pos Reg Filter Default 25 0 Sets the error signal filter in the position Min Max 0 0 500 0 regulator Units 0 1 Pos Reg Gain Default 4 0 Sets the gain adjustment for the position Min Max 0 0 200 0 regulator Units 0 1 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Related Programming and Parameters 3 67 Parameter Name amp Description Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values File Group Related 720 Step 1 Type Default 1 Time 730 Step 2 Type ions End 740 Step 3 Type ESI d E 750 Step 4 Type 2 Time Blend 760 Step 5 Type 3 Dig Input 770 Step 6 Type 4 Encoder Incr 780 Step 7 Type 5 EncincrBlend 790 Step 8 Type 6 Encoder Abs 80
30. 1 Absolute 4 1 0 Signed QURE E 0 xzReserved X X X X X X X rs m 10 9 Bit Factory Default Bit Values Publication 20B UM002C EN P I gt I IND e N Programming and Parameters 3 53 o Parameter Name amp Description ir Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 342 Analog Outi Sel Default O Output Freq 001 345 Analog Out2 Sel Options See Table 002 Selects the source of the value that 003 drives the analog output a Analog Out1 Lo Value Q07 Options Param 341 Signed Param 341 Absolute Analog Out Hi Value d 0 Output Freq Maximum Speed 0 Hz Maximum Speed 135 1 Command Spd Maximum Speed 0 Hz RPM Maximum Speed pec 2 Output Amps 0 Amps 0 Amps 200 Rated 136 3 Torque Amps 200 Rated 0 Amps 200 Rated 137 4 Flux Amps 0 Amps 0 Amps 200 Rated 138 5 Output Power 0 kW O kW 200 Rated 220 6 Output Volts 0 Volts 0 Volts 120 Rated Input Volts 219 7 DC Bus Volts 0 Volts 0 Volts 200 Rated Input Volts 8 Pl Reference 100 0 100 9 PI Feedback 100 0 100 10 PI Error 100 0 100 11 PI Output 100 0 100 12 Motor OL 0 0 100 18 Drive OL 0 0 100 14 CommandedTrq 800 Rated 0 800 Rated a 15 MtrTrqCurRef 200 Rated 0 200 Rated 2 16 Speed Ref Maximum Speed 0 Hz RPM Maximum Speed e mH 17 Speed
31. 3 3 Viewing B 5 Parameter Chksum Fault 4 7 Parameter Cross Reference by Name 3 72 by Number 3 75 Parameter Linking B 6 Parameter View Advanced Vector Control 3 5 Basic Vector Control 3 4 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Parameters 32 Bit 3 2 Accel Mask 3 48 Accel Owner 3 49 Accel Time x 3 26 Adj Volt AccTime 3 64 Adj Volt Command 3 63 Adj Volt DecTime 3 64 Adj Volt Phase 3 63 Adj Volt Preset 3 63 Adj Volt Ref Hi 3 63 Adj Volt Ref Lo 3 63 Adj Volt S Curve 3 65 Adj Volt Select 3 63 Adj Volt Trim 3 64 Adj Volt Trim Hi 3 64 Adj Volt Trim Lo 3 64 Adj Volt TrimSel 3 64 Alarm 1 Fault 3 41 Alarm 2 Fault 3 42 Alarm Clear 3 44 Alarm Config 1 3 44 Alarm x Code 3 44 Analog In x Hi 3 52 Analog In x Lo 3 52 Analog Inx Value 3 8 Analog Out Scale 3 53 Analog Out Hi 3 53 Analog Out Lo 3 53 Analog Out Sel 3 53 Analog Out2 Hi 3 53 Analog Out2 Lo 3 53 Analog Out2 Sel 3 53 Anlg In Config 3 51 Anlg In Loss 3 52 Anlg In Sqr Root 3 51 Anlg Out Absolut 3 52 Anlg Out Config 3 52 Anlg Out Setpt 3 54 Auto Rstrt Delay 3 30 Auto Rstrt Tries 3 30 Autotune 3 12 Autotune Torque 3 13 Break Frequency 3 15 Break Voltage 3 15 Brk Alarm Travel 3 61 Brk Release Time 3 60 Brk Set Time 3 60 BrkSlip Count 3 60 Bus Reg Kd 3 29 Bus Reg Ki 3 28 Bus Reg Kp 3 29 Bus Reg Mode A 3 29 Bus Reg Mode B 3 29 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Commanded Speed 3 7 Commanded Torque 3 8 Compensat
32. It is possible to use the Assisted Start Up see page 2 3 to tune the motor However it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the hoist crane equipment during the routine If this is not possible refer to steps 1 through 12 on the following pages ATTENTION To guard against personal injury and or equipment damage caused by unexpected brake release verify the Digital Out 1 brake connections and or programming The default drive configuration energizes the Digital Out 1 relay when power is applied to the drive The PowerFlex 700 drive will not control the mechanical brake until TorqProve is enabled If the brake is connected to this relay it could be released If necessary disconnect the relay output until wiring programming can be completed and verified Initial Static Auto Tune Test 1 Set the following parameters as shown No Name Value Notes 380 Digital Ou Sel 9 At Speed keeps brake engaged during test 041 045 Motor NP pernameplate enter motor nameplate data 053 Motor Cnt Sel 4 FVC Vector 080 Feedback Select 3 Encoder 061 Autotune 1 Static Tune 2 Press the Start key on the HIM Parameters 062 064 will be updated Publication 20B UM002C EN P C 6 Application Notes Motor Rotation Encoder Direction Test 3 Setthe following parameters as shown No Name Value Notes 053 Motor Cntl Sel 0 Sensrls Vect 080 Feedback Select 0
33. Main Menu Memory Storage Start Up Preferences Publication 20B UM002C EN P 2 6 Start Up Notes Publication 20B UM002C EN P Chapter 3 Programming and Parameters Chapter 3 provides a complete listing and description of the PowerFlex 700 parameters The parameters can be programmed viewed edited using an LCD HIM Human Interface Module As an alternative programming can also be performed using DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive software and a personal computer Refer to Appendix B for a brief description of the LCD HIM For information on See page About Parameters 3 1 How Parameters are Organized 3 3 Monitor File 3 7 Motor Control File 3 9 Speed Command File 3 16 Dynamic Control File 3 26 Utility File 3 33 Communication File 3 46 Inputs amp Outputs File 3 51 Applications File 3 59 Pos Spd Profile File 3 65 Parameter Cross Reference by Name 3 72 Parameter Cross Reference by Number 3 75 About Parameters To configure a drive to operate in a specific way drive parameters may have to be set Three types of parameters exist e ENUM Parameters ENUM parameters allow a selection from 2 or more items The LCD HIM will display a text message for each item e Bit Parameters Bit parameters have individual bits associated with features or conditions If the bit is 0 the feature is off or the condition is false If the bit is 1 the feature is on
34. S Sy SS Se 1 Save X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 0 0 4 pls 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 D0 Not Save Bit Factory Default Bit Values MOP Rate Default 1 0 Hz s 30 0 RPM s Sets rate of change of the MOP reference in response to a digital input Min Max 0 2 Maximum Freq 6 0 Maximum Freq Units 0 1 Hz s 0 1 RPM s Publication 20B UM002C EN P Related Programming and Parameters 3 35 o o d Parameter Name amp Description ic Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 196 Param Access Lvl Default 0 Basic Selects the parameter display level Options 0 Basic viewable on the HIM 1 Advanced e Basic Reduced parameter set 2 Reserved e Advanced Full parameter set e Reserved Full parameter set and Engineering parameters refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual This parameter is not reset when Reset to Defaults is selected 197 Reset To Defalts Default 0 Ready 041 en Resets parameters to factory defaults Options 0 Ready thru except Mtr NP Pwr Units Speed Units 1 Factory 047 Param Access Lvl Language Voltage 2 Low Voltage 054 Class amp TorqProve Cnfg params 46 3 High Voltage 055 79 196 201 202 amp 600 062 e Option 1 resets parameters to factory 063 defaults based on Voltage Class 069 e Options 2 amp 3 will set Voltage Class ae to low or high settings and reset parameters to corresponding
35. Torque Current 3 7 Torque Proving C 4 Torque Proving Group 3 59 Torque Ref B Mult 3 13 Torque Ref x Hi 3 13 Torque Ref x Lo 3 13 Torque Ref x Sel 3 13 Torque Reference Source 1 24 Torque Setpoint1 3 14 Torque Setpoint2 3 14 Total Gear Ratio 3 62 Total Inertia 3 26 Trim 96 Setpoint 3 21 Trim Hi 3 21 Trim In Select 3 21 Trim Lo 3 21 Trim Out Select 3 21 Trnsistr OvrTemp Fault 4 9 Troubleshooting 4 1 U Unbalanced Ungrounded Supply 1 3 UnderVoltage Alarm 4 12 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Index 14 Fault 4 9 Ungrounded Distribution Systems 1 14 Units Traveled 3 65 Unshielded Power Cables 1 5 User Configurable Alarm 4 1 User Sets B 4 UserSet Chksum Fault 4 9 Utility File 3 33 V Vel Override 3 66 VHz Neg Slope Alarm 4 12 Viewing and Changing Parameters B 5 Voltage Class 3 36 Voltage Tolerance C 40 Volts per Hertz Group 3 14 W Wake Level 3 32 Wake Time 3 32 Waking Alarm 4 12 Watts Loss IP20 NEMA Type 1 drives A 4 IP54 NEMA Type 12 drives A 5 Web Sites see WWW World Wide Web Wire Control 1 18 Signal 1 17 Wiring 1 1 Access Panel Removal 1 7 Cable Entry Plate Removal 1 7 Encoder 1 20 Hardware Enable 1 21 IO 1 17 Potentiometer 1 22 Power 1 5 Write Mask Cfg 3 50 WWW World Wide Web P 1 P 2 Back 2 Z Zero SpdFloatTime 3 60 Publication 20B UM002C EN P PowerFlex 700 Parameter Record
36. Use Present Time X X Decel Rate 00 No Command 01 Use Decel Time 1 10 Use Decel Time 2 11 Use Present Time x x x Reference 000 No Command Select 001 Ref 1 Ref A Select 010 Ref 2 Ref B Select 011 Ref 3 Preset 3 100 Ref 4 Preset 4 101 Ref 5 Preset 5 110 Ref 6 Preset 6 111 Ref 7 Preset 7 D MOP 0 Not Decrement Decrement 1 Decrement Il A O Not Stop condition logic 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive The Start command acts as a momentary Start command A 1 will start the drive but returning to O will not stop the drive 2 This Start will not function if a digital input parameters 361 366 is programmed for 2 Wire Control option 7 8 or 9 3 This Reference Select will not function if a digital input parameters 361 366 is programmed for Speed Sel 1 2 or 3 option 15 16 or 17 When using the Logic Command Word for the Speed Reference Selection always set bit 12 13 or 14 to 1 Note that Reference Selection is Exclusive Ownership see Reference Owner on page 3 49 Publication 20B UM002C EN P A 8 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 2 Logic Status Word Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Status Description Ready 0 Not Ready 1 Ready Active 0 Not Active 1 Active Command 0 Reverse Direction 1 Forward Actual 0 Reverse Direction
37. ZeroSpdFloatTime Sets the amount of time the drive is below Float Tolerance before the brake is set Not used in Encoderless TorqProve mode Float Tolerance Sets the frequency level where the float timer starts Also sets the frequency level where the brake will be closed in Encoderless TorqProve mode Brk Set Time Defines the amount of delay time between commanding the brake to be set and the start of brake proving TorqLim SlewRate Sets the rate to ramp the torque limits to zero during brake proving BrkSlip Count Sets the number of encoder counts to define a brake slippage condition Not used in encoderless operation Publication 20B UM002C EN P COSI QS Enabled 0 0 0 0 E 0 Disabled 3210 x Reserved Default 2 0 Hz 60 0 RPM Min Max 0 1 15 0 Hz 3 0 450 0 RPM Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Default 60 mSec Min Max 1 200 mSec Units 1 mSec Default 0 10 Secs Min Max 0 00 10 00 Secs Units 0 01 Secs Default 5 0 Secs Min Max 0 1 500 0 Secs Units 0 1 Secs Default 0 2 Hz 6 0 RPM Min Max 0 1 5 0 Hz 3 0 150 0 RPM Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Default 0 10 Secs Min Max 0 00 10 00 Secs Units 0 01 Secs Default 10 0 Secs Min Max 0 5 300 0 Secs Units 0 1 Secs Default 250 Min Max 0 65535 Units 1 Related lo e 29 Programming and Parameters 3 61 Parameter Name amp Description Group Related o ir 2 see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 610 Brk
38. b YYY f d 28 0 1 10 gt Le 45 0 1 77 85 0 3 35 150 0 5 91 215 0 8 46 gt 255 0 10 04 Le gt 100 HP 34 9 1 37 Dia 480V 42 6 1 68 22 2 0 87 Diay frp 47 Dia Normal 31 9 1 26 Removable Junction Box Duty Drive ER ano A FTN 959 2035 m 8 80 188 5 7 42 184 3 7 20 GH 153 5 6 04 96 0 rg 3 78 p YY Y d 280 10 Le 440 1 73 66 4 2 61 128 0 5 04 9 2823 9 15 Le gt Publication 20B UM002C EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 27 Frame Rating Dimensions 6 All 34 9 1 37 Dia 22 2 0 87 Dia 56 2 2 21 E 3 Places 62 7 2 47 Dia 4 Places 45 6 1 80 lt gt A 3 Places zt Removable Junction Box i rmn E CNN 242 0 Su m 2190 9 53 riseg i 222 3 A A Eom fs 148 5 535 OOOO tho 151 8 116 6 JE LE e CO 5 98 4 59 4O0 0 O Q O O O OO Q Q O O OXO O O OXO OA CO Ch SS OlOOOQooco ooCcOo Y Y mm RR i E Y 52 1 2 05 lt gt 69 1 2 72 130 1 5 12 230 1 9 06
39. command while the drive is running Preload Sel 0 uses the last torque for preload 1 uses TorqRef A if commanded direction is forward and TorqRef B for reverse Load Spd Um Enables drive to perform load calculation at base speed Drive will then limit operation above base speed depending on load NoEnclsBkSlp A 1 Disables the partial Brake Slip routine from the drive when encoderless is selected Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 60 File 60 602 60 99 604 Torque Proving 605 60 c 607 608 60 eo Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions TorqProve Setup Allows control of specific torque proving functions through a communication device Values oo x Nx Oo ojx TX x x x x x x x po 9 Bit Factory Default Bit Values Spd Dev Band Defines the allowable difference between the commanded frequency and encoder feedback value A fault will occur when the difference exceeds this value for a period of time SpdBand Integrat Sets the amount of time before a fault is issued when Spd Dev Band is outside its threshold Brk Release Time Sets the time between the brake release command and when the drive begins to accelerate In Encoderless mode this parameter sets the time to release the brake after drive starts
40. 0 1 RPM must be lt Maximum Freq Allowable Output Frequency Range Bus Regulation or Current Limit lt Allowable Output Frequency Range Normal Operation 3 lower limit on this range can be 0 depending on the value of Speed Adder l Le Allowable Speed Reference Range gt l i Maximum l l Voltage Motor NP Il l Voltage lt Frequency Trim l S due to Speed Overspeed E i Control Mode gt Limit Break E EMEN l i amp Voltage 1 J l I GO Start i Boost I Run Boost n I Minimum Break Motor NP Hz Maximum Output Maximum Speed Frequency Speed Frequency Frequency Frequency Limit Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 18 File SPEED COMMAND Spd Mode amp Limits Group Programming and Parameters 087 088 454 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Skip Frequency 1 Default 0 0 Hz 0 Skip Frequency 2 Default 0 0 Hz Skip Frequency 3 Default 0 0 Hz Sets a frequency at which the drive will Min Max Maximum Speed not operate Units 0 1 Hz Skip Freq Band Default 0 0 Hz 0 Determines the bandwidth around a skip Min Max 0 0 30 0 Hz e frequency Skip Freq Band is split Units 0 1Hz applying 1 2 above and 1 2 below the actual skip frequency The same bandwidth applies to all skip frequencies Speed Torque Mod Default 1 Speed Reg 0 Selects the torque reference source Optio
41. 1 Forward D Accel 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating X Decel 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating X Alarm 0 No Alarm 1 Alarm X Fault 0 No Fault 1 Fault X At Speed 0 Not At Reference 1 At Reference X x x Local 000 Port 0 TB Control 001 Port 1 010 Port 2 011 Port 3 100 Port 4 101 Port 5 110 Reserved 111 No Local X x x x Reference 0000 Ref A Auto Source 0001 Ref B Auto 1 See Owners on page 3 47 for further information Publication 20B UM002C EN P 0010 Preset 2 Auto 0011 Preset 3 Auto 0100 Preset 4 Auto 0101 Preset 5 Auto 0110 Preset 6 Auto 0111 Preset 7 Auto 1000 Term Blk Manual 1001 DPI 1 Manual 1010 DPI 2 Manual 1011 DPI 3 Manual 1100 DPI 4 Manual 1101 DPI 5 Manual 1110 Reserved 1111 Jog Ref Supplemental Drive Information A 9 Output Devices Common mode cores are internal to the drive For information on output contactors see page 1 13 Other devices such as cable terminators and output reactors are discussed in the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines manual publication DRIVES INOOI Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings The tables on the following pages provide drive ratings including continuous 1 minute and 3 second and recommended AC line input fuse and circuit breaker information Both types of short circuit protection are acceptable for UL and IEC requirements Sizes list
42. 1 See Data In A1 Link A Word 1 Data In A2 Link A Word 2 See Data In A1 Link A Word 1 Data In A2 Link A Word 2 See Data In A1 Link A Word 1 Data In A2 Link A Word 2 Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 50 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 Default 0 0 Disabled Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 Min Max 0 611 Parameter number whose value will be Units 1 written to a communications device data table 312 Data Out B1 Link B Word 1 See Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 313 Data Out B2 Link B Word 2 Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 314 Data Out C1 Link C Word 1 See Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 315 Data Out C2 Link C Word 2 Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 316 Data Out D1 Link D Word 1 See Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 317 Data Out D2 Link D Word 2 Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 595 Port Mask Act Read Only Bits 0 5 indicate status for DPI port communication Bit 15 indicates when security software is controlling the parameter Zo 05 V E EVE VESEY d GE 4 ESSERE 0 x xIxixix xix xixi1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Active Oz Not Active p i5 14 13 12111 1098 7654 3210 x Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values 596 Write Mask Cfg Enables disables write access parameters links et
43. 11 Preset Spd1 12 Preset Spd2 13 Preset Spd3 14 Preset Spd4 15 Preset Spd5 16 Preset Spd6 17 Preset Spd7 18 DPI Port 1 19 DPI Port 2 20 DPI Port P 21 DPI Port 4 1 22 DPI Port 5 2324 Reserved 25 Scale Block1 26 Scale Block2 27 Scale Block3 28 Scale Block4 Maximum Speed Maximum Speed 0 1Hz 0 01 RPM 0 0 Maximum Speed 0 1Hz 0 01 RPM 11 Preset Spdt See Speed Ref A Sel Maximum Speed Maximum Speed 0 1Hz 0 01 RPM 0 0 Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 0 01 RPM 3 19 Related o IO IND o cO ech j j je mE baten cnt SESEBZEBS NIO c i i c iic c IS INS m NES N lw IB g IND Sai CO Ka IND Ic Ka lO L o gt io gt IO c KO Eat Ico o Ico IND o Ei Ico o Ico a Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 20 No 096 097 Speed References 098 099 a z a E Q eo D TT HI a N 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions TB Man Ref Sel Sets the manual speed reference source when a digital input is configured for Auto Manual 1 Analog In 2 is not a valid selection if it was selected for any of the following Trim In Select PI Feedback Sel PI Reference Gell Current Lmt Sel Sleep
44. 11 IR Voltage Drop 3 12 IR Volts Range Alarm 4 11 IR Volts Range Fault 4 6 Ixo Vit Rang Alarm 4 11 Ixo Voltage Drop 3 12 IXo VoltageRange Fault 4 6 J Jog Mask 3 48 Jog Owner 3 48 Jog Speed 1 3 20 Jog Speed 2 3 20 Publication 20B UM002C EN P K Kf Speed Loop 3 25 Ki Speed Loop 3 25 Kp Speed Loop 3 25 L Language 3 35 Last Stop Source 3 39 LCD HIM Menus B 4 LEDs 4 2 Lifting Torque Proving C 4 Limit Switches C 11 Linear List 3 3 Linking Parameters B 6 Load Frm Usr Set 3 35 Load Limits Group 3 26 Load Loss Alarm 4 11 Load Loss Fault 4 6 Load Loss Level 3 33 Load Loss Time 3 33 Local Mask 3 48 Local Owner 3 49 Logic Command Word A 7 Logic Mask 3 47 3 51 Logic Mask Act 3 51 Logic Status Word A 8 Low Voltage Directive 1 27 M Man Ref Preload 3 34 Manual Conventions P 2 Manual Mode 1 24 Manual Auto Control 1 25 Marker Pulse 3 16 Masks amp Owners Group 3 47 Max Rod Speed 3 62 Max Rod Torque 3 62 MaxFreq Conflict Alarm 4 11 Maximum Freq 3 10 Maximum Speed 3 17 Maximum Voltage 3 10 Memory Retention Motor Overload C 16 Menu Structure HIM B 4 Metering Group 3 7 MicroPos Scale 3 61 Min Adj Voltage 3 63 Min Rod Speed 3 62 Minimum Clearances 1 2 Minimum Speed 3 17 C 12 MOD LED 4 2 Modes Auto Manual 1 24 Monitor File 3 7 MOP Adj VoltRate 3 64 MOP Config Group 3 34 MOP Mask 3 48 MOP Owner 3 49 MOP Rate 3 34 MOP Reference 3 7 Motor Cabl
45. 20 49 6 Detail 1 95 gt 1 P P E lt c 5 A eg Ee _ Fg o s e o Powerflex o B ECC MN E o eo e o Y 3 EH Oo AA xxl 1 126 3 8 5 0 33 ol E Lifting Holes 4 97 L13 5 0 53 4 Places Y 12 7 0 50 Dia Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight 9 kg Ibs Drive amp A Max C Max Packaging 403 9 15 90 300 0 11 81 825 0 32 48 71 44 157 5 100 9 222 0 UI Refer to Table A L for frame information Junction Box can be removed if drive is mounted in a cabinet 3 Weights include HIM and Standard I O Add 13 60 kg 30 0 Ibs for the following drives 20BB260 20BC260 and 20BD248 BS Publication 20B UM002C EN P A 24 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 7 PowerFlex 700 Bottom View Dimensions Frame Rating Dimensions 0 All 96 0 3 78 lt gt 75 0 2 95 55 0 2 17 lt lt 350 138 Tt 22 2 0 87 Dia 4 Places 302 1 19 1875 ame 7 38 H S E 1329 Meise 5 23 e IE nes IN o IO 41 9 1 65 Get 56 1 221 75 9 2 99 4 96 0 3 78 Utg 1 All 108 5 4 27 87 5 8 44 67 5 2 66 475 1 87 28 6 1 13 Dia y 255 1 00 187 6 7 39 133 3 5 25 43 0 1 69 70 0 2 76 759 96 0 3 78 22 2 0 87 Dia 3 Places OAG L 6 39
46. 39 295 Fault Clr Owner Masks amp Owners 3 49 214 Start Inhibits Diagnostics 3 39 296 MOP Owner Masks amp Owners 3 49 215 Last Stop Source Diagnostics 3 39 297 Local Owner Masks amp Owners 3 49 216 Dig In Status Diagnostics 3 40 298 DPI Ref Select Comm Control 3 47 217 Dig Out Status Diagnostics 3 40 299 DPI Fdbk Select Comm Control 3 47 218 Drive Temp Diagnostics 3 40 300 307 Data In XX Datalinks 3 49 219 Drive OL Count Diagnostics 3 40 310 317 Data Out XX Datalinks 3 50 220 Motor OL Count Diagnostics 3 40 320 Anlg In Config Analog Inputs 3 51 221 Mtr OL Trip Time Diagnostics 3 40 321 Anlg In Sqr Root Analog Inputs 3 51 224 Fault Speed Diagnostics 3 40 322 325 Analog In X Hi Analog Inputs 3 52 225 Fault Amps Diagnostics 341 323 326 Analog In X Lo Analog Inputs 3 52 226 Fault Bus Volts Diagnostics 3 41 324 327 Analog In X Loss Analog Inputs 3 52 227 228 Status X Fault Diagnostics 3 41 340 Anlg Out Config Analog Outputs 3 52 229 230 Alarm X Fault Diagnostics 341 34 Anlg Out Absolut Analog Outputs 3 52 234 236 Testpoint X Sel Diagnostics 342 342 345 Analog OutX Sel Analog Outputs 3 53 235 237 Testpoint X Data Diagnostics 342 343 346 Analog OutX Hi Analog Outputs 3 53 238 Fault Config 1 Faults 342 344 347 Analog OutX Lo Analog Outputs 3 53 240 Fault Clear Faults 3 42 354 355 Anlg OutX Scale Analog Outputs 3 53 241 Fault Clear Mode Faults 3 43 361 366 Digital
47. 4 UnderVoltage 40 Phase W to Grnd 89 Software Fault 5 OverVoltage 41 Phase UV Short 90 Encoder Quad Err 7 Motor Overload 42 Phase VW Short 91 Encoder Loss 8 Heatsink OvrTemp 43 Phase UW Short 92 Pulse In Loss 9 Trnsistr OvrTemp 48 Params Defaulted 93 Hardware Fault 12 HW OverCurrent 49 Drive Powerup 100 Parameter Chksum 13 Ground Fault 51 Fit QueueCleared 101 103 UserSet Chksum 15 Load Loss 52 Faults Cleared 104 Pwr Brd Chksum1 16 Motor Thermistor 55 Cnt Bd Overtemp 105 Pwr Brd Chksum2 17 Input Phase Loss 63 Shear Pin 106 Incompat MCB PB 18 Hardware PTC 64 Drive OverLoad 107 Replaced MCB PB 20 TorgPrv Spd Band 69 DB Resistance 108 Anlg Cal Chksum 21 Output PhaseLoss 70 Power Unit 109 NVS VO Checksum 24 Decel Inhibit 71 75 Port 1 5 Adapter 110 NVS VO Failure 25 OverSpeed Limit 77 IR Volts Range 121 UO Comm Loss 28 See Manual 78 FluxAmpsRef Rang 122 UO Failure 29 Analog In Loss 79 Excessive Load 130 Hardware Fault 33 Auto Rstrt Tries 80 AutoTune Aborted 181 Hardware Fault 36 SW OverCurrent 81 85 Port 1 5 DPI Loss 900 930 Fatal Faults 1 Fault numbers not listed are reserved for future use Publication 20B UM002C EN P 4 10 Troubleshooting Clearing Alarms Alarms are automatically cleared when the condition that caused the alarm is no longer present Alarm Descriptions Table 4 C Alarm Descriptions and Actions Alarm o 33 Description Invalid adjustable voltage reference selection conflict
48. 422 Pulse In Scale 663 MOP Adj VoltRate 423 Encoder Z Chan 669 Adj Volt TrimSel 427 431 Torque Ref X Sel 670 Adj Volt Trim Hi 428 432 Torque Ref X Hi 671 Adj Volt Trim Lo 429 433 Torque Ref X Lo 672 Adj Volt Trim 430 Torq Ref A Div 675 Adj Volt AccTime 434 Torque Ref B Mult 676 Adj Volt DecTime 435 Torque Setpoint 677 Adj Volt S Curve 436 Pos Torque Limit 705 Pos Spd Prof Cmd 437 Neg Torque Limit 707 Encoder Pos Tol 438 Torque Setpoint2 708 Counts Per Unit 440 Control Status 711 Vel Override 445 Ki Speed Loop 713 Find Home Speed 446 Kp Speed Loop 714 Find Home Ramp 447 Kf Speed Loop 718 Pos Reg Filter 449 Speed Desired BW 719 Pos Reg Gain 450 Total Inertia 720 Step x Type 454 Rev Speed Limit 721 Step x Velocity 459 PI Deriv Time 722 Step x AccelTime 460 PI Reference Hi 723 Step x DecelTime 461 PI Reference Lo 724 Step x Value 462 PI Feedback Hi 125 Step x Dwell 463 PI Feedback Lo 726 Step x Batch 476 494 ScaleX In Value 727 Step x Next 477 495 ScaleX In Hi Publication 20B UM002C EN P U S Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support Tel 1 262 512 8176 Fax 1 262 512 2222 Email support drives ra rockwell com Online www ab com support abdrives www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automa
49. 6 End N A N A 0 5 N A 0 00 N A N A Publication 20B UM002C EN P C 26 Application Notes Example 3 Five Step Positioner with Incremental Encoder The first three steps of this indexer are Encoder Incr steps followed by an Encoder Abs step to zero and then an End Hold Position step For each Encoder Incr step the drive ramps at Step x AccelTime to Step x Velocity in the direction of the sign of Step x Value It then decelerates at the rate of Step x DecelTime to the position programmed in Step x Value which sets the desired units of travel for the step When the value programmed in Step x Value is reached within the tolerance window programmed in Encoder Pos Tol the At Position bit is set in Profile Status In this example a dwell value held each of the first three steps At Position for 1 second After the Step x Dwell time expires the profile transitions to the next step The absolute step is used to send the profile back to the home position This is accomplished by programming Step 4 Value to zero Figure C 10 Encoder Incremental w Dwell Example 350 30 25 pojoAe1 sium 2 150 S Complete e N 2 50 a 7 90 110 10 Ke At Position 13 i 150 2 10 B 250 2 a S 5 2 350 Hi Step 3 450 0 Time Encoder Speed 415 m Profi
50. 69 219 5 8 64 196 5 I m 110 7 74 478 0 12 7 0 50 Dia Lifting Holes 4 Plcs 0 43 TI 18 82 gt T T d o Air a Outlet s g S D 1061 0 127 6 j 4177 5 02 e H 1039 0 o ii 40 91 d e E 449 6 17 74 e M o o Y le A 532 2 09 194 0 7 60 Y le Y E Koss 11 0 D L Ground NC A 0 43 M5 PEM Nut R E 5 5 0 22 Dia Holes for Supplied Mounting Hardware rr m 40 Plcs 303 6 11 95 olololo o 2 3 0 09 Se Compressed E PeR 185 0 Gasket p 2 7 30 y Y go 8 82 E wr 42 0 384 0 1 65 lt 15 12 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight Hl kg Ibs Description Drive amp Packaging 5 Flange Mount 61 69 136 0 81 65 180 0 1 Weights include HIM and Standard 1 0 Publication 20B UM002C EN P A 30 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 10 Frame 5 Flange Mount Cutout 4 00 0 157 Dia Holes 40 Places in Minimum 14 GA 1 9 Steel Mounting Surface Deburr Pilot Holes 10 0 La 458 0 and Drive Cutout _ 0 39 18 03 1039 0 40 91 TERGUM o d i A 1026 5 40 41 n 948 5 37 34 Sa A 870 5 34 27 792 5 31 20 A li Cutout i 714 5 28 13 ds 1019 0 A li 40 12 636 5 25 06 558 5 21 99 ad 480 5 18 92 A i 402 5 15 85 324 5 12 78 246 5 9 71 168 5 6 63 90 5 3 56 y YYYYYYYYYY Y
51. 96 parameter 611 This allows for slower operation of a lift which provides an operator with better resolution when positioning a load Micro Position is activated only when the drive is running at or near zero speed This can be initiated by a digital input configured as Micro Pos or through a communication device TorqProve Setup which is the same digital input which signals the float condition To allow the Micro Position digital input to change the speed command while the drive is running enter a 1 in Parameter 600 Bit 2 MicroPosSel A 0 will require drive to reach zero speed for micro position speed to become active Fast Stop Fast Stop is intended to stop the load as fast as possible then set the mechanical brake The Fast Stop can be initiated from a digital input or through a communication device through TorqProve Setup The difference from a normal stop is that the decel time is forced to be 0 1 seconds When the Torque Proving function is enabled the Float time is ignored at the end of the ramp This feature can be used without enabling the Torque Proving function Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 11 Limit Switches for Digital Inputs The PowerFlex 700 includes digital input selections for decel and end limit switches These can be used for applications that use limit switches for decelerating near the end of travel and then stopping at the end position The end limit switch can also be u
52. Absolut 341 Analog Outputs 3 52 DPI Fdbk Select 299 Comm Control 3 47 Anlg Out Config 340 Analog Outputs 3 52 DPI Port Sel 274 CommContro 3 47 Anlg OutX Scale 354 355 Analog Outputs 3 53 DPI Port Value 275 Comm Control 3 47 Anlg OutX Setpt 377 378 Analog Outputs 3 54 DPI Ref Select 298 Comm Control 3 47 Auto Rstrt Delay 175 Restart Modes 3 30 Drive Alarm X 211 212 Diagnostics 3 38 Auto Det Tries 174 Restart Modes 3 30 Drive Checksum 203 Drive Memory 3 36 Autotune 61 Torq Attributes 3 12 Drive Logic Rslt 271 CommControl 3 46 Autotune Torque 66 Torg Attributes 3 13 Drive OL Count 219 Diagnostics 3 40 Break Frequency 72 Volts per Hertz 13 15 Drive OL Mode 150 Load Limits 3 27 Break Voltage 71 Volts per Hertz 3 15 Drive RampRsit 273 Gomm Control 246 Brk Alarm Travel 610 Torq Proving 3 61 Drive Ref Belt 272 CommContro 3 46 Brk Release Time 604 Torq Proving 3 60 Drive Status X 209 210 Diagnostics 3 37 Brk Set Time 607 og Proving 3 60 Drive Temp 218 Diagnostics 3 40 BrkSlip Count 609 Torq Proving 61 Droop RPM FLA 152 Load Limits 3 27 Bus Reg Kd 165 Stop Brake Modes 3 29 Dyn UserSet Ach 206 DriveMemory 3 37 Bus Reg Ki 160__ Stop Brake Modes 3 28 Dyn UserSetCnfg 204 DriveMemory 3 36 Bus Reg Kp 164 Stop Brake Modes 3 29 Dyn UserSetSel 205 DriveMemory 3 36 Bus Reg Mode X 161 162 Stop Brake Modes 3 29
53. AdjVoltRef Cfict Analog In Loss Bipolar Conflict Brake Slipped Decel Inhibt Dig In ConflictA Dig In ConflictB CO O rype 10 17 An analog input is configured for Alarm on signal loss and signal loss has occurred Parameter 190 Direction Mode is set to Bipolar or Reverse Dis and one or more of the following digital input functions is configured Fwd Reverse Run Forward Run Reverse Jog Forward or Jog Reverse Encoder movement has exceeded the level in BrkSlipCount after the brake was set Drive is being inhibited from decelerating cause an alarm Acc2 Dec2 Accel 2 Decel 2 Jog 1 2 Jog Fwd Jog Rev Fwd Rev Acc2 Dec2 E E Accel 2 A Decel 2 Jog 1 2 Jog Fwd Jog Rev Fwd Rev A digital Start input has been configured without a Stop input or other functions are in conflict Combinations that conflict are marked with a and will cause an alarm Stop Jog Fwd CF Start Run Run Fwd Run Rev 1 2 JogFwd Jog Rev Rev Start Stop CF Run Run Fwd Run Rev Jog 1 2 A A Jog Fwd Jog Rev Fwd Rev Publication 20B UM002C EN P Alarm Dig In ConflictC Drive OL Level 1 Drive OL Level 2 FluxAmpsRef Rang Ground Warn Home Not Set In Phase Loss IntDBRes OvrHeat I
54. Alarm Travel Default 1 0 Revs Sets the number of motor shaft Min Max 0 0 1000 0 Revs revolutions allowed during the brake Units 0 1 Revs slippage test Drive torque is reduced to check for brake slippage When slippage occurs the drive allows this number of motor shaft revolutions before regaining control Not used in Encoderless TorqProve mode 611 MicroPos Scale Default 10 0 361 Q9 Sets the percent of speed reference to be Min Max 0 1 100 0 thru used when micropositioning has been Units 0 1 E selected in TorqProve Cnfg Bit 2 of TorqProve Cnfg parameter 600 determines if the motor needs to come to a stop before this setting will take effect 612 Torq Prove Sts Read Only Displays the status bits for TorqProve Torque Proving 1 Enabled 0 Disabled x Reserved X X X X X P 15 14 13 12 11 Bit 631 Rod Load Torque Default Read Only Displays the load side torque Alarm Min Max 0 00 32000 00 FtLb Config 1 parameter 259 bit 19 must be Units 0 01 FtLb enabled to activate this display 632 TorqAlarm Level Default 0 00 FtLb Sets the level at which the Torque Alarm Min Max 0 00 5000 00 FtLb becomes active Note only active with Units 0 01 FtLb PC pump applications see param 641 ex o Mx 633 TorgAlarm Action Default 0 No Action Sets the drive action when the Torque Opti
55. Analog Inputs Anlg In Config 320 Analog In2 Hi 325 Outputs Analog In1 Hi 322 Analog In2 Lo 326 Analog In1 Lo 323 Analog Outputs Analog Out 2 Sel 342 Analog Outi 2Lo 344 Analog Out2 Hi 346 Analog Out Hi 343 Analog Out 2 Sel 345 Analog Out 2 Lo 347 Digital Inputs Digital In1 6 Sel 361 366 Digital Outputs Digital Out1 3 Sel 380 388 Dig Out 3 Level 381 389 These parameters will only be displayed when parameter 053 Motor Cntl Sel is set to option 4 Publication 20B UM002C EN P File Monitor Motor Control BS LN Dynamic Control continued on page 3 6 Programming and Parameters 3 5 Advanced Parameter View Parameter 196 Param Access Lvl set to option 1 Advanced Group Parameters Metering Output Freq 001 Flux Current 005 DC Bus Memory 013 Commanded Speed002 Output Voltage 006 Analog In1 Value 016 Ramped Speed 022 Output Power 007 Analog In2 Value 017 Speed Reference 023 Output Powr Fctr 008 Elapsed kWh 014 Commanded Torque 024 Elapsed MWh 009 PTC HW Value 018 Speed Feedback 025 Elapsed Run Time 010 Spd Fdbk No Filt 021 Output Current 003 MOP Reference 011 Torque Current 004 DC Bus Voltage 012 Drive Data Rated kW 026 Rated Amps 028 Rated Volts 027 Control SW Ver 029 Motor Data Motor Type 040 Motor NP RPM 044 Motor OL Factor 048 Motor NP Volts 041 Motor NP Power 045 Motor Poles 049 Motor NP FLA 042 Mtr NP Pwr Units 046 Motor
56. Control can operate in one of two configurations Publication 20B UM002C EN P C 14 Application Notes 1 Encoderless Not to be confused with Sensorless Vector above Encoderless Vector based on Allen Bradley s patented Field Oriented Control technology means that a feedback device is not required Torque control can be achieved across a significant speed range without feedback 2 Closed Loop with Encoder force Vector Control with encoder feedback utilizes Allen Bradley s Force Technology This industry leading technology allows the drive to control torque over the entire speed range including zero speed For those applications that require smooth torque regulation at very low speeds or full torque at zero speed Closed Loop Vector Control is the answer Speed Regulators Any of the PowerFlex drives regardless of their motor control technology Volts Hz Sensorless Vector or Vector can be set up to regulate speed Speed regulation and torque regulation must be separated to understand drive operation The PowerFlex 700 can offer improved speed regulation by adding speed feedback Using a speed feedback device encoder tightens speed regulation to 0 001 of base speed and extends the speed range to zero speed Motor Overload For single motor applications the drive can be programmed to protect the motor from overload conditions An electronic thermal overload DT function emulates a thermal overload relay This oper
57. Drive devices In addition you must have an understanding of the parameter settings and functions What Is Not in this Manual The PowerFlex 700 Series B User Manual is designed to provide only basic start up information for the Vector Control drive Frames 0 6 For Frame 7 10 information refer to the Frame 7 10 Installation Instructions publication 20B INO14 For detailed drive information refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual publication PFLEX RMO004 Refer to the PowerFlex 700 Series A User Manual publication 20B UMO01 for Standard Control information Literature is available online at http www rockwellautomation com literature Refer to Reference Materials on the next page ATEX Approved Drives amp Motors For detailed information on using ATEX approved drives and motors refer to Appendix D Publication 20B UM002C EN P P 2 Overview Reference Materials The following manuals are recommended for general drive information Title Publication Available Online at Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for DRIVES INOO1 PWM AC Drives Preventive Maintenance of Industrial DRIVES TD001 Control and Drive System Equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application SGI 1 1 Installation and Maintenance of Solid www rockwellautomation com State Control literature A Global Reference Guide for 100 2 10 Reading Schematic Diagrams Guarding Against Electrostatic 8000 4 5 2 Damage For d
58. E Jumper Removal Frame Jumper Component Jumper Location No 0 1 PEA Common Mode Cap Remove the I O Cassette page 1 18 Jumpers located 9 PEB MOV s on the Power Board Figure 1 5 e 24 PEA Common Mode Cap Jumpers are located above the Power Terminal Block e PEB MOV s see Figure 1 5 o 5 Wire Common Mode Cap Remove the I O Cassette as described on page 1 18 All The green yellow jumper is located on the back of chas except sis see Figure 1 5 for location Disconnect insulate 140A and secure the wire to guard against unintentional con 400V amp tact with chassis or components 600 MOV s Note location of the two green yellow jumper wires next 690V Input Filter Cap to the Power Terminal Block Figure 1 5 Disconnect e insulate and secure the wires to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components 5 Wire Common Mode Cap Note location of the green yellow jumper wire shown in 140A MOV s Figure 1 5 Disconnect insulate and secure the wire to o 400V guard against unintentional contact with chassis or 600 Input Filter Cap components LR 690V 6 Wire Common Mode Cap Remove the wire guard from the Power Terminal Block MOV s Input Filter Cap Disconnect the three green yellow wires from the two PE terminals shown in Figure 1 4 Insulate secure the wires to guard against unintentional contact with chas sis or components Publication 20B UM0
59. Enabled 0 Disabled x Reserved User Set 1 User Set 2 User Set 3 User Set 3 oo Mx lt Cx qx x n2 x e x x x x x x x p5 14 13 12 11 10 9 Bit Factory Default Bit Values a olo o le Publication 20B UM002C EN P File UTILITY Drive Memory Diagnostics 20 D 20 ceo 210 Programming and Parameters 3 37 3 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values tc Dyn UserSet Actv Read Only Indicates the active user set and if the operation is dynamic or normal S S 9 2 d AS S S e x xix ix x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 eet True pus 14 13 1211 109 8 7 6 5 443 210 x Reserved Bit Drive Status 1 Read Only 210 Present operating condition of the drive ZE K K amp EE T AS EEEE ESSEE SSA SEE E C ACC e Ie I Ie ee BF YY NU NIA NI NT NT SUNT RY A 1 Condition True E S a ai i Ge i ba SOROR sn ig x Reserved Bit Bits 2 Bits 1 15 14 13 12 Description 11 10 9 Description 0 lo o f0 RefA Auto 0 lo 0 PortO TB 0 0 0 1 RefB Auto 0 0 1 Port1 0 O 1 0 Preset2 Auto 0 1 O Port2 0 0 1 1 Preset3 Auto 0 1 1 Port3 O 1 O 0 Preset4
60. Establishing A Link Key s Example Displays FG g Parameter Dflt 10 0 Secs the Up or Down Arrow to change Present Value to Define Link Press Enter or ED Present Value 4 Enter the Source Parameter Number and eS press Enter EE The linked parameter can now be viewed two e Defne Link different ways by repeating steps 1 4 and selecting Present Value or Define Link If Parameter 141 an attempt is made to edit the value of a Accel Time 2 linked parameter Parameter is Linked will Link 017 be displayed indicating that the value is coming from a source parameter and can not be edited 5 To remove a link repeat steps 1 5 and change the source parameter number to zero 0 6 Press Esc to return to the group list Publication 20B UM002C EN P Analog In1 Value Table B B Linkable Parameters HIM Overview B 7 Number Parameter Number Parameter Number Parameter 54 Maximum Voltage 159 DC Brake Time 462 PI Feedback Hi 56 Compensation 160 Bus Reg Ki 463 PI Feedback Lo 57 Flux Up Mode 164 Bus Reg Kp 476 494 ScaleX In Value 58 Flux Up Time 165 Bus Reg Kd 471 495 ScaleX In Hi 59 SV Boost Filter 170 Flying StartGain 478 496 ScaleX In Lo 62 IR Voltage Drop 175 Auto Rstrt Delay 479 497 Sca
61. Fdbk Maximum Speed 0 Hz RPM Maximum Speed EN 18 Pulse In Ref 25200 0 RPM 0 Hz RPM Maximum Speed E o 19 Torque Est 800 0 800 377 o 2023 Scale Block1 4 1 378 5E 24 Param Cnt Lt o x 25 SpdFb NoFilt z 1 Refer to Option Definitions on page 3 54 343 Analog Out Hi Default 20 000 mA 10 000 Volts 340 346 Analog Out2 Hi Min Max 0 000 20 000mA 242 Sets the analog output value when the 10 000V source value is at maximum Units 0 001 mA 0 001 Volt 344 Analog Out Lo Default 0 000 mA 0 000 Volts 340 347 Analog Out2 Lo Min Max 0 000 20 000mA 342 Sets the analog output value when the 10 000V source value is at minimum Units 0 001 mA 0 001 Volt 354 Anlg Out Scale Default 0 0 355 Anlg Out2 Scale Min Max Analog Ou Sel Sets the high value for the range of Units 0 1 analog out scale Entering 0 0 will disable this scale and max scale will be used Example If Analog Out Sel Commanded Trq a value of 150 150 scale in place of the default 800 Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 54 Programming and Parameters Group Analog Outputs MAUER Te I SM File mod Parameter Name amp Description S See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Anlg1 Out Setpt Default 20 000 mA 10 000 Volts Anlg Out Setpt Min Max 0 000 20 000mA Controls the analog output value from a 10 000V communication device Example Set Units 0 0
62. In 1 2 Loss on page 3 52 The checksum read from the analog calibration data does not match the checksum calculated Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and resume running for the programmed number of FIt RstRun Tries Enable Disable with Fault Config 1 on page 3 42 Autotune function was canceled by the user or a fault occurred Auxiliary input interlock is open The temperature sensor on the Main Control Board detected excessive heat Resistance of the internal DB resistor is out of range Key s Action 1 Check parameters 2 Check for broken loose connections at inputs Replace drive Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear Restart procedure Check remote wiring 1 Check Main Control Board fan 2 Check surrounding air temperature 3 Verify proper mounting cooling Replace resistor Fault Decel Inhibit Drive OverLoad Drive Powerup Excessive Load Encoder Loss Encoder Quad Err Fatal Faults Faults Cleared Fit QueueCleared FluxAmpsRef Rang Ground Fault Hardware Fault Hardware Fault Hardware Fault No Type 900 930 130 181 Description The drive is not following a commanded deceleration because it is attempting to limit bus voltage Drive rating of 11096 for 1 minute or 150 for 3 seconds has been exceeded Troubleshooting 4 5 Action 1 Verify input voltage is within drive specified limit
63. InX Se Digital Inputs 3 55 242 Power Up Marker Faults 343 377 378 Anlg OutX Geint Analog Outputs 3 54 243 Fault 1 Code Faults 343 379 Dig Out Setpt Digital Outputs 3 56 244 Fault 1 Time Faults 3 43 380 Digital OutX Sel Digital Outputs 3 57 245 Fault2 Code Faults 3 43 384 388 246 Fault 2 Time Faults 3 43 381 Dig OutX Level Digital Outputs 3 57 247 Fault3 Code Faults 343 385 989 248 Fault 3 Time Faults 3 43 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Number Parameter Name Group Page 382 Dig OutX OnTime Digital Outputs 3 57 386 390 383 Dig OutX OffTime Digital Outputs 3 58 387 391 392 Dig Out Inver Digital Outputs 3 58 393 Dig Out Param Digital Outputs 3 58 394 Dig Out Mask Digital Outputs 3 59 412 Motor Fdbk Type Speed Feedback 3 15 413 Encoder PPR Speed Feedback 3 15 414 Enc Position Fdbk Speed Feedback 3 15 415 Encoder Speed Speed Feedback 3 15 416 Fdbk Filter Sel Speed Feedback 3 15 419 Notch Filte
64. LEE ETT 3 1 How Parameters are Organized 3 3 en TEE EE 3 7 Motor Control bie 3 9 Speed Command File 3 16 Dynamic Control File 3 26 Utility File mena EE 3 33 Communication File 3 46 Inputs amp Outputs File 3 51 DA pplicationsjbilc eere 3 59 Pos Spd Profile File 3 65 Parameter Cross Reference by Name 3 72 Parameter Cross Reference by Number 3 75 Faults and Alarms 4 1 EE UE 4 2 Manually Clearing Faults 4 4 Fault Descriptions 4 4 Il 4 10 Alarm Descriptions 4 10 Common Symptoms Corrective Actions 4 13 Testpoint Codes and Functions 4 16 Publication 20B UM002C EN P ii Table of Contents Appendix A Supplemental Drive Information Appendix B HIM Overview Appendix C Application Notes Appendix D ATEX Approved Drives Index Publication 20B UM002C EN P Specifications sees te pecore ere A 1 Communication Configurations A 6 Output Devices 00 A 9 Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings A 9 Dimensions A 20 Frame Cross Reference A 34 External amp Internal Connections B 1 LCD Display Elements B 2 ALT Functions E B 2 Menu Structure B 3 Viewing and Editing Parameters B 5 Linking Parameter B 6 Removing Installing the HIM B 8 Adjustable Voltage Ope
65. Mask 288 thru Controls which adapters can select 297 Decel Time 1 2 283 Fault Clr Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters can clear a fault 2 284 MOP Mask See Logic Mask 288 a Controls which adapters can issue MOP they S commands to the drive 297 2 g 285 Local Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters are allowed to thru 2 take exclusive control of drive logic Pu commands except stop Exclusive local control can only be taken while the drive is stopped 288 Stop Owner Read Only 276 Adapters that are presently issuing a valid stop thru command 285 SE EAS MARA SS SS 1 Issuing Command X XIX X X X X X X x 0 0 0 0 0 1 pls 1413 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reene Bit 289 Start Owner See Stop Owner 276 Adapters that are presently issuing a thru valid start command 285 290 Jog Owner See Stop Owner 276 Adapters that are presently issuing a m valid jog command 285 Publication 20B UM002C EN P no z Q E E F4 E eo Masks amp Owners No 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 300 301 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Direction Owner Adapter that currently has exclusive control of direction changes Reference Owner Adapter that has the exclusive control of the command frequency source selection Accel Owner Adapter that has exclusi
66. NP Hertz 043 Motor OL Hertz 047 Torq Attributes Motor Cntl Sel 053 Flux Current Ref 063 Torque Ref BHi 432 Maximum Voltage 054 IXo Voltage Drop 064 Torque Ref B Lo 433 Maximum Freq 055 Autotune Torque 066 Torq Ref B Mult 434 Compensation 056 Inertia Autotune 067 Torque Setpoint 1 435 Flux Up Mode 057 Torque Ref A Sel 427 Torque Setpoint 2 438 Flux Up Time 058 Torque Ref A Hi 428 Pos Torque Limit 436 SV Boost Filter 059 Torque Ref A Lo 429 Neg Torque Limit 437 Autotune 061 Torq Ref A Div 430 Control Status 440 IR Voltage Drop 062 Torque Ref B Sel 431 Mtr Tor Cur Ref 441 Volts per Hertz Star Acc Boost 069 Break Voltage 071 Run Boost 070 Break Frequency 072 Speed Feedback Motor Fdbk Type 412 Fdbk Filter Sel 416 Marker Pulse 421 Encoder PPR 413 Notch Filter Freq 419 Pulse In Scale 422 Enc Position Fdbk 414 Notch Filter K 420 Encoder Z Chan 423 Encoder Speed 415 Spd Mode amp Speed Units 079 Overspeed Limit 083 Skip Freq Band 087 Limits Feedback Select 080 Skip Frequency 1 084 Speed Torque Mod 088 Minimum Speed 081 Skip Frequency 2 085 Rev Speed Limit 454 Maximum Speed 082 Skip Frequency 3 086 Speed Speed Ref A Sel 090 Speed Ref BH 094 TB Man Ref Hi 097 References Speed Ref AHi 091 Speed RefBLo 095 TB Man bei Lo 098 SpeedRefALo 092 TB Man Ref Sel 096 Pulse Input Ref 099 Speed Ref B Sel 093 Discrete Jog Speed 1 100 Preset Speed 1 7 101 107 Jog Speed 2 108 Speeds Speed Trim Tr
67. Options Default Min Max Units 2 Analog In 2 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 6 000 mA 6 000 Volts Sleep Level 20 000 mA 10 000 Volts 0 001 mA 0 001 Volts 0 0 Secs 0 0 1000 0 Secs 0 1 Secs 5 000 mA 5 000 Volts 4 000 mA Wake Level 0 000 Volts Wake Level 0 001 mA 0 001 Volts 0 0 Secs 0 0 1000 0 Secs 0 1 Secs 3 0 Amps 1 0 5 0 Amps 0 1 Amps Coast Coast Decel Continue Coast Input Decel Input AUON O O 0 5 Secs 0 0 60 0 Secs 0 1 Secs Related l I I um IG um IND IND Ico ped IC um CH Ion Programming and Parameters 3 33 Kal o d Parameter Name amp Description it See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 186 Power Loss Level Default Drive Rated Volts Sets the level at which the Power Loss Min Max 0 0 999 9 VDC Mode selection will occur Units 0 1 VDC o The drive can use the percentages referenced in Power Loss Mode or a trigger point can be set for line loss detection as follows Vrigger DC Bus Memory Power Loss Level A digital input programmed to 29 Pwr Loss Lvl is used to toggle between fixed percentages and the detection level ATTENTION Drive damage can occur if proper input impedance is not provided as explained below If the value for Power Loss Level is greater than 18 of DC Bus E Memory the user must provide a minimum lin
68. Reflect Wave Disables reflected wave overvoltage protection for long cable lengths typically enabled Enable Jerk In non FVC Vector modes disabling jerk removes a short S curve at the start of the accel decel ramp Ixo AutoCalc Not functional reserved for future enhancements Xsistor Diag 0 disables power transistor power diagnostic tests which run at each start command 1 enables transistor diagnostic tests Rs Adapt FVC w Encoder Only Disabling may improve torque regulation at lower speeds typically not needed Mtr Lead Rev Reverses the phase rotation of the applied voltage effectively reversing the motor leads Note This bit is reset to 0 when parameters are reset to factory defaults PWM Freq Lock Keeps the PWM frequency from decreasing to 2 kHz at low operating frequencies in FVC Vector mode without encoder 057 Flux Up Mode Default 0 Manual Auto Flux is established for a calculated Options 0 Manual time period based on motor nameplate 1 Automatic data Flux Up Time is not used Manual Flux is established for Flux Up Time before acceleration Flux Up Time Default 0 000 Secs Sets the amount of time the drive will use Min Max 0 000 5 000 Secs to try and achieve full motor stator flux Units 0 001 Secs When a Start command is issued DC current at current limit level is used to build stator flux before accelerating SV Boost Filter Default 500 Sets the amou
69. Tor Cur Ref 3 14 Neg Torque Limit 3 14 Notch Filter K 3 15 Notch FilterFreq 3 15 OilWell Pump Sel 3 62 Output Current 3 7 Output Freq 3 7 Output Power 3 7 Output Powr Fctr 3 7 Output Voltage 3 7 Overspeed Limit 3 17 Param Access Lvl 3 35 PCP Pump Sheave 3 62 PI BW Filter 3 24 PI Configuration 3 22 PI Control 3 22 PI Deriv Time 3 24 PI Error Meter 3 24 PI Fdback Meter 3 24 PI Feedback Hi 3 24 PI Feedback Lo 3 24 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Index 10 0 Feedback Sel 3 23 PI Integral Time 3 23 Lower Limit 3 23 Output Gain 3 25 Output Meter 3 24 Preload 3 23 PI Prop Gain 3 23 Ref Meter 3 24 Reference Hi 3 24 PI Reference Lo 3 24 PI Reference Sel 3 22 PI Setpoint 3 23 PI Status 3 24 PI Upper Limit 3 23 Pos Reg Filter 3 66 Pos Reg Gain 3 66 Pos Torque Limit 3 14 Pos Spd Prof Cmd 3 66 Pos Spd Prof Sts 3 65 Power Loss Level 3 33 Power Loss Mode 3 32 Power Loss Time 3 32 Powerup Delay 3 30 PowerUp Marker 3 43 Preset Speed x 3 20 PTC HW Value 3 8 Pulse In Scale 3 16 Pulse Input Ref 3 20 PWM Frequency 3 27 Ramped Speed 3 8 Rated Amps 3 8 Rated kW 3 8 Rated Volts 3 8 Reference Mask 3 48 Reference Owner 3 49 Regen Power Limit 3 27 Reset Meters 3 35 Reset To Defalts 3 35 Rev Speed Limit 3 18 Rod Load Torque 3 61 Run Boost 3 14 S Curve 3 26 Save HIM Ref 3 34 Save MOP Ref 3 34 Save To User Set 3 35 Scale In Hi 3 45 Scale In Lo 3 45 S
70. Type Incremental dual channel Supply 12V 250 mA 12V 10 mA minimum inputs isolated with differential transmitter 250 kHz maximum Quadrature 90 27 degrees at 25 degrees C Duty Cycle 50 10 Requirements Encoders must be line driver type quadrature dual channel or pulse single channel 8 15V DC output 3 5 6V DC when jumpers are in 5V position single ended or differential and capable of supplying a mini mum of 10 mA per channel Maximum input frequency is 250 kHz The Encoder Interface Board accepts 12V DC square wave with a mini mum high state voltage of 7 0V DC With the jumpers in the 5V posi tion the encoder will accept a 5V DC square wave with a minimum high state voltage of 3 1V DC In either jumper position the maximum low state voltage is 0 4V DC IP20 NEMA UL Type 1 Watts Loss Rated Load Speed amp PWM 1 Voltage 240V Voltage 400V ND HP 0 5 1 2 3 5 75 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 ND kW 0 37 0 75 1 5 2 2 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 90 110 132 External Watts Internal Watts Total Watts Loss 9 37 46 22 39 61 38 39 77 57 41 98 97 82 179 134 74 208 192 77 269 276 92 368 354 82 436 602 96 698 780 96 876 860 107 967 1132 138 1270 1296 200 1496 1716 277 1993 1837 418 2255 External Watts Internal Watts Total Watts Loss 11 42 53 19 44 63 31 45 76 46 46 93 78 87 164 115 79 194 134 84 218 226 99 326 303 91 394 33
71. Units 0 196 461 PI Reference Lo Default 100 0 Scales the lower value of PI Reference Min Max 100 0 Sel Units 0 196 462 PI Feedback Hi Default 100 0 Scales the upper value of PI Feedback Min Max 100 0 Sel Units 0 1 463 PI Feedback Lo Default 0 096 Scales the lower value of PI Feedback Min Max 100 0 Sel Units 0 196 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Programming and Parameters 3 25 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values PI Output Gain Default 1 000 Sets the gain factor for PI Output Meter Min Max 8 000 Units 0 001 445 Ki Speed Loop Default 7 0 Controls the integral error gain of the Min Max 0 0 4000 0 speed regulator The drive automatically Units 0 1 adjusts Ki Speed Loop when a non zero value is entered for Speed Desired BW or an autotune is performed Typically manual adjustment of this parameter is needed only if system inertia cannot be determined through an autotune Speed Desired BW is set to 0 when a manual adjustment is made to this parameter 446 Kp Speed Loop Default 6 3 Controls the proportional error gain of the Min Max 0 0 200 0 speed regulator The drive automatically Units 0 1 adjusts Kp Speed Loop when a non zero value is entered for Speed Desired BW or an auto tune is performed Typically manual adjustment of this parameter is needed only if system inertia canno
72. Values Option Description PI Control Controls the PI regulator AdjVoltTrim 10 Configures the PI regulator output to trim the voltage reference rather than the torque or speed references The trim can be configured to be exclusive by setting Excl Mode bit 0 Trimming the voltage reference is not compatible with trimming the torque reference thus if bits 8 amp 10 are set a type Il alarm will occur setting PI Cfg Cflct bit 19 in Drive Alarm 2 Publication 20B UM002C EN P w S WS x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 1 Enabled Ke 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 21 0 poe X M Bit Factory Default Bit Values PI Reference Sel Default 0 Pl Setpoint Selects the source of the Pl reference Options 0 PI Setpoint 1 Analog In 1 1 Adjustable Voltage Mode 2 Analog In 2 3 6 Reserved 7 Pulse In 8 Encoder 9 MOP Level 10 Master Ref 11 17 Preset Spd1 7 1822 DPI Port 1 5 2324 Reserved 2528 Scale Block 1 4 29 Preset1 7 Volt 1 36 Voltage Cmd Related me IND ENS coz Co c o Ico IO 024 124 thru 138 Programming and Parameters 3 23 Kl d Parameter Name amp Description S See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values amp 127 PI Setpoint Default 50 0096 124 Provides an internal fixed value for Min Max 100 00 of Maximum A process setpoint when
73. Wake Ref TB Man Ref Hi Scales the upper value of the TB Man Ref Sel selection when the source is an analog input TB Man Ref Lo Scales the lower value of the TB Man Ref Sel selection when the source is an analog input Pulse Input Ref Displays the pulse input value as seen at terminals 5 and 6 of the Encoder Terminal Block if Encoder Z Chan parameter 423 is set to Pulse Input Jog Speed 1 Sets the output frequency when Jog Speed 1 is selected Preset Speed 1 Preset Speed 2 Preset Speed 3 Preset Speed 4 Preset Speed 5 Preset Speed 6 Preset Speed 7 Provides an internal fixed speed command value In bipolar mode direction is commanded by the sign of the reference Jog Speed 2 Sets the output frequency when Jog Speed 2 is selected Publication 20B UM002C EN P Values Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units 1 Analog In 1 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 1 3 8 Reserved 9 MOP Level Maximum Speed Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 0 01 RPM 0 0 Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 0 01 RPM Read Only 420 0 Hz 25200 0 RPM 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM 10 0 Hz 300 0 RPM Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 1 RPM 5 0 Hz 150 RPM 10 0 Hz 300 RPM 20 0 Hz 600 RPM 30 0 Hz 900
74. and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 0 3 meters 1 foot Important I O terminals labeled or Common are not referenced to earth ground and are designed to greatly reduce common mode interference Grounding these terminals can cause signal noise driving it from a voltage source could cause component damage Verify ATTENTION Configuring an analog input for 0 20mA operation and A proper configuration prior to applying input signals when using bipolar input sources Noise and drift in sensitive input circuits can cause unpredictable changes in motor speed and direction Use speed command parameters to help reduce input source sensitivity ATTENTION Hazard of personal injury or equipment damage exists Signal and Control Wire Types Table 1 F Recommended Signal Wire Signal Type Belden Wire Type s Min Insulation Where Used or equivalent Description Rating Analog UO amp PTC 8760 9460 0 750 mm2 18 AWG twisted pair 100 300V shield with drain 75 90 C Remote Pot 8770 0 750 mm 18AWG 3 cond shielded 167 194 F Encoder Pulse WO Combined 9730 1 0 196 mm 24 AWG individually 30 m 100 ft shielded Encoder Pulse I O Signal 9730 9728 1 0 196 mm2 24 AWG indiv shielded 30 to 152 m Power 87900 0 750 mm 18AWG 100105000 fCombined 9892 0 830 mm or 0 500 mm Encoder Pulse UO Signal 9730 97281 0 196 mm 24AWO in
75. assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury and or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper Opening the Cover Frames 0 4 Locate the slot in the upper left corner Slide the locking tab up and swing the cover open Special hinges allow cover to move away from drive and lay on top of adjacent drive if present See page 1 7 for frame 4 access panel removal Frame 5 PowerFiex Slide the locking tab up loosen the F right hand cover screw and remove See page 1 7 for access panel removal Frame 6 Loosen 2 screws at bottom of drive cover Carefully slide bottom cover down amp out Loosen the 2 screws at top of cover and remove Publication 20B UM002C EN P 1 2 Installation Wiring Mounting Considerations Operating Temperatures PowerFlex 700 drives are designed to operate at 0 to 40 C ambient To operate the drive in installations between 41 and 50 C see the information below and refer to pages A 10 through A 19 for exceptions Table 1 A Acceptable Surrounding Air Temperature amp Required Actions Enclosure Rating Temperature Range Drive IP20 NEMA UL Type 1 with Top Label 0 40 C Frames 0 4 All Ratings 0 509 C Frames 5 6 Most Ratings
76. digital input is configured as Set Home and input is True parameter 705 bit 9 is Enabled parameter 700 bit 13 At Home is Enabled position regulator will set this bit if device is home The DC bus ripple has exceeded a preset level The drive has temporarily disabled the DB regulator because the resistor temperature has exceeded a predetermined value The drive auto tuning default is Calculate and the value calculated for IR Drop Volts is not in the range of acceptable values This alarm should clear when all motor nameplate data is properly entered Motor leakage inductance is out of range Output torque current is below Load Loss Level for a time period greater than Load Loss time The sum of Maximum Speed and Overspeed Limit exceeds Maximum Freq Raise Maximum Freq or lower Maximum Speed and or Overspeed Limit so that the sum is less than or equal to Maximum Freq The value at the thermistor terminals has been exceeded Motor Type has been set to Synchr Reluc or Synchr PM and one or more of the following exist e Motor Cntl Sel Sensrls Vect SV Economize or Fan Pmp V Hz Flux Up Time is greater than 0 0 Secs Speed Mode is set to Slip Comp Autotune Static Tune or Rotate Tune Publication 20B UM002C EN P 4 12 Troubleshooting e Alarm 2g NP Hz 22 Conflict PI Config 52 Conflict Power Loss 3 D Precharge 1
77. disconnect all power from the drive including external control power Disconnect the test switching devices from the two digital inputs Determine a way to interrupt the continuity of the over temperature circuit when it is reconnected to the motor Properly reconnect the motor over temperature contact connection to the drive and include the test mechanism to interrupt the over temperature circuit s continuity This includes both Digital Input 6 terminal 32 and the additional required digital input Reconnect the jumper between the two inputs if one had been in place Reconnect power to the drive including external control power Start drive and confirm that it is operating properly Interrupt the continuity of the over temperature circuit connected to the drive The drive should stop and the motor coast to rest The HIM OIM should indicate that the drive is in an Auxiliary Input fault condition Publication 20B UM002C EN P Instructions for ATEX Approved Drives with ATEX Approved Motors D 7 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Remake continuity of the over temperature circuit connected to the drive s digital inputs The drive should remain stopped and in an Auxiliary Input fault condition Provide the command to restart the drive In the case of a maintained start remove and reapply the start command The drive should remain stopped and in an Auxiliary Input fault condition Provide a fault reset command to th
78. displayed when parameter 053 Motor Cntl Sel is set to option 2 or 3 These parameters will only be displayed when parameter 053 Motor Cntl Sel is set to option 4 Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 6 Programming and Parameters File Group Parameters Dynamic Power Loss Power Loss Mode 184 Load Loss Level 187 Gnd Warn Level 177 Control Power Loss Time 185 Load Loss Time 188 continued Power Loss Level 186 Shear Pin Time 189 Utility Direction Config Direction Mode 190 HIM Ref Config Save HIM Ref 192 Man Ref Preload 193 MOP Config Save MOP Ref 194 MOP Rate 195 Drive Memory Param Access Lvl 196 Reset Meters 200 Dyn UserSet Cnfg 204 Reset To Defalts 197 Language 201 Dyn UserSet Sel 205 Load Frm Uer Gei 198 Voltage Class 202 Dyn UserSet Ach 206 Save To User Set 199 Drive Checksum 203 Diagnostics Drive Status 1 2 209 210 Dig Out Status 217 Fault Bus Volts 226 Drive Alarm 1 2 211 212 Drive Temp 218 Status 1 2 Fault 227 228 Speed Ref Source 213 Drive OL Count 219 Alarm 1 2 Fault 229 230 Start Inhibits 214 Motor OL Count 220 Testpoint 1 2 Sel 234 236 LastStop Source 215 Fault Speed 224 Testpoint 1 2 Data 235 237 Dig In Status 216 Fault Amps 225 Mtr OL Trip Time 221 Faults Fault Config 1 238 Fault Clear Mode 241 Fault 1 8 Code 243 257 Fault Clear 240 Power Up Marker 242 Fault 1 8 Time 244 258 Alarms Alarm Config 1 259 Alarm Clear 261 Alarm1 8 Code 262 269 Scaled Blo
79. guidelines must be considered Conditions Required to Start Drive 1 2 3 o o io After Power Up After a Drive Fault After a Stop Command z Reset by Stop CF Reset by Clear 5 Input HIM or TB Faults TB HIM or TB 9 Stop Stop Closed Stop Closed Stop Closed Stop Closed ra Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Direct Mode New Start or Run Cmd 4 Analog Sig gt Sleep Level Invert Mode Analog Sig lt Sleep Level 6 New Start or Run Cmd 4 Enable Enable Closed Enable Closed Enable Closed Enable Closed Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Direct Mode New Start or Run Cmd 4 Analog Sig gt Sleep Level Invert Mode Analog Sig lt Sleep Level 6 New Start or Run Cmd 4 Run Run Closed New Run Cmd 6 Run Closed New Run Cmd Run For Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Run Rev 1 When power is cycled if all of the above conditions are present after power is restored restart will occur 2 If all of the above conditions are present when Sleep Wake Mode is enabled the drive will start 3 The active speed reference is determined as explained in Reference Control on page 1 24 The Sleep Wake function and the speed reference may be assigned to the same input Command must be issued from HIM TB or network Run Command must be cycled Signal does not need to be greater than wake level For Invert function refer to Analog In x Loss
80. is issued by the PLC through a communications module installed in the drive Since the internal communications is designated as Port 5 Speed Ref A Sel is set to DPI Port 5 with the drive running from the Auto source Since the Manual speed reference is issued by an analog input Analog In 1 or 2 TB Man Ref Sel is set to the same input To switch between Auto and Manual Digital Ind Sel is set to Auto Manual Attain Manual Control e Close the digital input With the input closed the speed command comes from the pot Release to Auto Control e Open the digital input With the input open the speed command returns to the PLC Auto Manual Notes 1 Manual control is exclusive If a HIM or Terminal Block takes manual control no other device can take manual control until the controlling device releases manual control 2 If a HIM has manual control and power is removed from the drive the drive will return to Auto mode when power is reapplied 3 Save HIM Ref parameter 192 can enable manual mode to allow starts and jogs from the HIM in 2 wire mode Publication 20B UM002C EN P 1 26 Installation Wiring Lifting Torque Proving For Lifting Torque Proving details refer to page C 4 Using PowerFlex Drives with Regenerative Units If a Regenerative unit i e 1336 REGEN is used as a bus supply or brake the common mode capacitors should be disconnected as described in Table 1 E Connections to the 1336 R
81. is selected voltage Kach UR E control is independent from frequency 4 Ve E z S control The voltage and frequency P wi e or components have independent J vonage I references and accel decel rates Typical 9 applications include non motor loads or power supplies Fe Important FVC Vector mode requires EI autotuning of the motor Being coupled to a the load will determine inertia preferably E lightly loaded Total Inertia parameter E 450 will have to be estimated if e uncoupled for tuning of the speed loop or separately adjust Ki and Kp parameters 445 amp 446 054 Maximum Voltage Default Drive Rated Volts 202 Sets the highest voltage the drive will Min Max Rated Volts x 0 25 Rated output Based on Voltage Class Volts parameter 202 Units 0 1 VAC 055 Maximum Freq Default 110 0 or 130 0 Hz 083 Sets the highest frequency the drive will Min Max 5 0 420 0 Hz 202 output Based on Voltage Class Units 0 1 Hz parameter 202 Also refer to Overspeed Limit parameter 083 Publication 20B UM002C EN P File MOTOR CONTROL Programming and Parameters 3 11 Parameter Name amp Description Related See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Compensation Enables disables correction options 05 D x 1 Enabled 0 Disabled 0 x Reserved x X X X X P 15 14 13 12 11 Bit 1 For current limit except FVC Vector mode Factory Default Bit Values Option Descriptions
82. kg be Drive amp Packaging 29 08 64 0 4 Publication 20B UM002C EN P A 22 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 5 PowerFlex 700 Frame 5 gt _ 6 5 0 26 lt A a 37 6 1 48 259 1 10 20 gt gt L lt 15 0 0 59 gt lt D gt Detail C gt AZ 7 lO Sat d C000 0000000000000000000000 B H E Powerflax WITT III H 0000000000000000000000000NON R a p A gt lt 6 5 0 26 Lifting Holes 4 Places 12 5 12 7 0 50 Dia 0 49 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight 2 kg Ibs Drive amp Packaging 49 50 109 0 308 9 12 16 644 5 25 37 9 275 4 10 84 225 0 8 86 625 0 24 61 37 19 82 0 1 Refer to Table A L for frame information 0 Weights include HIM and Standard I O Add 2 70 kg 6 0 Ibs for the 20BC140 drive 3 When using the supplied junction box 100 HP drives Only add an additional 45 1 mm 1 78 in to this dimension Publication 20B UM002C EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 23 Figure A 6 PowerFlex 700 Frame 6 gt lt 8 5 0 33 p gt 5 7 18 0 0 71 be 360 6 14
83. rated motor Units 0 1 VAC current Used only when parameter 53 is set to Sensrls Vect SV Economize or Ka FVC Vector 063 Flux Current Ref Default Based on Drive Rating 053 Value of amps for full motor flux Used Min Max 0 00 Motor NP FLA 061 only when parameter 53 is set to Sensrls Units 0 01 Amps Vect SV Economize or FVC Vector 064 Ixo Voltage Drop Default Based on Drive Rating Value of voltage drop across the leakage Min Max 0 0 230 0 480 0 575 VAC inductance of the motor at rated motor Units 0 1 VAC current Used only when parameter 53 is set to Sensrls Vect SV Economize or FVC Vector Publication 20B UM002C EN P Programming and Parameters 3 13 o o d Parameter Name amp Description 5 ic amp Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 066 Autotune Torque Default 50 096 053 9 Specifies motor torque applied to the Min Max 0 0 150 0 motor during the flux current and inertia Units 0 1 tests performed during an autotune 067 Inertia Autotune Default 0 Ready 053 9 Provides an automatic method of setting Options 0 Ready 450 Total Inertia This test is automatically 1 Inertia Tune run during Start Up motor tests Important If using rotate tune for Sensris Vect mode the motor should be uncoupled from the load or results may not be valid With FVC Vector
84. selection of the active Speed Reference can be made through digital inputs DPI command jog button or Auto Manual HIM operation Figure 1 10 Speed Reference Selection Chart Default Digital Inx Select PI Exclusive Mode Trim SpeedSel 3 2 1 Pl Configuration gt i Dive Rer pat U Reference 5 i cd gt Auto Speed Ref Options KEE EES REES to follower drive for Speed Ref A Sel Parameter 090 0 0 0 Frequency Reference Speed Ref B Sel Parameter 093 0 0 1 MF lod Functions La A Preset Speed 2 Parameter 102 0 1 0 Xu Lal Skip Clamp Preset Speed 3 Parameter 103 79 90 1 1 ye Direction etc Preset Speed 4 Parameter 104 110 0 Y Preset Speed 5 Parameter 105 1 0 1 i Min Max Speed Preset Speed 6 Parameter 106 11 0 H 111 i Commanded Preset Speed 7 Parameter 107 Ss Frequency DPI Port Ref 1 6 See Parameter 209 DPI Command i i Manual Speed Ref Options SE an HIM Requesting Auto Manual ae Man S Curve TB Man Ref Sel Parameter 096 Digital Input 1 Post Ramp Jog Speed Parameter 100 gt Jog Command T l to follower drive for Speed Adders Speed Mode i B Frequency Reference PI Output gt 2 Process Pi _ mi Slip Compensation 1 Slip Comp No
85. the drive This includes both Digital Input 6 terminal 32 and the additional required input typically Digital Input 5 terminal 31 Remove the jumper between the two inputs if one is in place 4 Connect a means to open and close a N C contact between Digital Input 6 terminal 32 and input common Connect a separate means to open and close a N C contact between the additional input typically Digital Input 5 terminal 31 and input common see Figure D 3 The switching devices pushbutton relay etc must have contacts rated for either the 24V DC or 115V AC input circuit whichever was supplied with the drive Figure D 3 Example Test Circuit External Power Supply Internal 24V Power Supply Neutral 115V Common 24V 24 424N DC D er 25 ULI en 0 Ge HOES 2 32 C Digital Input 6 Ch Digital Input 6 Voltage is Board Dependent Not available with 115V I O 5 Be sure both sets of test contacts are closed Assure all control connections are properly made to the drive Reapply power to the drive including external control power if supplied Test 6 Perform any necessary parameter adjustments and start the drive Confirm that the drive stops and starts normally then start and slowly accelerate the motor 7 Open Digital Input 6 The drive should stop and the motor coast to rest The HIM OIM should indicate that the drive is Not Enabled Pu
86. the connection at the drive must be the resultant of all required contacts wired in series Note that the drives are available with either 24V DC or 115V AC input circuitry Refer to the drive User Manual for details e Refer to all product markings for additional cautions that may apply e Typical motor markings are contained on a motor certification nameplate similar to Figure D 1 Figure D 1 Sample Motor Nameplate FLAMEPROOF Exd ENCLOSURE EExd I IIB___Tamb____C to___C O x Il 2 G D CE 0518 O IM2 Sira ___ATEX MFG BY ROCKWELL AUTOMATION Publication 20B UM002C EN P Instructions for ATEX Approved Drives with ATEX Approved Motors D 3 Drive Wiring Important ATEX certification of this drive requires that 2 separate digital logic inputs be configured to monitor a normally closed over temperature contact or multiple contacts wired in series presented to the drive from the motor The first input must be Digital Input6 Hardware Enable terminal 32 The second can be any other unused digital input between 1 and 5 Note that all inputs are typically supplied in a default configuration to a function such as Start and Stop This may influence the input selected by the user for this function The following examples will assume Digital Input 5 terminal 31 is being used as the additional required input The 2 input terminals must be wired in parallel jumper is acceptable so each is monitoring the over temperat
87. the load resistor for the application The bandwidth of the speed regulator will affect the performance If the connected inertia is relatively high the bandwidth will be low and therefore a bit sluggish When programming the acceleration and deceleration rates for each step do not make them too aggressive or the regulator will be limited and therefore overshoot the desired position Position Loop Tuning Two parameters are available for tuning the position loop e Pos Reg Filter parameter 718 is a low pass filter at the input of the position regulator e Pos Reg Gain parameter 719 is a single adjustment for increasing or decreasing the responsiveness of the regulator By default these parameters are set at approximately a 6 1 ratio filter 25 gain 4 It is recommended that a minimum ratio of 4 1 be maintained Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 19 Profile Command Control Word The profile indexer is controlled with Pos Spd Prof Cmd parameter 705 The bit definitions are as follows Bit Name Description 0 Start Step 0 The binary value of these bits determines which step will be the 1 Start Step 1 starting step for the profile when a start command is issued If the P Start Step 2 value of these bits are not 1 16 the drive will not run since it does not have a valid step to start from Valid Examples 00011 step 3 jStatStep3 o 91100 step 12 4 Start Step 4 5 7 Reserved
88. v EL Le D HEI L O cdrggoc Se SC8 38CHN 979 3Z9 W S SL OL 9 E 8t 8c S i L0 6l 0s v amp 0 90 0 edcggoc OV HOA 80c ui OP Sr equnxN Dojeje ejqejieny 9 XEN g XEN 2 XEW 1 IW z XEN 1 WN 99S UI L 2002 VAY Suy 2e ZHN GH ON z JequinN c eBueu D D asn4 fejoq asny Apart sduvjndino sBuned j baul Guney 3 Bojeye9 JUAN ejqeisn py YIM 10 99 014d 1010 NOP 1012010Jd Jayealg aull uoN eut juawaly 1nduj dwal Wad dH enu ynog nou Jeng 100 seioN 40 5j Sed ees sauer uonaejoid Indu 2v HOA 807 vg elder Publication 20B UM002C EN P A 11 Supplemental Drive Information 092 009 009 ec m r sce ow G0 soz roz 69 mi 2 s m E 00 mi mei ooe szs ove mei mee 092 96 esz gl z 001 9 ogzad z 5 x 5 osz osr 009 mei me ooz mei el mam Sr os nol m x m m S osz BIR 009 Seg oor See 986 L i c6L 6vZ 084 os t amp 9 ceraaoc a osz se oos sae zz al el sel mem zzl osf v os m 2 2 osz ml me ooz mei ol el a rm ail os 09 9 vsiad z ost oo ml eil se el sa el vol 90v sef os ov s S osz SLE 00s SZ Sle SLI GLI Ell DEL 20S coL os t 0S S O laaod 0006 NIN2 001 oof ml oo ot cor osr el mmm ez mi nl en E ost ml oo el ei ell al au wgl mi os ni Or S gg 0006 NWO i E SS 001 00 00
89. v OL sil zzoagoz 919 383 N 910 38Q 912 320 IN 0c 0S Del S oe ei zel Sol vL voL Sel 0S v Z ol vroaaoz 9L9 384 W 910 380 N 910 320 W Si Or Ob SL 0c St sol ver ut ez se me v ei sz 0 oagoz 012 383 N 0L0 38Q 010 320 W SL 0 0 0L SL 0L zU 88 os rel 69 os s ol oagagoz 98 38C0 N 98 3cO IN ri 0c 0c 9 DL 9 GL GG 0S ce BC 06 Y 4 0 0dSd80c 0r8 38Q N Or amp 3c0 N 4 SL a D 8 og el vel sel gz os eil z 0 SEO sze aco W Si 8 9 el zel rei bel rt 91 0S rein 0 tazagoz 918 320 W G SL 9 otf zi vel zo eo os reen sol 0 taragoz OV HOA 08t vU OI Siaquiny Doe aiqeneny XEN a XEN a XEN UW aN un 989 uw L 3002 VA Sduv 2 z ONT QN oun g g Buey 6 e esnJ ejeg esnJ Aejaq sduyindino sBupeu j berg Buneu a Bop 1ueun ejqeisn py ui 40129 01d JOJOW NOH 10129 01d sayealg eul uoN eui jueug 3 1nduj dwaj WMd dH eg wou noi eng 4010 sa 0N 10 CL abed eec saojnaq uonoeyoid 1nduj JY HOA 08b A Y 21021 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 14 m Wer Sle Sle Ost SZZ DL Wer 884 Gcl ecb JULI emp c Sel n 0Sc 00v 00v SL 00 GLI DL DL rl pl GEL 0G D OSL 9 vri380c DCL Sle Sle Sel 002 Sel 861 DFL 66 9 9
90. 0 Step 9 Type 7 End Hold Pos 810 Step 10 Type 8 Param Level 820 Step 11 Type 830 Step 12 Type 840 Step 13 Type 850 Step 14 Type 860 Step 15 Type 870 Step 16 Type 9 Selects the type of move for a particular Step The following step types use the velocity regulator only End 0 drive ramps to zero speed and stops the profile after the programmed dwell time Time 1 drive ramps to Step x Velocity holds speed and decels to zero in specified Step x Value time Time Blend 2 drive ramps to Step x Velocity and holds speed until Step x Value time completes then transitions to step defined in Step x Next Dig Input 3 drive ramps to Step x Velocity holds speed until input specified in Step x Value transitions in the direction defined by sign of Step x Value EncincrBlend 5 drive ramps to Step x Velocity holds speed when at encoder position defined by Step x Value within tolerance window transition to Step x Next Param Level 8 drive ramps to Step x Velocity holds speed and compares Step x Value to Step x Dwell The sign of Step x Value gt lt determines when to transition Step x Next and compares Step x Dwell to the value specified by the parameter number in Step x Value POS SPD PROFILE Profile Step 1 16 The following step types use the point to point position regulator Encoder Incr 4 drive ramps to Step
91. 0 Dig In Conflict 4 10 Drive OL Level 4 11 FluxAmpsRef Rang 4 11 Ground Warn 4 11 Index Home Not Set 4 11 In Phase Loss 4 11 IntDBRes OvrHeat 4 11 IR Volts Range 4 11 Ixo Vit Rang 4 11 Load Loss 4 11 MaxFreq Conflict 4 11 Motor Thermistor 4 11 Motor Type Cflct 4 11 NP Hz Conflict 4 12 PI Config Conflict 4 12 Power Loss 4 12 Precharge Active 4 12 Prof Step Cflct 4 12 PTC Conflict 4 12 Sleep Config 4 12 Speed Ref Cflct 4 12 Start At PowerUp 4 12 TB Man Ref Cflct 4 12 Torq Prove CHL 4 12 UnderVoltage 4 12 VHz Neg Slope 4 12 Waking 4 12 Alarms Group 3 44 Alarms Clearing 4 10 ALT Key Functions B 2 ALT Key Functions B 2 Ambient Temperature 1 2 Analog In Loss Alarm 4 10 Analog In Loss Fault 4 4 Analog In x Hi 3 52 Analog In x Lo 3 52 Analog Inputs Group 3 51 Analog Inx Value 3 8 Analog Out Scale 3 53 Analog Out Hi 3 53 Analog Out Lo 3 53 Analog Ou Sel 3 53 Analog Out2 Lo 3 53 Analog Out2 Sel 3 53 Analog Outputs Group 3 52 Anlg Cal Chksum Fault 4 4 Anlg In Config 3 51 Anlg In Loss 3 52 Anlg In Sqr Root 3 51 Anlg Out Absolut 3 52 Anlg Out Config 3 52 Anlg Out Setpt 3 54 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Index 2 Applications File 3 59 Armored Cable 1 5 Assisted Start Up 2 3 ATEX Approved Motors Operation with D 1 Auto Mode 1 24 Auto Rstrt Delay 3 30 Auto Rstrt Tries 3 30 Auto Rstrt Tries Fault 4 4 Auto Manual Control 1 25 Modes 1 24 Auto Reset
92. 0 00 Secs 0 00 Secs 0 00 600 00 Secs 0 01 Secs SS VVS 1 Inverted X X X X X X X X X X X X x 0 0 0 af res 19 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 8 2 1 0 I hotinverted Bit Factory Default Bit Values Dig Out Param Default 0 Pl Config Selects the value that the mask Dig Out Options 0 PI Config Mask will be applied to 1 PI Status 2 Drive Sts 1 3 Drive Sts 2 4 DriveAlarm1 5 DriveAlarm2 6 StartInhibit 7 Digin Status 8 DrvStstFlt Publication 20B UM002C EN P 9 DrvSts2FIt 10 AlrmSts1FIt 11 AlrmSts2Fit 12 LogicCmdRslt 13 Stop Owner 14 Start Owner 15 Jog Owner 16 Dir Owner 17 Ref Owner 18 Accel Owner 19 Decel Owner 20 Eet Owner 21 MOP Owner 22 Local Owner 23 Limit Status 24 PortMaskAct 25 WriteMaskAct 26 LogicMaskAct 27 TorgProvCnfg 28 TorgProvSet 29 TorgProvSts 30 Profile Sts 31 Profile Cmd Programming and Parameters 3 59 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions 394 Dig Out Mask Sets the mask that is applied to the selected value in Dig Out Param A bit AND OR is applied which is selected by the Digital Outx Sel Alll bits with zeros in the mask are ignored Group File No Related 1 Bit selected
93. 0 HE PE 50 0 mm 4 0 mm 600V 1 0 AWG 12 AWG 5 Input power DC 70 0 mm2 10 0 mm See Note 2 100 HP DC and motor 2 0 AWG 8 AWG BRI 2 terminals 50 0 mm 4 0 mm 1 0 AWG 12 AWG PE 50 0 mm 4 0 mm 1 0 AWG 12 AWG 6 Input power DC 150 0 mm2 2 5 mm 6 0N m 6 0 N m DC BRI 2 PE 300 MCM 14 AWG 52 Ib in 52 Ib in motor connections see note 9 SHLD Terminal 0 6 Terminating point 1 6N m 1 6N m for wiring shields 14 Ib in 14 Ib in AUX Terminal 0 4 Auxiliary Control 1 5 mm 0 2 mm Block Voltage 16 AWG 24 AWG 5 6 PS PS 40mm 05mm 0 6N m 0 6N m 12 AWG 22 AWG 5 3 Ibin 5 3 Ib in Fan Terminal 5 6 User Supplied 4 0mm2 0 5mm 0 6N m 0 6 N m Block CB Only Fan Voltage 12 AWG 22 AWG 5 3 Ib in 5 3 Ib in page 1 8 Maximum minimum wire si Refer to the terminal block label inside the drive Two wires connected in paral zes that the terminal block will accept these are not recommendations lel to any of these terminals using two lugs may be required External control power UL Installation 300V DC 10 Non UL Installation 270 600V DC 10 0 3 Frame 40 W 165 mA 5 Frame 80 W 90 mA See Auxiliary Control Power Supply on page 1 9 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Installation Wiring 1 11 Figure 1 3 Typical Power Terminal Block Location
94. 01 mA Data In Ax to 377 value from 0 001 Volt communication device Then set Analog Outx Sel to Param Cntl Selected Option Definitions Analog Outx Sel Digital Inx Sel Digital Outx Sel Option Description Related At Speed Relay changes state when drive has reached commanded speed 380 Fast Stop When open the drive will stop with a 0 1 second decel time If Torque Proving is being 361 used float will be ignored at end of ramp and the mechanical brake will be set o Excl Link Links digital input to a digital output if the output is set to Input 1 6 Link This does not 361 need to be selected in the Vector option Find Home Starts the commissioning procedure when a start command is issued to automatically position the motor to a home position established by a limit switch Hold Step Inhibits profile from transitioning to next step when active Home Limit This input is used for the home position Input 1 6 Link When Digital Output 1 is set to one of these i e Input 3 Link in conjunction with 380 Digital Input 3 set to Excl Link the Digital Input 3 state on off is echoed in the Digital Output 1 Micro Pos Micropostion input When closed the command frequency is set to a percentage 361 speed reference as defined in MicroPos Scale J parameter 611 MOP Dec Decrements speed reference as long as input is closed 36
95. 02C EN P 1 16 Installation Wiring Figure 1 5 Typical Jumper Locations see Table 1 E for description zu 20000000 1 g9oooooo ER H j BRt BR2 DC DC um VIT2 WIT3 PERILI S2 TILS Er Hi auer p ooooooooooo oQ 60000000 U ann Fan CDe EIU L lle Frames 0 amp 1 Frame 2 I O Cassette Removed e o Q a pira Els all ofS CES QQQ Q 000 0000 Q 000 O O00 O o AXN BRI BR2 DC DC UT V T2 WIT3 DU SA2 T3 To EES Frames 3 amp 4 Frame 5 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Installation Wiring 1 17 1 0 Wiring Important points to remember about I O wiring e Use Copper wire only Wire gauge requirements and recommendations are based on 75 degrees C Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire e Wire with an insulation rating of 600V or greater is recommended e Control
96. 045 Motor NP Power Default Based on Drive Rating 046 9 Gei to the motor nameplate rated power Min Max 0 00 1000 00 Units 0 01 KW HP See Mtr NP Pwr Units 046 Mtr NP Pwr Units Default Drive Rating Based 9 Selects the motor power units to be used D X Horsepower This parameter is not reset when Reset Options 1 kiloWatts to Defaults is selected 2 Convert HP 3 Convert kW Convert HP converts all power units to Horsepower Convert kW converts all power units to kilowatts Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 10 Programming and Parameters Uo o d Parameter Name amp Description s iL G Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 047 Motor OL Hertz Default Motor NP Hz 3 042 Selects the output frequency below Min Max 0 0 Motor NP Hz 220 which the motor operating current is Units 0 1Hz derated The motor thermal overload will o generate a fault at lower levels of current S 048 Motor OL Factor Default 1 00 042 5 Sets the operating level for the motor Min Max 0 20 2 00 220 3 overload Units 0 01 Motor OL _ Operating FLA X Factor Level o 049 Motor Poles Default 4 9 Defines the number of poles in the motor Min Max 2 40 Units 1 Pole 053 Motor Cntl Sel Default 0 Sensrls Vect Gen Sets the method of motor control used in Options 0 Sensrls Vect the drive 1 SV Economize o EI When Adj Voltage
97. 08 Pl Sti G8l c 1 0080c 0 383 N 0S Oct Oct SE 09 Ge Sy E DEI 261 v8c 0S Pi Hi SH 0 0980c SCO 3823 N SZ9 380 N S0 3cO N 0 08 08 oe Sy 0 t ove ec rl 902 08 PI GL HL 2200802 020 383 NN 009 38C W 020 320 N 0c 09 09 0c DE 0c Vec cL vsL OO0L vL 0S H GS GZ 9109807 9 9 384 N 9 9 380 N 919 3cO IN SL Sy Sy SL SG SL v EL GbE GZ SOL 08 v Pl GEI 0 LL0980c 0L9 383 N 0L9 38C IN 0L9 3c9 IN SL oe 0 SL SI SL cel 66 8 GG 64 0S v ec t 0 4d8980c 98 38C NN 98 3cO IN L D 0c 9 DL 9 GL gs Di ve 9t 06 t Gl ecc 0 0dS980c Or8 38C N 0v8 3c9 IN L SL CL 9 H 9 09 Sy SEI ec ct 0S HENRY Sd 980c SC8 38C N SC8 3cO N SL 8 9 ct vc Ve Et gl 08 v S90 9 0 0 Ldc980c 918 420 W SL 9 E E 6L vt SHILO LL 0S t SZO 0 0 dlO80c ul OV HOA 00b VI SIBQUNN Dope argeyeny XEN WN een WUN XN YW 999 6 uw L 1002 vay r 3o 209 OH QN 3 oun oj Buey uang 9 D asny ejog asn4 ejog sduyindino s6uney wl bau Buneu 3 Bop aiggienlpg uim 4013101d JOIOW NOP 0199 0Jd Jayeag eun UoN oui jueug3 ndu dugl wad MA enug ue qnoi end 1010 sa 0N 10 Cu 8b amp d ees seoi eq uonaejojd 1ndu 2v HOA OOP J Y age Publication 20B UM002C EN P A 13 Supplemental Drive Information
98. 1 Configures the drive current rating and No thru associates it with the selected voltage Options 2 Low Voltage 047 i e 400 or 480V Normally used when 3 High Voltage 054 downloading parameter sets Min Max amp 4 Reserved 055 Default values will be changed for 5 Reserved 062 parameters 41 47 54 55 62 63 69 063 70 72 82 148 158 ru This parameter is not reset when Reset 072 to Defaults is selected 082 148 158 203 Drive Checksum Default Read Only Provides a checksum value that indicates Min Max 0 65535 whether or not a change in drive Units 1 programming has occurred 204 Dyn UsrSet Cnfg Enables Disables dynamic selection of user parameter sets Important In dynamic mode changes to the parameters are not saved to nonvolatile storage Switching user sets restores the values last saved before enabling dynamic mode rea gt 3 o Sys SS IS a e xixix xixix x x x x x x x xjo o Dynamic Mode plis 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 8 2 1 0 DEED i ous Factory Default Bit Values 1 Dyn UserSet Sel 0 Digital Inputs x Reserved 205 Dyn UsrSet Sel 9 Selects user set if Dyn UsrSet Cnfg xxxx xx11 Important All digital input selections parameters 361 366 must be identical in all three user sets for proper Dynamic User Set operation even if only two sets are used qu ev ev E D SS 0 0 1
99. 1 MOP Inc Increments speed reference as long as input is closed 361 MtrTrqCurRef Torque producing current reference 342 Param Cntl Parameter controlled analog output allows PLC to control analog outputs through data 342 links Set in AnlgX Out Setpt parameters 377 378 Param Cntl Parameter controlled digital output allows PLC to control digital outputs through data 380 links Set in Dig Out Setpt parameter 379 Pl Reference Reference for PI block see Process PID on page C 28 342 Pos Redefine Redefines the home position for the drive by latching encoder position Pos Sel 1 5 Binary value of these inputs is used to select the starting step number for the profile Precharge En Forces drive into precharge state Typically controlled by auxiliary contact on the 361 disconnect at the DC input to the drive Profile Input Must be chosen if Step X Type is set to Dig Input and the digital input value that is entered in Step X Value is the value of this digital input selector Pulse In Ref Reference of the pulse input Z channel of encoder can be used while A amp B 342 channels are encoder inputs RunFwd Level Provides a run level input They do not require a transition for enable or fault but a RunRev Level transition is still required for a stop Run Level Run w Comm Allows the comms start bit to operate like a run with the run input on the terminal block Ownership rules apply Scale Block 1 4 Outpu
100. 1 7 Contactors Bypass 1 14 Input 1 13 Output 1 13 A 9 Control Options 3 3 Control Status 3 14 Control SW Ver 3 9 Control Wire 1 18 Control Auto Manual 1 25 Conventions Manual P 2 Copycat B 4 Counts per Unit 3 66 Cover Opening 1 1 Cross Reference Parameter by Name 3 72 by Number 3 75 Current Lmt Gain 3 27 Current Lmt Sel 3 26 Current Lmt Val 3 27 Current Rate Limit 3 27 Cutout Dimensions A 30 D Data In Ax 3 49 Data Out Ax 3 50 Data Saving B 4 Datalinks Group 3 49 DB Resistance Fault 4 4 DB Resistor 3 62 DB Resistor Type 3 29 DB While Stopped 3 28 DC Brake Level 3 28 DC Brake Time 3 28 DC Brk Levl Sel 3 28 DC Bus Memory 3 7 DC Bus Voltage 3 7 DC Input 1 27 Decel Inhibit Fault 4 5 Decel Inhibt Alarm 4 10 Decel Mask 3 48 Decel Owner 3 49 Decel Time x 3 26 Defaults Resetting to 3 35 B 4 Diagnostic Data Viewing B 4 Diagnostics Group 3 37 ig In Conflict Alarm 4 10 ig In Status 3 40 ig Out Invert 3 58 ig Out Mask 3 59 ig Out Param 3 58 ig Out Setpt 3 56 Dig Out Status 3 40 ig Outx Level 3 57 Dig Outx OffTime 3 58 Dig Outx OnTime 3 57 Digital Inputs Group 3 55 Digital Inx Sel 3 55 Digital Outputs Group 3 55 Digital Outx Sel 3 57 Dimensions Bottom View A 24 Drive A 20 e Bes Bes Bes Bes es es Index 3 Flange Mount A 28 A 29 A 31 A 32 A 33 Frame 5 Cutout A 30 Minimum Clearances 1 2 Direction Config Group 3 33 Direction Mas
101. 100 1 5 5 End N A N A 0 5 N A 0 00 N A N A Example 2 Six Step Velocity Profile Digital Input Based In each step the drive ramps at Step x AccelTime to Step x Velocity in the direction of the sign of Step x Velocity until a digital input is detected When the input is detected it transitions to the next step in the profile This continues through Digital Input 6 activating step 5 Step 5 is defined as a Parameter Level step Digital Inputs used in the profile must be defined as Prof Input Important A transition is required to start each step If the input is already true when transitioning to a digital input step the indexer will not go to the next step Figure C 9 Digital Input Example 350 Hi 8 250 ZG 160 d amp wm 9 8 amp 0 a amp Digital Input 5 Ka zm 2 Digital Input 4 uia i 250 2 g 350 Time Note Step 5 is a Parameter Level Step Encoder Speed 415 e Profile Status 700 Units Traveled 701 Current Step Dig In Status 216 Step x Stepx Stepx Step x Stepx Stepx Step x Step x Step Type Velocity AccelTime DecelTime Value Dwell Batch Next 1 Digital Input 300 0 5 0 5 3 00 0 00 i 2 2 Digital Input 50 0 5 0 5 400 5 00 i 3 3 Digital Input 300 0 5 0 5 5 00 000 i 4 4 Digital Input 100 0 5 0 5 6 00 1000 i 5 5 Param Level 50 0 5 0 5 701 0 00 1 6
102. 1053 4 15 gt Ze Di Le 94 7 3 73 gt 46 7 1 84 Dia 37 kW raigna IL 2 Places la 400V 2 Places Normal T EA Duty i Bees 184 5 Drive d J 7 26 6 50 160 1 il l l 6 30 d BESSE oQ 5 03 We a OOOO Vent Pl S Cat lent Plate 227 089 gt Le 290 1 14 66 0 2 60 lt gt 180 0 6 12 186 0 7 32 4 All i 47 0 1 85 D 760 2 99 E 287 119 Dia 1 oU esl la 65 3 2 57 54 1 2 13 Dia 22 2 0 87 Dia J 2 Places n EL 1897 1 lr el el L val R 1 7 00 sa T cap QD Q QO 6 21 HD QQ e 141 9 Q O COD 5 59 oxen CHAM H5 105 1 O OOO 4 14 O Ou COOTO Y A 2608 10 3 Le 36 8 1 45 e gt 50 7 2 00 Lee 63 8 251 Lee 1120 441 e a 180 0 7 09 lt gt Publication 20B UM002C EN P A 26 Supplemental Drive Information Frame Rating Dimensions 5 75 HP J 104 0 4 09 gt MININ DA men 480V 982 3 67 gt 2 Pens 2 Poses m 55kW 400V A I z a ell 627 247 Dia Normal 2415 A ae IND ana 2 Places Duty 9 52 l l j 229 5 Drive 04 L ER p m 2200 P poc 8 66 o o 184 0 7 24 oo 189 5 e 6 28 96 0 Fd 1 3 78 i
103. 12411109 87654 3210 x Reserved Bit Publication 20B UM002C EN P Related Ka I File INPUTS amp OUTPUTS Digital Outputs 381 385 389 382 386 390 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Digital Out1 Sel 4 Digital Out2 Sel Digital Out3 Sel Selects the drive status that will energize a CRx output relay 1 Any relay programmed as Fault or Alarm will energize pick up when power is applied to drive and deenergize drop out when a fault or alarm exists Relays selected for other functions will energize only when that condition exists and will deenergize when condition is removed Refer to pages 1 19 2 Refer to Option Definitions on page 3 54 3 Activation level is defined in Dig Outx Level below 4 When TorgProve Cnfg is set to Enable Digital Out Sel becomes the brake control and any other selection will be ignored Dig Out1 Level Dig Out2 Level Dig Out3 Level Sets the relay activation level for options 10 15 in Digital Outx Sel Units are assumed to match the above selection i e At Freq Hz At Torque Amps Dig Out1 OnTime Dig Out2 OnTime Dig Out3 OnTime Sets the ON Delay time for the digital outputs This is the time between the occurrence of a condition and activation of the relay Programming and Parameters Values Default Options Default Min Max Un
104. 2 2500 rad sec bandwidth Selectable Motor Control Sensorless Vector with full tuning Standard V Hz with full custom capability and Vector Control Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including Ramp Coast DC Brake Ramp to Hold and S curve Accel Decel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 3600 seconds in 0 1 second increments Intermittent Overload 110 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 150 Overload capability for up to 3 seconds Current Limit Capability Proactive Current Limit programmable from 20 to 160 of rated output Electronic Motor Overload Protection Digital Analog Input Latency current Independently programmable proportional and integral gain Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response Investigated by ULL to comply with N E C Article 430 U L File E59272 volume 12 Signal Motor Latency Control Min Max Typical Digital Start FVC 84ms 10 4 ms 8 4 ms Input svc 92ms 160ms 9 2 ms Stop FVC 10 0 ms 12 4 ms 10 4 ms SVC 10 0 ms 12 0 ms 10 4 ms Analog Torque FVC 772 us 1 06 ms 840 us Input 4 kHz Torque FVC 1 008 1 46 ms 1 256 ms 2 kHz ms Speed FVC 46ms 8 6 ms 4 8 ms Speed SVC 48ms 12 4 ms 6 4 ms Publication 20B UM002C EN P AA Category Encoder Publication 20B UM002C EN P Supplemental Drive Information Specification
105. 23 Encoder Z Chan Default 9 Defines if the input wired to terminals 5 amp Options E ea e co c zs E eg o o fx d di SE Pulse Input Pulse Input 6 of the Encoder Terminal Block will be used as a Pulse or Marker input Options 1 amp 3 detect a loss of signal when using Marker Input 0 0 1 Pulse Check 2 3 Marker Check differential inputs regardless of the Feedback Select param 080 setting When option 2 or 3 is used with Profile Indexer mode the homing routine will position to the nearest marker pulse off of the home limit switch Speed Command File d Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 079 Speed Units Default File Group Related Hz 0 9 Selects the units to be used for all speed Options 0 Hz related parameters Options 0 amp 1 1 RPM indicate status only 2 amp 3 will convert 2 Convert Hz configure the drive for that selection 3 Convert RPM Convert Hz 2 converts all speed based parameters to Hz and changes the value proportionately i e 1800 RPM 60 Hz Convert RPM 3 converts all speed based parameters to RPM and changes the value proportionately This parameter is not reset when Reset to Defaults is selected SPEED COMMAND Spd Mode amp Limits Publication 20B UM002C EN P a 3 o 2 e 2 e rm SPEED COMMAND Spd Mod
106. 3 MicroPos Scale 611 Torq Proving 3 61 Fault 4 Code 249 Faults 3 43 Min Adj Voltage 661 Adjust Voltage 3 63 Fault 4 Time 250 Faults 3 43 Minimum Speed 81 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 17 Fault 5 Code 251 Faults 3 43 Min Rod Speed 639 Oil Well Pump 3 62 Fault 5 Time 252 Faults 3 43 MOP Adj VoltRate 663 Adjust Voltage 3 64 Fault 6 Code 253 Faults 3 43 MOP Mask 284 Masks amp Owners 3 48 Fault 6 Time 254 Faults 3 43 MOP Owner 296 Masks amp Owners 3 49 Fault 7 Code 255 Faults 3 43 MOP Rate 195 MOP Config 3 34 Fault 7 Time 256 Faults 3 43 MOP Reference 11 Metering 3 7 Fault 8 Code 257 Faults 3 43 Motor Cntl Sel 53 Torg Attributes 3 10 Fault 8 Time 258 Faults 3 43 Motor Fdbk Type 412 Speed Feedback 3 15 Fault Amps 225 Diagnostics 3 41 Motor NP FLA 42 Motor Data 3 9 Fault Bus Volts 226 Diagnostics 3 41 Motor NP Hertz 43 Motor Data 3 9 Fault Clear 240 Faults 3 42 Motor NP Power 45 Motor Data 3 9 Fault Clear Mode 241 Faults 3 43 Motor NP RPM 44 Motor Data 3 9 Fault Clr Mask 283 Masks amp Owners 3 48 Motor NP Volts 41 Motor Data 3 9 Fault Clr Owner 295 Masks amp Owners 3 49 Motor OL Count 220 Diagnostics 3 40 Fault Config 1 238 Faults 3 42 Motor OL Factor 48 Motor Data 3 10 Fault Speed 224 Diagnostics 3 40 Motor OL Hertz 47 Motor Data 3 10 Fdbk Filter Sel 416 Speed Feedback 3 15 Motor Poles 49 Motor Data 3 10 Feedback Select 80 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 17 Motor Sheave 645 Oil Well Pump 3 62 Find Home Ramp 714 ProfSetup Status 3 66 Motor
107. 35 18 20 HSJ20 20BE017 1 ns ho Jo 50 18 17 187 255 30 HSJ30 20BE022 2 20 15 4 50 23 6 22 255 34 40 HSJ40 20BE027 2 25 20 44 50 29 27 33 44 50 HSJ50 20BE032 3 30 25 4 50 343 32 405 54 60 HSJ60 20BE041 3 4 30 4 50 43 9 4 48 64 70 HSJ70 20BE052 3 50 Ian l4 50 55 7 52 615 82 90 HSJ90 20BE062 4 Je 50 2 50 68 0 62 78 104 125 HSJ125 20BTO0990 5 100 2 40 108 6 99 109 126 150 HSJ150 75 2 40 84 5 77 116 138 150 HSJ150 20BT1449 6 150 2 50 158 144 158 216 200 HSJ200 125 2 50 137 1 125 188 250 200 HSJ200 Table A K 932 Volt DC Input Protection Devices m kW Rating iin n Ratings Output Amps Non Time Number CND HD kHz C Amps Cont 1Min 3Sec Fuse Delay Fuse 2 20BW0528 5 45 2 500 58 2 52 57 78 100 170M3741 375 2 500 469 46 69 92 100 170M3741 20Bwo9s 5 90 2 500 110 7 98 108 127 160 HSJ160 75 2 500 923 82 123 140 160 HSJ160 20BW1420 6 132 2 500 162 2 142 156 213 250 HSJ250 110 2 400 134 9 119 179 238 250 HSJ250 Notes 1 e Drive frames 0 4 temperature rating is for NEMA UL Type Open The adhesive top label must be removed to operate drive at this temperature Frames 5 amp 6 do not have a top label The power source to Common Bus inverters must be derived from AC voltages 600V or less as defined in NFPA70 Art 430 18 NEC Battery supplies or MG sets are not included The following devices were validated to break current of t
108. 4 50 47 5 43 56 74 90 HSJ90 20BC056 3 30 22 l4 50 61 9 56 64 86 100 HSJ100 20BC072 33 130 14 500 80 5 72 84 112 125 HSJ125 20BCO085080 4 45 4 45 95 1 85 94 128 150 HSJ150 37 l4 45 80 5 72 108 144 150 HSJ150 20BP1058 6 5 55 4 504 1202 105 116 158 175 HSJ175 45 4 500 95 1 85 128 170 175 HSJ175 20BP1408 6 5 75 l 4 400 159 140 154 190 250 HSJ250 55 4 400 120 2 105 158 190 250 HSJ250 20BP170900 6 90 4 500 1923 170 187 255 350 HSJ350 75b l 500 159 140 210 280 350 HSJ350 20BP205900 6 110 4 40 4 226 205 220 289 350 HSJ350 90 4 400 192 3 170 255 313 350 HSJ350 20BP2608 6 6 132 2 450 298 260 286 390 400 HSJ400 110 2 50 226 205 305 410 400 HSJ400 Publication 20B UM002C EN P A 18 Supplemental Drive Information Table A 650 Volt DC Input Protection Devices See page A 19 for Notes PWM Temp DC Input i Drive Catalog HP Rating Freq 0 P Ratings Output Amps Da Number ND HD kHz C Amps Cont 1Min 3Sec Fuse Fuse 2 20BD1P1 0 05 1039 4 50 1 0 11 12 1 6 3 JKS 3 20BD2P1 0 1 075 4 50 19 24 24 32 6 JKS 6 20BD3P4 0 2 15 4 50 30 34 45 6 0 6 JKS 6 20BD5P0 0 3 2 4 50 45 50 5 5 75 10 JKS 10 20BD8P0 0 3 4 50 8 1 8 0 8 8 12 15 HSJ15 20BD011 0 75 5 4 50 114 11 121 165 20 HSJ20 20BD014 1 10 e 4 50 14 7 14 165 22 30 HSJ30 20BD022 115 Inn 4 50 233 22 242 33 40 HSJ40 20BD027 2 20 t
109. 4 Instructions for ATEX Approved Drives with ATEX Approved Motors Firmware e The functionality of Digital Input 5 is determined by parameter 365 Digital In5 Sel If a different digital input x is selected refer to the corresponding Digital In x Sel parameter This parameter must be set to a value of 3 to configure this input as an Aux Fault When this digital input is opened the drive will immediately shut down in a fault condition and require a fault reset before the drive can be restarted e Opening Digital Input 6 when configured as a Hardware Enable will interrupt IGBT gate firing directly Additionally Digital Input 6 will put the drive into a normal not enabled shutdown condition It is configured by parameter 366 Digital In6 Sel This parameter must be set to a value of 1 to configure this input as an Enable When Digital Input 6 is opened the gate firing will be interrupted and the drive will go into a not enabled shutdown condition Because the additional digital Input typically Digital Input 5 must be wired to open simultaneously and be configured to put the drive into a fault condition the drive will not restart if a new start command is given until the fault is reset Start Up amp Periodic Drive Testing Requirement The integrity of both the Hardware Enable input Digital Input 6 and the additional Aux Fault input must be maintained and verified periodically to meet certifi
110. 5 4 50 28 9 27 33 44 50 HSJ50 20BD034 2 25 20 4 50 36 4 34 405 54 60 HSJ60 20BD040 3 30 25 l4 50 42 9 40 51 68 80 HSJ80 20BD052 3 Ian 30 4 50 557 52 60 80 90 HSJ90 20BD065 3 50 40 l4 50 69 7 65 78 104 100 HSJ100 20BD0779 4 60 l 4 50 84 5 77 85 116 150 HSJ150 50 4 50 697 65 98 130 150 HSJ150 20BR096060 5 75 4 50 105 3 96 106 144 175 HSJ175 60 4 500 845 77 116 154 175 HSJ175 20BR125009 5 100 4 500 1371 125 138 163 200 HSJ200 75 J4 50 105 3 96 144 168 200 HSJ200 20BR156060 6 125 4 So 171 2 156 172 234 300 HSJ300 100 4 500 1371 125 188 250 300 HSJ300 20BR180060 6 150 4 50 204 180 198 270 400 HSJ400 125 4 500 1712 156 234 312 400 HSJ400 20BR2480060 6 200 2 450 272 248 273 372 400 HSJ400 150 2 50 204 180 270 360 400 HSJ400 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 19 Table A J 810 Volt DC Input Protection Devices Drive Catalog HP Rating Ge mp SC Output Amps iens Number i ND HD kHz C Amps Cont 1Min 3Sec Fuse Fuse 2 810 Volt DC Input 20BE1P7 OR E 075 4 50 15 17 2 2 6 3 JKS 3 20BE2P7 0 l2 15 4 50 24 27 3 6 48 6 JKS 6 20BE3P9 ONG 2 4 50 3 5 3 9 43 59 6 JKS 6 20BE6P1 0 5 3 4 50 6 2 6 1 6 7 9 2 10 JKS 10 20BE9P0 0 75 5 4 50 94 9 9 9 135 18 HSJ15 20BE011 0 10 75 4 50 115 11 1
111. 5 096 96 75 260 260 260 100 125 125 100 156 156 125 180 180 150 248 248 200 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Overview Position 1 3 4 5 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 a b C d i g h i j k I m n d h k Enclosure Brake Resistor vO Code Enclosure Code w Resistor Code Control 1O Volts A 1P20 NEMA UL Type 1 Y Yes A Std 24V dc ac Flange Mount N No B Std 115V ac F3 Front IP20 NEMA UL Type Open Not available for Frame 3 drives or larger G Vector 24V dc Back Heatsink IP54 NEMA UL Type 12 Stand Alone Wall Mount B e ne es IP54 NEMA UL Type 12 B E None 3 Only available for Frame 5 amp Frame 6 drives 400 690V e HIM Code Operator Interface 0 Blank Cover 3 Full Numeric LCD 5 Prog Only LCD Jj Remote Panel Mount IP66 NEMA UL Type 12 Full Numeric LCD HIM K gt Remote Panel Mount IP66 NEMA UL Type 12 Prog Only LCD HIM gt Only available with Stand Alone IP54 drives f Documentation Code Type A Manual N No Manual S Chinese Documentation g Brake Code w Brake IGBT Y Yes N No 3 Brake IGBT is standard on Frames 0 3 and optional on Frames 4 6 Publication 20B UM002C EN P i Emission Code CE Filter 7 CM Choke A Yes Yes B Yes No Note 600V class drives below 77 Amps Frames 0 4 are declared to meet the Low Voltage Directive It is the responsi
112. 5 HP BRi DC BR2 DC DC 0 240 UT V T2 wm PE vac VAC PE vm me Um WIT3 PE PE BUS m Ps BRZ pc DC DC PS OO OJO o o Oo ojo olojo oO 9 oojoo ojojojojojojoj O o o o O OJOJOJ O OO o O o o o o o lololo S loi e e 120 vac PSs Precharge Resistor Fuse DCT 12 2 Common Bus Drives wPrecharge Only 240V 50HP 480V 100 HP 240V PO HP 480V 100 HP 400V 75 kW 600V 100 HP 400V 75 kW 600V 100 HP BRI BRT 0 240 me DC DC DC Um VT WT3 e DU SU MS BR2 DC DC DC Uri vz wm SEN Ms eee 1 oj0O Oo Oo OjO oHOo O O O 0 OjO O O Ojo Oo o joLe O I o e oo ololo o o eF39 lO O O Q OlOl OlOEHO S P s e Precharge Resistor Fuse DCT12 2 Common Bus Drives w Precharge Only 6 125 200 HP 125 200 HP M8 Stud All Terminals Max Lug Width 31 8 mm 1 25 in M8 Stud All Terminals Max Lug Width 25 4 mm 1 in Of jii Of O Of o ii o fo eh Ke oho O Ho Common Mode Capacitor amp MOV Jumpers Common Mode Capacitor Filter Capacitor amp MOV Jumpers BR2 8 BRI DC M DC Precharge Resistor TSEC PTET TE TOROS WRIT Fuse L LL Input Filter Ca
113. 6 8 80 joe 140 Im HSJ175 20BN104 3 5 40 4 50 114 1 104 115 175 225 HSJ225 30 4 50 85 8 80 120 160 225 HSJ225 20BN130 9 5 50 4 50 142 6 130 143 175 250 HSJ250 40 4 50 114 1 104 156 175 250 HSJ250 20BN154 3 6 60 4 50 169 154 169 231 300 HSJ300 50 4 50 142 6 130 195 260 300 HSJ300 20BN192 9 6 75 4 50 210 6 192 211 288 400 HSJ400 leo 4 50 e 184 J231 308 400 HSJ400 20BN260 9 6 100 2 45 285 3 260 286 390 400 HSJ400 75 2 50 210 6 205 305 410 400 HSJ400 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 17 Table A H 540 Volt DC Input Protection Devices See page A 19 for Notes PWM Temp DC Input Ti Drive Catalog kW Rating Freq Ratings Output Amps Deny ze Lu Number ND HD kHz C Amps Cont 1Min 3Sec Fuse Fuse 2 540 Volt DC In mol E 20BC1P3 0 037 025 4 50 13 13 14 19 3 JKS 3 20BC2P1 0 075 055 4 50 24 24 24 32 6 JKS 6 20BC3P5 0 15 075 4 50 37 3 5 45 6 0 8 JKS 8 20BC5P0 0 22 15 l4 50 5 3 5 0 5 5 7 5 10 JKS 10 20BC8P7 0 l4 30 l4 50 9 3 8 7 9 9 13 2 15 HSJ15 20BC011 0 55 4 4 50 12 6 115 113 174 20 HSJ20 20BC015 1 75 55 4 50 16 8 154 172 231 25 HSJ25 20BC022 111 75 4 50 24 22 242 33 40 HSJ40 20BC030 2e ns lI Jo 50 332 30 33 45 50 HSJ50 20BC037 2 185 15 4 50 40 9 37 45 60 70 HSJ70 20BC043 3 22 185
114. 6 EBI 808 c 00L 2 m osz SZE GLE DCL 0Sc DCL 884 8EL Gel eck JULI 90S H S ll 9 Sebago 0006 NINO z 001 00 00 001 GLI 00L SEL 9LL ZL G2 E gOv Zi GL en 3 x 5 DL GLE GLE Scl 00c Scl DCL 601 66 996 626 ek S 00 S 660380c 00 9 NINO 00L osz DC 06 Scl 06 DL v6 9 G09 28S ep Zi 09 en 0006 NINO 001 00 00 06 DCL 06 EI S8 LL VS4 04 ep H OI 9 4403807 00 9 NINO E 001 Gee See 08 Scl 08 POL DI 29 09 78S 0s Zi 09 09 7 c90380c 00 9 NINO 001 00c 00c 09 OLL 09 c8 Glo gS 96t Cp 06 ti Ov OS j cS0380c 0001 NINO SY2 383 N z e 001 DCL DCL 08 06 08 v9 8v Iv 68 OLE 08 t DEI Or Lvo380c 000t NINO Z 9 384 W z 0S Sel Sel Or 04 Or vS SOP ce SOE voc 06 bi Sc EI ce0380c 00SC NINO S60 383 N T e 0S 001 001 DE 09 SE vv E 42 LSe 8vc 09 v 02 Sz z L1e0380c 00Sc NINO SZ9 384 N 929 380 S20 420 W 0 08 08 0 0S 0 FEI FZ cei ote coz 06 bi St Oc c deg 9L0 383 N 919 38Q N 9197 369 IN 0c 0S 09 0c or D SGgc 9 AOIL kel 0s Pl Ob SL L 2103807 019 383 019 380 0L9 3cO N SL Or Or SL Sc Fi SL Gel bE COL 66 06 Yi GL OL I L10380c 0 9 384 W 019 38Q N 0L9 329 IN SL 0 Ge Ol 0c DL SEL 66 6 18 ER 0S v S 92 0 0d6380c ni 98 38 IW 98 420 W Fi 0c 0c 6 cl 6 c6 L9 9 ec es 06 v D S 0 Ld9380c a Org 38Q N 0pg 3c9 WN Z SL SL 9 6 9 6S ev 6 UE DE 08 Y H 0 6de3g0c 8 320 W SL DL
115. 65 Decel Owner 294 Masks amp Owners 3 49 Adj Volt Select 651 Adjust Voltage 3 63 Decel Time X 142 143 Ramp Rates 3 26 Adj Volt Trim 672 Adjust Voltage 3 64 Dig In Status 216 Diagnostics 3 40 Adj Volt Trim Hi 670 Adjust Voltage 3 64 Dig Out Invert 392 Digital Outputs 3 58 Adj Volt Trim Lo 671 Adjust Voltage 3 64 Dig Out Mask 394 Digital Outputs 3 59 Adj Volt TrimSel 669 Adjust Voltage 3 64 Dig Out Param 393 Digital Outputs 3 58 Alarm Clear 261 Alarms 344 Dig Out Setpt 379 Digital Outputs 3 56 Alarm Config 1 259 Alarms 3 44 Dig Out Status 217 Diagnostics 3 40 Alarm X Fault 229 230 Diagnostics 3 41 Dig OutX Level 381 Digital Outputs 3 57 Alarm X Code 262 269 Alarms 3 44 385 389 Analog In X Hi 322 325 Analog Inputs 3 52 Dig OutX OffTime 383 Digital Outputs 3 58 AnaloginXLo 1323 326 Analog Inputs 3 52 i 985 390 Analog ln XLoss 324 327 Analog Inputs 3 52 Dig OutX OnTime ne 390 Digital Outputs 3 57 ndis nt e A GE Digital Inx Sel 1361 366 Digital Inputs 3 55 Analog OutX Hi 343 346 Analog Oupuls 3 53 e Analog OutX Lo 344 347 Analog Outputs 3 53 Direction Mask 279 Masks amp Owners 3 48 Analog OutX Sel 342 345 Analog Outputs 3 53 Direction Mode 190 Direction Config 3 33 Anlg In Config 320 Analog Inputs 351 Direction Owner 291 Masks amp Owners 3 49 Anlg In Sqr Root 321 Analoglnputs 123 DPI Baud Rate 270 Gomm Control 3 46 Anlg Out
116. 7 18 19 20 20B D 2P1 A 3 A Y N A R C 0 NN AD a b C d e f g h i j k I m n a c2 c4 Drive ND Rating ND Rating Code Type 400V 50 Hz Input 600V 60 Hz Input 20B PowerFlex 700 Code Amps kW Code Amps Hp 1P3 13 0 37 1P7 17 10 2P1 24 0 75 2P7 27 2 0 b 3P5 35 15 3P9 39 3 0 Voltage Rating 5P0 5 0 2 2 6P1 6 1 5 0 Code Voltage Ph Prechg 8P7 8 7 4 0 9P0 9 0 75 B 240V ac 3 011 115 55 011 1 10 C 400V ac 3 015 154 75 017 17 15 D 480V ac 3 022 22 1 022 22 20 E 600V ac 3 030 30 15 027 27 25 F 690V ac 3 3 037 37 18 5 032 32 30 H 540V dc 3 N 043 43 22 041 41 40 J 650V dc 3 N 056 56 30 052 52 50 N 325V dc 3 i Y 072 72 37 062 62 60 P 540V dc 2 Y 085 85 45 077 7 75 R 650V dc amp E Y 105 105 55 099 99 100 T 810V dc E Y 140 140 75 125 125 125 W 982V dc x E Y 170 170 90 144 144 150 3 Only available for Frame 5 amp Frame 6 drives E 205 310 260 260 132 co gi ND Rating ND Faing c3 690V 50 Hz Input 208 240V 60 Hz Input ND Rating eode Amps ud 208V 240V 480V 60 Hz Input ta 52 m Code Amps Amps Hp Code Amps Hp 060 60 55 ope 25 22 05 1P1 11 05 082 82 75 4P2 48 42 10 2P1 24 10 098 98 90 6P8 78 68 2 0 3P4 34 2 0 119 119 110 9P6 n 9 6 3 0 5P0 50 3 0 142 142 132 015 175 153 50 8P0 8 0 5 0 022 25 3 22 75 011 1 75 028 322 28 10 014 14 10 042 48 3 42 15 022 22 15 052 56 52 20 027 27 20 070 78 2 70 25 034 34 25 080 92 80 30 040 40 30 104 120 104 40 052 52 40 130 130 130 50 065 65 50 154 177 154 60 077 77 60 192 221 192 7
117. 9 102 441 357 103 459 492 117 610 568 148 717 722 207 930 821 286 1107 1130 397 1527 1402 443 1845 1711 493 2204 1930 583 2513 Voltage 480V Voltage 600V t Worst case condition including Vector Control board HIM and Communication Module 75 100 125 150 200 ND HP 0 5 1 2 3 5 7 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 Supplemental Drive Information External Watts 11 19 31 46 78 115 134 226 303 339 357 492 568 722 821 1130 1402 1711 1930 External Watts 9 14 25 41 59 83 109 177 260 291 324 459 569 630 1053 1467 1400 1668 IP54 NEMA UL Type 12 Watts Loss External Watts Internal Watts 42 44 45 46 87 79 84 99 91 102 103 117 148 207 286 397 443 493 583 Internal Watts 37 40 40 42 83 75 77 93 83 95 95 109 141 195 308 407 500 612 Total Watts Loss 53 63 76 93 164 194 218 326 394 441 459 610 717 930 1107 1527 1845 2204 2513 Total Watts Loss 46 54 65 83 142 157 186 270 343 385 419 569 710 825 1361 1874 1900 2280 Voltage ND HP Heatsink Internal Watts Total Watts Loss 480V 75 873 234 1107 100 1237 290 1527 125 1563 282 1845 150 1874 330 2204 200 2100 413 2513 600V 75 1091 270 1361 100 1537 337 1874 125 1584 316 1900 150 1895 385 2280 Publication 20B UM002C EN P A 6 Supplemental Drive Information Communication Configurations Typical P
118. Alarm Clear UTILITY Alarms to Zero 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 Alarm 1 Code Alarm 2 Code Alarm 3 Code Alarm 4 Code Alarm 5 Code Alarm 6 Code Alarm 7 Code Alarm 8 Code alarms Publication 20B UM002C EN P Resets all Alarm 1 8 Code parameters A code that represents a drive alarm The codes will appear in the order they occur first 4 alarms in first 4 out alarm queue A time stamp is not available with Torque Level must be enabled Default 0 Options 0 1 Default Min Max 0 Units 1 Enables disables alarm conditions that will initiate an active drive alarm 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x Reserved 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x Reserved OW Trq Level bit 19 For the Rod Torque Process Display to work the Oil Well Ready Ready Clr Alrm Que Read Only 65535 Related IND lo IND IN o o IND IO iS NO o GA IND IO SH no I N IND IO co nN o io IND lo bd Group Scaled Blocks 477 483 489 495 478 484 490 496 479 485 491 497 480 486 492 498 481 487 493 499 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Scale1 In Value Scale2 In Value Scale3 In Value Scale4 In Value Displays the value of the signal being sent to ScaleX In Value using a link Scale1 In Hi Scale2 In Hi Sca
119. Auto 1 0 0 Port4 0 1 O 1 Preset5 Auto 1 0 1 Port5 0 1 1 0 Preset 6 Auto 1 10 Port 0 1 1 1 Preset7 Auto 1 1 1 NoLocal 1 0 0 0 TB Manual Control 1 0 0 1 Port1 Manual 1 0 1 0 Port2 Manual 1 0 1 1 Port3 Manual 1 1 0 0 Port 4 Manual 1 1 0 1 Port5 Manual 1 1 1 0 Port6 Manual 1 1 1 1 Jog Ref rive Status ead Only 209 Drive Status 2 Read Onl 209 Present operating condition of the drive AE SIL e A ND QD STS ACA DET TE S A SIS ESE DP Q SS Q PYM Q NI YD PY NU QS o o o o ojojo o o 0 o o o O 0 0 Leader pits 1413 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 y Reserved Bit Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 38 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description File See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 211 Drive Alarm 1 Read Only Alarm conditions that currently exist in the drive Prof SetHome will be set if the alarm is configured in Alarm Config 1 Prof Indexer is configured in Speed Torque Mod and the homing routine has not been successfully completed nn 1 Condition True 10 0 Condition False x Reserved 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x Reserved x x x x x x x x x x x x PS 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Bit 212 Drive Alarm 2 Read Only Alarm conditions that currently exist in the drive x UTILITY Diagnosti
120. B UM002C EN P Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Chapter 4 provides information to guide you in troubleshooting the PowerFlex 700 Included is a listing and description of drive faults with possible solutions when applicable and alarms For information on See page Faults and Alarms 4 1 Drive Status 4 2 Manually Clearing Faults 4 4 Fault Descriptions 4 4 Clearing Alarms 4 10 Alarm Descriptions 4 10 Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions 4 13 Testpoint Codes and Functions 4 16 Faults and Alarms A fault is a condition that stops the drive There are three fault types Type Fault Description CD Auto Reset Run When this type of fault occurs and Auto Rstrt Tries see page 3 30 is set to a value greater than 0 a user configurable timer Auto Rstrt Delay see page 3 30 begins When the timer reaches zero the drive attempts to automatically reset the fault If the condition that caused the fault is no longer present the fault will be reset and the drive will be restarted Non Resettable This type of fault normally requires drive or motor repair The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared The fault will be reset on power up after repair 8 User Configurable These faults can be enabled disabled to annunciate or ignore a fault condition An alarm is a condition that if left untreated may stop the drive There are two alarm types
121. Check Drive Status 1 page 3 37 bits 12 being selected via remote device or digital inputs and 13 for unexpected source selections 6 Check Dig In Status page 3 40 to see if inputs are selecting an alternate source 7 Reprogram digital inputs to correct Speed Sel x option See page 3 55 Motor and or drive will not accelerate to commanded speed Cause s Indication Corrective Action Acceleration time is excessive None Reprogram Accel Time x See page 3 26 Excess load or short acceleration None Check Drive Status 2 bit 10 to see if the drive times force the drive into current is in Current Limit See page 3 37 limit slowing or stopping Remove excess load or reprogram Accel acceleration Time x See page 3 26 Speed command source or value is None Check for the proper Speed Command using not as expected Steps 1 through 7 above Programming is preventing the None Check Maximum Speed See page 3 17 and drive output from exceeding limiting values Motor operation is unstable Cause s Motor data was incorrectly entered or Autotune was not performed Publication 20B UM002C EN P Indication None Corrective Action Maximum Freq See page 3 10 to assure that speed is not limited by programming 1 Correctly enter motor nameplate data 2 Perform Static or Rotate Autotune procedure Param 061 page 3 12 Troubleshooting 4 15 Dri
122. Cu x 5 00v 009 009 00 ost 00 80 eve bee 0S4 802 0s v SZ 9 c6lagoe osz ost 006 002 00 00c 00 Scc OSL 608 545 06 bi 0 en 2 osz 00 00 Sec ose Gee 99c S6L IL F09 L9L 06 v 09 9 vSiag0c x um DL 00 007 Sel Gee Scl g l 9St POLI ESE ELL 0S bi Ov GP E x m 0Sc GLE 00S GLI S c SZL SL rL DEL bor 545 06 Y 09 9 Oti880c 0006 NINO E E SS DCL 00 DC Geb 002 Gol GIL gel 26 90E Le 06 Pl 0 m Cu E DCL ose SLY osL WEI DCL SL cel 0c Z Ov ELL 06 v Ov S voOlgaoc 0006 NINO x 3i zi DL ose ose OLL 00c DEL 96 JL 6 S06 Lv D t Sc DEI t O80880c 0006 NINO 001 00 00 06 GIL 06 vcl 6 c84 6Sc el 06 Pi 02 Sc v 0408807 00 9 NINO m 00L 00c 00c 08 Sel 08 98 v9 9G VLL SIG 0s bi GL 0c ecsogaoc 00 9 NINO SP9 383 IN 04 GIL GIL 09 001 09 Gel Kes 8h 09L Sb 06 Yi Ob GL EI evrogao0c 0007 NNO c 0 484 W s a 0S Sel Sel or D Or 90S BEI czej LOL 962 06 t SI OL c 8coggo0c 00Sc NINO S20 384 W S20 38C W 20 329 W 0 001 001 oe 06 0 8 8 2 Sc 8 O 06 v S GZ L cc0880c 0c9 383 IN 000 38C N 029 3c9 IN 0 D 04 0c SE 0c 9c S61 GLb 2S Ce 06 v Si I 9108807 9L0 384 W 910 380 910 420 W SL or or CL 0c el DI VeL LI Ve Cp 06 v H L 9d6880c 0L0 484 W 019 38C N 0197 329 IN SL oe 0 DL SL DL sel vol 84 v6 ER 0G Y Sl Z L 8d9880c 98 38Q IN 99 4290 W L SL GIL 9 OL 9 04 ER e
123. D Active Prof Step 50 Cflct PTC Conflict 31 Sleep Config 29 Speed Ref 27 Cflct Start At 4 PowerUp TB Man Ref 30 Cflct e TorqProve 49 Cflct UnderVoltage 2 VHz Neg Slope 24 9 Waking 11100 Description Fan pump mode is selected in Motor Cntl Sel and the ratio of Motor NP Hertz to Maximum Freq is greater than 26 Check PI Configuration both AdjVoltTrim amp Torque Trim are selected Drive has sensed a power line loss Drive is in the initial DC bus precharge state An error is detected in trend step s e Set if Sleep Mode is enabled e Setif any profile step uses Encoder Incr and or Enc Absolute and Motor Cntl Sel parameter 53 is not set to FVC Vector and Feedback Select parameter 80 is not set to Encoder or Simulator and Speed Torque Mod parameter 88 7 Pos Spd Prof e a Step Type is configured for Dig Input and the Step Value is greater than 6 less than 6 or zero or the digital input selected with Digital Inx Sel is not set to 57 Prof Input e Cleared if none of the above occur PTC is enabled for Analog In 1 which is configured as a 0 20 mA current source in Anlg In Config Sleep Wake configuration error With Sleep Wake Mode Direct possible causes include drive is stopped and Wake Level lt Sleep Level Stop CF Run Run Forward or
124. EGEN Regen Brake Mode Terminals Frame s 1336 REGEN PowerFlex 700 0 4 DC BR1 DC DC 5 6 DC DC DC DC Regenerative Bus Supply Mode Terminals Frame s 1336 REGEN PowerFlex 700 0 4 DC DC DC DC 5 6 DC DC of Common Bus Drives DC DC of Common Bus Drives Publication 20B UM002C EN P Installation Wiring 1 27 Common Bus Precharge Notes The following notes must be read and understood Also refer to pages 1 8 through 1 12 for additional common bus information Important Application Notes 1 If drives without internal precharge are used Frames 5 amp 6 only then a precharge capability must be provided in the system to guard against possible damage and b disconnect switches Must Not be used between the input of the drive and a common DC bus without the use of an external precharge device 2 If drives with internal precharge Frames 0 6 are used with a disconnect switch to the common bus then a an auxiliary contact on the disconnect must be connected to a digital input of the drive The corresponding input parameter 361 366 must be set to 30 Precharge Enable This provides the proper precharge interlock guarding against possible damage to the drive when connected to a common DC bus b the drive must have firmware version 2 002 or above EMC Instructions CE Conformity Conformity with the Low Voltage LV Directive and Electromagnetic Compat
125. EN P 3 74 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name Number Group Page Parameter Name Number Group Page Pos Reg Gain 719 ProfSetup Status 3 66 Start Acc Boost 69 Volts per Hertz 3 14 Pos Torque Limit 436 Torg Attributes 3 14 Status X Fault 227 228 Diagnostics 341 Pos Spd Prof Cmd 705 ProfSetup Status 3 66 Step x AccelTime 722 Profile Setup 3 68 Pos Spd Prof Sts 700 ProfSetup Status 3 65 Step x Batch 726 _ Profile Setup 3 70 Power Loss Level 186 Power Loss 3 33 Step x DecelTime 723 Profile Setup 3 69 Power Loss Mode 184 Power Loss 3 32 Step x Dwell 725 Profile Setup 3 70 Power Loss Time 185 Power Loss 3 32 Step x Next 727 Profile Setup 3 71 Power Up Marker 242 Faults 3 43 Step x Type 720 Profile Setup 3 67 Powerup Delay 167 Restart Modes _ 3 30 Step x Value 724 Profile Setup 3 69 Preset Speed 1 7 101 107 Discrete Speeds 3 20 Step x Velocity 721 Profile Setup 3 68 PTC HW Value 18 Metering 3 8 Stop Mode X 155 156 Stop Brake Modes 3 28 Pulse In Scale 422 Speed Feedback 3 16 Stop Owner 288 Masks A Owners 3 48 Pulse Input Ref 99 Speed Reference 3 20 SV Boo
126. Elapsed kWh 14 Metering 3 8 Commanded Freg 2 Metering 37 Elapsed MWh 9 Metering 37 Commanded Torque 24 Metering 3 8 Elapsed Run Time 10 Metering 37 Compensation 56 Torq Attributes 3 11 Enc Position Fdbk 414 Speed Feedback 3 15 Control Status 440 Torq Attributes 3 14 Encoder Pos Tol 707 ProfSetup Status 3 66 Control SW Ver 29 Drive Data 39 Encoder PPR 413 Speed Feedback 3 15 Counts Per Unit 708 ProfSetup Status 3 66 Encoder Speed 415 Speed Feedback 3 15 Current Lmt Gain 149 Load Limits 327 EncoderZ Chan 423 Speed Feedback 3 16 Current Lmt Sel 147 Load Limits 3 26 Fault 1 Code 243 Faults 343 Current Lmt Val 148 Load Limits 3 27 Fault 1 Time 244 Faults 343 Current Rate Limit 154 Load Limits 3 27 Fault 2 Code 245 Faults 3 43 Data In XX 300 307 Datalinks 3 49 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Programming and Parameters 3 73 Parameter Name Number Group Page Parameter Name Number Group Page Fault 2 Time 246 Faults 343 Max Rod Speed 640 Oil Well Pump 3 62 Fault 3 Code 247 Faults 343 Max Rod Torque 638 Oil Well Pump 3 62 Fault 3 Time 248 Faults 3 4
127. Flashing yellow Program Digital Inx Sel to resolve e Exclusive functions i e direction control Status light and conflicts See page 3 55 may have multiple inputs configured Dein CflctB Remove multiple selections for the e Stop is factory default and is not wired Ge on same function j Install stop button to apply a signal at Drive Status 2 stop terminal shows type 2 alarm s Publication 20B UM002C EN P 4 14 Troubleshooting Drive does not Start from HIM Cause s Drive is programmed for 2 wire control HIM Start button is disabled for 2 wire control unless param 192 bit 1 2 1 Corrective Action If 2 wire control is required no action needed See Save HIM Ref on page 3 34 If 3 wire control is required program Digital Inx Sel for correct inputs See page 3 55 Drive does not respond to changes in speed command Cause s No value is coming from the source of the command Indication LCD HIM Status Line indicates At Speed and output is 0 Hz Corrective Action 1 Ifthe source is an analog input check wiring and use a meter to check for presence of signal 2 Check Commanded Speed for correct source See page 3 7 Incorrect reference source has None 3 Check Speed Ref Source for the source of been programmed the speed reference See page 3 39 4 Reprogram Speed Ref A Sel for correct source See page 3 19 Incorrect Reference source is None 5
128. HP HDHP 0 5 0 33 1 0 75 2 1 5 3 2 5 3 75 5 0 37 0 25 10 75 0 75 0 55 15 10 1 5 0 75 2 2 1 5 4 22 5 5 4 75 55 11 75 15 11 20 15 18 5 15 25 20 22 18 5 30 25 30 22 40 30 37 30 50 40 45 37 60 50 55 45 75 60 100 75 75 55 125 100 90 75 150 125 110 90 132 110 200 150 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Appendix B HIM Overview For information on See page For information on See page External amp Internal Connections B 1 Viewing and Editing Parameters B 5 LCD Display Elements B 2 Removing Installing the HIM B 8 ALT Functions B 2 Menu Structure B 3 External amp Internal Connections The PowerFlex 700 provides a number of cable connection points 0 Frame shown d A DANGER e Optional Teqsto7 his Communications TA Module 00000 BR1 m zn DU IDc Gs f lan UI E al o ELA um e N EES ela lll wrol U IRL1 e n lel DOC Be L ex o bk s d 5 J A
129. HP at 44 6 Hz eo N a I Es kd kd HP Motor Drive Output 480V gt 342V gt t i 460V gt i 528V gt Actual Line Voltage Drive Input Publication 20B UM002C EN P Appendix D Instructions for ATEX Approved Drives in Group Il Category 2 G D Applications with ATEX Approved Motors For information on See page General D 1 Motor Requirements D 2 Drive Wiring D 3 Drive Configuration D 3 Start Up amp Periodic Drive Testing Requirement D 4 General This document provides information on operation of an ATEX Approved drive and ATEX approved motor The motor is located in a defined hazardous environment while the drive is not A protective system is required to stop current flow to the motor when an over temperature condition has been sensed in the motor When sensed the drive will go into a fault stop condition The drive is manufactured under the guidelines of the ATEX directive 94 9 EC These Drives are in Group II Category 2 GD Applications with ATEX Approved Motors Certification of the drive for the ATEX group and category on its nameplate requires installation operation and maintenance according to this document and to the requirements found in the User Manual and appropriate Motor Instruction Manual s ATTENTION Operation of this ATEX certified drive with an ATEX certified motor that is located in a hazardous environment requires additional installation operation and mai
130. Hz 24000 0 RPM 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Read Only 0 00 3000 00 kW 0 01 kW Read Only 0 0 65535 0 VAC 0 1 VAC Read Only 0 0 65535 0 Amps 0 1 Amps Related Io Eat Ico Ic Ee Ico o SA I2 Programming and Parameters 3 9 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 029 Control SW Ver Default Read Only Main Control Board software version Min Max 0 000 65535 000 Units 0 001 Drive Data Motor Control File Kl o S Parameter Name amp Description SEI 2 see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 040 Motor Type Default 0 Induction 053 9 Set to match the type of motor Options 0 Induction connected 1 Synchr Reluc 1 p 1 1 Important Selecting option 1 or 2 2 Synchr PM also requires selection of Custom V Hz option 2 in parameter 53 041 Motor NP Volts Default Based on Drive Rating 9 Set to the motor nameplate rated volts Min Max 0 0 Rated Volts Units 0 1 VAC 042 Motor NP FLA Default Based on Drive Rating 047 Set to the motor nameplate rated full load Min Max O 0 Rated Amps x 2 048 amps Units 0 1 Amps 2 043 Motor NP Hertz Default Based on Drive Cat No SS 9 Gei to the motor nameplate rated Min Max 5 0 400 0 Hz 9 2 frequency Units 0 1 Hz A S 044 Motor NP RPM Default 1750 0 RPM S 9 Set to the motor nameplate rated RPM Min Max 60 0 24000 0 RPM Units 1 0 RPM
131. IP20 NEMA UL Type Open Top Label 0 50 C Most Ratings 2 Removed 0 45 C 20BC072 Only IP00 NEMA UL Type Open Top Label amp 0 50 C 20BC072 Only 9 Vent Plate Removed Flange Mount Front IP00 NEMA UL Type Open 0 40 C Back External Frames 5 6 Back Heat Sink IP54 NEMA UL Type 12 0 55 C Front Inside Encl Stand alone Wall Mount IP54 NEMA UL 12 0 40 C Frames 5 6 1 Removing the adhesive top label from the drive changes the NEMA UL enclosure rating from Type 1 to Open Frames 5 and 6 do not have a top label 0 Refer to pages A 10 through A 19 for exceptions 3 To remove vent plate see page A 25 for location lift top edge of plate from the chassis Rotate the plate out from the back plate E 3 3 ad D E S E 3 101 6 mm 101 6 mm 101 6 mm 4 0in amp 0in 4 0 in ap 5 No Adhesive Label see Table 1 4 50 8 mm 4 2 0 in With Adhesive Label see Table 1 4 a ADR Zut Refer to Appendix A for detailed w agin v v imension i j v v gt dimension information m S GL 3 a gt 101 6 mm 101 6 mm Minimum Mounting Clearances Specified vertical clearance requirements are intended to be from drive to drive Other objects can occupy this space however reduced airflow may cause protection circuits to fault the drive In addition inlet air temperature must not exceed the product specification AC Supply Source Conside
132. In ConflictA 29 Sleep Config 4 Start At PowerUp 18 Dig In ConflictB 30 TB Man Ref Cflct 5 Analog in Loss 19 Dig In ConflictC 31 PTC Conflict 6 IntDBRes OvrHeat 20 Bipolar Conflict 32 Brake Slipped 8 Drive OL Level 1 21 Motor Type Cflct 33 AdjVoltRef Cflct 9 Drive OL Level 2 22 NP Hz Conflict 34 Home Not Set 10 Decel Inhibt 23 MaxFreq Conflict 49 Torq Prove Cflct 11 Waking 24 VHz Neg Slope 50 Prof Step Cflct 12 Motor Thermistor 25 IR Volts Range 52 PI Config Conflict 13 In Phase Loss 26 FluxAmpsRef Rang Alarm numbers not listed are reserved for future use Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions Drive does not Start from Start or Run Inputs wired to the terminal block Cause s Indication Corrective Action Drive is Faulted Flashing red Clear fault status light e Press Stop e Cycle power e Set Fault Clear to 1 See page 3 42 e Clear Faults on the HIM Diagnostic menu Incorrect input wiring See pages 1 22 amp None Wire inputs correctly and or install 1 23 for wiring examples jumper e 2wire control requires Run Run Forward Run Reverse or Jog input e 3 wire control requires Start and Stop inputs e Jumper from terminal 25 to 26 is required Incorrect digital input programming None Program Digital Inx Sel for correct e Mutually exclusive choices have been inputs See page 3 55 made i e Jog and Jog Forward Start or Run programming may be e 2 wire and 3 wire programming may be missing conflicting
133. Inputs 3 55 Digital Outputs 3 55 Direction Config 3 33 Discrete Speeds 3 20 Drive Data 3 8 Drive Memory 3 35 Faults 3 42 HIM Ref Config 3 34 Load Limits 3 26 Masks amp Owners 3 47 Metering 3 7 MOP Config 3 34 Motor Data 3 9 Power Loss 3 32 Process PI 3 22 Profile Step 3 67 ProfSetup Status 3 65 Ramp Rates 3 26 Restart Modes 3 30 Scaled Blocks 3 45 Slip Comp 3 21 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 16 Speed Feedback 3 15 Speed References 3 19 Speed Regulator 3 25 Speed Trim 3 21 Stop Brake Modes 3 28 Torq Attributes 3 10 Torque Proving 3 59 Volts per Hertz 3 14 H Hardware Enable 1 21 Hardware Fault 4 5 Hardware PTC Fault 4 6 Heatsink OvrTemp Fault 4 6 HIM Menu Structure B 4 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Index 6 HIM Menus Diagnostics B 4 Memory Storage B 4 Preferences B 5 HIM Ref Config Group 3 34 HIM Removing Installing B 8 Home Not Set Alarm 4 11 HW OverCurrent Fault 4 6 1 0 Cassette 1 18 Terminal Block 1 18 Wiring 1 17 UO Comm Loss Fault 4 6 UO Failure Fault 4 6 UO Terminal Block 1 19 In Phase Loss Alarm 4 11 Incompat MCB PB Fault 4 6 Inertia Autotune 3 13 Input Contactor Start Stop 1 13 Input Devices Circuit Breakers 1 5 Contactors 1 13 Fuses 1 5 Input Fusing 1 5 Input Phase Loss Fault 4 6 Input Potentiometer 1 22 Input Power Conditioning 1 3 Input Power Single Phase 1 7 Inputs amp Outputs File 3 51 Installation 1 1 IntDBRes OvrHeat Alarm 4
134. Le 280 1 11 03 Le gt 330 1 13 00 Le 47 4 1 85 ez Publication 20B UM002C EN P A 28 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 8 Frame 5 NEMA UL Type 12 Standalone 400 690V drives only H 609 6 24 00 25 4 1 00 gt pec 558 8 22 00 105 5 4 15 gt 4 7 A H D Allen Bradley mt ue h A i e i Air i i H Outlet l PowerFlex A 1574 8 me 62 00 1543 0 1 5 62 75 0 06 1061 5 41 79 walk 5 51 uU Y p X Lal In 16 8 0 66 18 5 0 53 Dia 12 7 0 50 Dia 4 Places See Note A Lifting Holes UA 450 7 17 75 Max Note A 425 5 Mount with 0 50 Inch UNC Grade 5 or Higher Screws 16 75 ah f M12 Material Class 5 6 or Higher Screws Use Flat Washer with each Fastener 287 0 11 30 Y Air Inlet Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight 1 kg Ibs Description Drive amp Packaging 5 102 51 226 0 154 68 341 0 1 Weights include HIM and Standard WO Publication 20B UM002C EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 29 Figure A 9 Frame 5 NEMA UL Type 12 Flange Mount 400 690V drives only 500 0 19
135. Open Loop 090 Speed Ref A Sel 11 Preset Spd1 238 Fault Config 1 Bit 8 In PhaseLoss 1 Bit 12 DutPhaseLoss 1 380 Digital Out Sel 4 Run releases brake Important If the direction of travel is critical at this point perform short jogs to determine which run direction RUNFWD or RUNREV should be used in the next steps 4 Press Start and run the drive in the desired direction Observe the direction of motor rotation If rotation is not in the desired direction remove drive power and reverse the two motor leads or set bit 5 of Compensation parameter 56 to Mtr Lead Rev 5 With the drive running observe Encoder Speed parameter 415 If the sign of the encoder is not the same as the displayed frequency remove drive power and reverse encoder leads A and A NOT 6 With the drive running verify correct motor rotation and encoder direction Set Motor Fdbk Type parameter 412 to 1 Quad Check Stop the drive Rotate AutoTune Test e The motor will be run for 12 seconds at base frequency 60 Hz Note that equipment travel during this 12 second interval may exceed equipment limits However travel distance can be reduced by setting Maximum Speed parameter 82 to a value less than 45 Hz i e 22 5 Hz 12 seconds at 30 Hz ATTENTION In this test the following conditions will occur e The brake will be released without torque provided by the drive f
136. PI Reference Sel Process Value is set to PI Setpoint Units 0 01 128 PI Feedback Sel Default 0 Pl Setpoint 124 9 Selects the source of the PI feedback Options 0 PI Setpoint m 1 Analog In 1 SS 1 Adjustable Voltage Mode 2 Analog In 2 3 6 Reserved 7 Pulse In 8 Encoder 9 MOP Level 10 Master Ref 11 17 Preset Spd1 7 1822 DPI Port 1 5 2324 Reserved 2528 Scale Block 1 4 29 Preset1 7 Volt 36 Voltage Cmo 37 Output Power ul 38 Output Cur a 129 PI Integral Time Default 2 00 Secs 124 Time required for the integral component Min Max 0 00 100 00 Secs MP E to reach 100 of PI Error Meter Not Units 0 01 Secs 138 Gs functional when the PI Hold bit of PI a Control 1 enabled S 130 PI Prop Gain Default 1 0 124 Sets the value for the PI proportional Min Max 0 00 100 00 Ph component Units 0 01 Tem PI Error x PI Prop Gain PI Output 131 PI Lower Limit Default Maximum Freq 079 Sets the lower limit of the PI output 100 e Min Max 4400 0 Hz im 4800 096 mud Units 0 1Hz 0 1 132 PI Upper Limit Default Maximum Freq 079 Sets the upper limit of the PI output 100 ut Min Max 400 0 Hz ie 800 0 ms Units 0 1Hz 0 1 133 PI Preload Default 0 0 Hz 079 Sets the value used to preload the 100 0 ua integral component on start or enable Min Max Pl Lower Limit m PI Up
137. PowerFlex 700 AC Drives USER MANUAL Series B Vector Control Firmware 4 001 amp Up ALLEN BRADLEY e ROCKWELL SOFTWARE Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manua
138. R 1 Condition True 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Condition False pis 1413 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x Reserved Bit e AES SS PSS Condition Tr Conaition irue X X X X X1X X X X X x 0 0 0 0 0 0 Condition False p31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 x Reserved Bit Mtr Tor Cur Ref Default Read Onl y Displays the torque current reference Min Max 32767 0 Amps value that is present at the output of the Units 0 01 Amps current rate limiter parameter 154 Start Acc Boost Default Based on Drive Rating Sets the voltage boost level for starting Min Max 0 0 Motor NP Volts x 0 25 and acceleration when Custom V Hz Units 0 1 VAC mode is selected Refer to parameter 083 Overspeed Limit Run Boost Default Based on Drive Rating Sets the boost level for steady state or Min Max 0 0 Motor NP Volts x 0 25 deceleration when Fan Pmp V Hz or Units 0 1 VAC Custom V Hz modes are selected See parameter 083 Overspeed Limit Publication 20B UM002C EN P Related o SA I2 o SA IQ o SA Co o SA Co o SA I2 072 412 413 414 MOTOR CONTROL Speed Feedback 415 416 419 420 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Break Voltage Sets the voltage the drive will output at Break Frequency Refer to parameter 083 Overspeed Limit Break Frequency Sets the frequency t
139. R Volts Range Ixo Vit Rang Load Loss MaxFreq Conflict Motor Thermistor Motor Type Cfict o No Type Op Troubleshooting 4 11 Description More than one physical input has been configured to the same input function Multiple configurations are not allowed for the following input functions Forward Reverse Run Reverse Bus Regulation Mode B Speed Select 1 Jog Forward Acc2 Dec2 Speed Select 2 Jog Reverse Accel 2 Speed Select 3 Run Decel 2 Run Forward Stop Mode B The calculated IGBT temperature requires a reduction in PWM frequency If Drive OL Mode is disabled and the load is not reduced an overload fault will eventually occur The calculated IGBT temperature requires a reduction in Current Limit If Drive OL Mode is disabled and the load is not reduced an overload fault will eventually occur The calculated or measured Flux Amps value is not within the expected range Verify motor data and rerun motor tests Ground current has exceeded the level set in Gnd Warn Level Configurable alarm set in parameter 259 bit 17 When set to 1 this alarm is displayed when any of the following occur e parameter 88 is set to 7 Pos Spd Prof e on power up and parameter 88 7 e recall user sets and parameter 88 7 Alarm is cleared when e setting parameter 88 to a value other than 7 e reset defaults parameter 259 bit 17 is cleared a
140. RPM 40 0 Hz 1200 RPM 50 0 Hz 1500 RPM 60 0 Hz 1800 RPM Maximum Speed 10 0 Hz 300 0 RPM Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 1 RPM Related lo co NI I gt cO Ico Io Ei Ico Ico IO Ic Eat Kal o cO IO Io Eat Ico Io Ei Ico o co I o cO Co Programming and Parameters 3 21 Kal o Parameter Name amp Description s ic See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 116 Trim Setpoint Default 0 0 118 9 Adds or subtracts a percentage of the Min Max 200 0 speed reference or maximum speed Units 0 1 Dependent on the setting of Trim Out Select parameter 118 117 Trim In Select Default 2 Analog In 2 090 Specifies which analog input signal is Options See Speed Ref A 093 being used as a trim input Sel 118 Trim Out Select 117 9 Specifies which speed references are to be trimmed 119 120 E M s EW E LSS a e X XIX X XIXIXIX X XIX X x 0 0 0 Bit2 Bit 1 0 E 7654321 0 1 Trimmed 0 Add Not Trimmed Bita x Reserved Factory Default Bit Values 119 Trim Hi Default 60 0 Hz 079 Scales the upper value of the Trim In Min Max Maximum Speed er a Select selection when the source is an Units 0 1Hz GH E analog input 1 RPM Gi 120 Trim Lo Default 0 0 Hz 079 S Scales the lower value of the Trim In Min Max Maximum Speed EM G Se
141. Reg Ki Default 450 161 Sets the responsiveness of the bus Min Max 0 5000 162 regulator Units 1 Publication 20B UM002C EN P File Group Stop Brake Modes 163 164 165 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Bus Reg Mode A Bus Reg Mode B Sets the method and sequence of the DC bus regulator voltage Choices are dynamic brake frequency adjust or both Sequence is determined by programming or digital input to the terminal block Dynamic Brake Setup If a dynamic brake resistor is connected to the drive both of these parameters must be set to either option 2 3 or 4 Refer to the Attention statement on page P 4 for important information on bus regulation Programming and Parameters Values Default Options Adjust Freq Both Frq 1st Disabled Adjust Freq Dynamic Brak Both DB 1st Both Frq 1st ATTENTION The drive does not offer protection for externally mounted brake resistors A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected External resistor packages must be self protected from over temperature or the protective circuit shown in Figure C 1 on page C 3 or equivalent must be supplied DB Resistor Type Selects whether the internal or an external DB resistor will be used Important In Frame 0 2 drives only one DB resistor can be connected to the drive Connecting both an internal amp extern
142. Reserved for future use 8 Hold Step When set this command will inhibit the profile from transitioning to the next step when the condition s required are satisfied When the hold command is released the profile will transition to the next step 9 Pos Redefine This bit is used to set the present position as home When this bit is set Profile Status bit At Home will be set and the Units Traveled will be set to zero 10 Find Home __ This bit is used to command the find home routine 11 Vel Override When this bit is set the velocity of the present step will be multiplied by the value in Vel Override 12 31 Reserved Reserved for future use The Pos Spd Prof Cmd bits can be set via DPI interface HIM or Comm or digital inputs When digital input s are programmed for Pos Sel 1 5 the starting step of the profile is exclusively controlled by the digital inputs The DPI interface value for bits 0 4 will be ignored If a digital input is configured for the bit 8 11 functions see above the DPI interface or the digital input can activate the command Velocity Regulated Step Types and Parameters Each of the Velocity Regulated steps has the following associated parameters or functions Refer to the following page for descriptions Accel Decel Next Step Step Type Value Velocity Time Time Condition Dwell Batch Next Time Total Move Speed amp Accel Rate Decel Rate T
143. Run Reverse is not configured in Digital Inx Sel Speed Ref x Sel or PI Reference Sel is set to Reserved Start At PowerUp is enabled Drive may start at any time within 10 seconds of drive powerup Occurs when e Auto Manual is selected default for Digital In3 Sel parameter 363 and e TB Man Ref Sel parameter 96 has been reprogrammed No other use for the selected analog input may be programmed Example If TB Man Ref Sel is reprogrammed to Analog In 2 all of the factory default uses for Analog In 2 must be reprogramed such as parameters 90 117 128 and 179 See also page 1 25 To correct e Verity reprogram the parameters that reference an analog input or e Reprogram Digital In3 to another function or Unused When TorqProve Cnfg is enabled Motor Cntl Sel Feedback Select and Motor Fdbk Type must be properly set refer to page C 7 The bus voltage has dropped below a predetermined value Torq Perf Mode Custom V Hz amp the V Hz slope is negative The Wake timer is counting toward a value that will start the drive 1 See page 4 1 for a description of alarm types Publication 20B UM002C EN P Troubleshooting 4 13 Table 4 D Alarm Cross Reference No UI Alarm No Alarm No UI Alarm 1 Precharge Active 14 Load Loss 27 Speed Ref Cflct 2 UnderVoltage 15 Ground Warn 28 Ixo Vit Rang 3 Power Loss 17 Dig
144. Select Adjust Voltage 3 63 652 Adj Volt Ref Hi Adjust Voltage 3 63 653 Adj Volt Ref Lo Adjust Voltage 3 63 654 660 Adj Volt Preset1 7 Adjust Voltage 3 63 661 Min Adj Voltage Adjust Voltage 3 63 662 Adj Volt Command Adjust Voltage 3 63 663 MOP Adj VoltRate Adjust Voltage 3 64 669 Adj Volt TrimSel Adjust Voltage 3 64 670 Adj Volt Trim Hi Adjust Voltage 3 64 671 Adj Volt Trim Lo Adjust Voltage 3 64 672 Adj Volt Trim Adjust Voltage 3 64 675 Adj Volt AccTime Adjust Voltage 3 64 676 Adj Volt DecTime Adjust Voltage 3 64 677 Adj Volt S Curve Adjust Voltage 3 65 700 Pos Spd Prof Sts ProfSetup Status 3 65 701 Units Traveled ProfSetup Status 3 65 705 Pos Spd Prof Cmd ProfSetup Status 3 66 707 Encoder Pos Tol ProfSetup Status 3 66 708 Counts Per Unit ProfSetup Status 3 66 711 Vel Override ProfSetup Status 3 66 713 Find Home Speed ProfSetup Status 3 66 714 Find Home Ramp ProfSetup Status 3 66 718 Pos Reg Filter ProfSetup Status 3 66 719 Pos Reg Gain ProfSetup Status 3 66 720 Step x Type Profile Setup 3 67 721 Step x Velocity Profile Setup 3 68 722 StepxAccelTime Profile Setup 3 68 723 StepxDecelTime Profile Setup 3 69 724 Step x Value Profile Setup 3 69 725 Step x Dwell Profile Setup 3 70 726 Step x Batch Profile Setup 3 70 727 Step x Next Profile Setup 3 71 Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 78 Programming and Parameters Notes Publication 20
145. Start 4 1 Autotune 3 12 AutoTune Aborted Fault 4 4 Autotune Torque 3 13 Auxiliary Input Fault 4 4 Before Applying Power 2 1 Bipolar Conflict Alarm 4 10 Bipolar Inputs 1 17 Bottom Plate Removal 1 7 Bottom View Dimensions A 24 Brake Dynamic 3 29 Brake Slipped Alarm 4 10 Break Frequency 3 15 Break Voltage 3 15 Brk Alarm Travel 3 61 Brk Release Time 3 60 Brk Set Time 3 60 BrkSlip Count 3 60 Bus Capacitors Discharging P 3 Bus Reg Kd 3 29 Bus Reg Ki 3 28 Bus Reg Kp 3 29 Bus Reg Mode A 3 29 Bus Reg Mode B 3 29 Bypass Contactors 1 14 C Cable Entry Plate Removal 1 7 SHLD Terminal 1 4 Cable Length Motor 1 7 Cable Trays 1 7 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Cables Power Armored 1 5 Insulation 1 5 Separation 1 5 Shielded 1 5 Type 1 5 Unshielded 1 5 Capacitors Bus Discharging P 3 Cassette I O 1 18 Catalog Number Explanation P 5 CE Conformity 1 27 Requirements 1 28 Checklist Start Up 2 1 Circuit Breakers Input 1 5 Clear Fault Clr Owner 3 49 Clearing Alarms 4 10 Clearing Faults 4 4 Cntl Bd Overtemp Fault 4 4 Comm Control Group 3 46 Commanded Speed 3 7 Commanded Torque 3 8 Common Bus 1 27 Common Mode Capacitors 1 14 Common Mode Interference 1 17 Common Symptoms and Corrective Action 4 13 Communication File 3 46 Communications Logic Command Word A 7 Logic Status Word A 8 Programmable Controller Configurations A 6 Compensation 3 11 Conduit
146. The power source has intermittent voltage spikes in excess of 6000 volts These spikes could be caused by other equipment on the line or by events such as lightning strikes The power source has frequent interruptions 2 5 HP or Less Drives in addition to 1 above The nearest supply transformer is larger than 100kVA or the available short circuit fault current is greater than 100 000A The impedance in front of the drive is less than 0 5 If any or all of these conditions exist it is recommended that the user install a minimum amount of impedance between the drive and the source This impedance could come from the supply transformer itself the cable between the transformer and drive or an additional transformer or reactor The impedance can be calculated using the information supplied in Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOO1 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Installation Wiring General Grounding Requirements The drive Safety Ground PE must be connected to system ground Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes The integrity of all ground connections should be periodically checked For installations within a cabinet a single safety ground point or ground bus bar connected directly to building steel should be used All circuits including the AC input ground conductor should be grounded ind
147. Three distinct bands can be programmed If none of the skip bands touch or overlap each band has its own high low limit Max Frequency Skip Band 1 mmm e mmm mmm mmm e mmm e Skip Frequency 1 Skip Frequency 2 If skip bands overlap or touch the center frequency is recalculated based on the highest and lowest band values DH 400 Hz en mum mum mum mum mum zum mum uum Adjusted Skip Frequency 1 Skip Band Skip Frequency 2 wiRecalculated x ey as nee Eu Re ie rate Skip Frequency 0Hz If a skip band s extend beyond the max frequency limits the highest band value will be clamped at the max frequency limit The center frequency is recalculated based on the highest and lowest band values 400 Hz Adjusted Max Frequency Skip Band Skip w Recalculated Skip Frequency 0Hz If the band is outside the limits the skip band is inactive 400 Hz Skip Frequency 1 Inactive Skip Band 60 Hz Max Frequency OHz Publication 20B UM002C EN P C 34 Application Notes Sleep Wake Mode This function stops sleep and starts wake the drive based on separately configurable analog input levels rather than discrete start and stop signals When enabled in Direct mode the drive will start wake when an analog signal is greater than or equal to the user specified Wake Level and stop the drive when an analog signal is less than or equal to the user spe
148. Type 40 Motor Data 3 9 Find Home Speed 713 ProfSetup Status 3 66 Mtr NP Pwr Units 46 Motor Data 3 9 Float Tolerance 606 Torq Proving 3 60 Mtr OL Trip Time 221 Diagnostics 3 40 Flux Braking 166 Stop Brake Modes 3 30 Mtr Tor Cur Ref 441 Torq Attributes 3 14 Flux Current 5 Metering 3 7 Neg Torque Limit 437 Torq Attributes 3 14 Flux Current Ref 63 Torg Attributes 3 12 Notch Filter Freq 419 Speed Feedback 3 15 Flux Up Mode 57 Torg Attributes 3 11 Notch Filter K 420 Speed Feedback 3 15 Flux Up Time 58 Torg Attributes 3 11 OilWell Pump Sel 641 Oil Well Pump 3 62 Flying Start En 169 Restart Modes _ 3 30 Output Current 3 Metering 3 7 Flying StartGain 170 Restart Modes 3 30 Output Freq 1 Metering 3 7 Gearbox Limit 648 Oil Well Pump 3 62 Output Power 7 Metering 3 7 Gearbox Rating 642 Oil Well Pump 3 62 Output Powr Fctr 8 Metering 3 7 Gearbox Sheave 643 Oil Well Pump 3 62 Output Voltage 6 Metering 3 7 Gearbox Ratio 644 Oil Well Pump 3 62 Overspeed Limit 83 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 17 Gnd Warn Level 177 Power Loss 3 32 Param Access Lvl 196 Drive Memory 3 35 Inertia Autotune 67 Torq Attributes 3 13 PCP Pump Sheave 637 Oil Well Pump 3 62 IR Voltage Drop 62 Torg Attributes 3 12 PI BW Filter 139 Process PI 3 24 Ixo Voltage Drop 64 Torq Attributes 3 12 PI Configuration 124 Process PI 3 22 Jog Mask 278 Masks amp Owners 3 48 PI Control 125 Process PI 3 22 Jog Owner 290 Masks amp Owners 3 48 PI Deriv Time 459 Process PI 3 24 Jog S
149. V 208V 400V Frames 0 4 Frames 5 6 AC Input Overvoltage Trip 285VAC 285VAC 570VAC 570VAC 716VAC 818VAC AC Input Undervoltage Trip 120VAC 138VAC 233VAC 280VAC 345VAC 345VAC Bus Overvoltage Trip 405VDC 405VDC 810VDC 810VDC 1013VDC 1162VDC Bus Undervoltage Shutoff 153VDC 153VDC 305VDC 305VDC 381VDC 437VDC Fault Nominal Bus Voltage 281VDC 324VDC 540VDC 648VDC 810VDC 932VDC Publication 20B UM002C EN P A 2 Category Protection continued Environment Electrical Control Specification All Drives Heat Sink Thermistor Supplemental Drive Information Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip Drive Overcurrent Trip Software Overcurrent Trip Hardware Overcurrent Trip 200 of rated current typical 220 300 of rated current dependent on drive rating Line transients up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62 41 1991 Control Logic Noise Showering arc transients up to 1500V peak Immunity Power Ride Thru 15 milliseconds at full load Logic Control Ride Thru 0 5 seconds minimum 2 seconds typical Ground Fault Trip Phase to ground on drive output Short Circuit Trip Phase to phase on drive output Altitude 1000 m 3300 ft max without derating Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature w o Derating IP20 NEMA UL Type Open 0 to 50 degrees C 32 to 122 degrees F See pages A 10 through A 19 for exceptions Sto
150. Value Comm Control 3 47 190 Direction Mode Direction Config 3 33 276 Logic Mask Masks amp Owners 3 47 192 Save HIM Ref HIM Ref Config 3 34 Security 3 51 193 Man Ref Preload HIM Ref Config 3 34 277 Start Mask Masks amp Owners 3 47 194 Save MOP Ref MOP Config 3 34 278 Jog Mask Masks amp Owners 3 48 195 MOP Rate MOP Config 3 34 279 Direction Mask Masks A Owners 3 48 196 Param Access Lvl Drive Memory 3 35 280 Reference Mask Masks amp Owners 3 48 197 Reset To Defalts Drive Memory 3 35 281 Accel Mask Masks amp Owners 3 48 198 Load Frm Usr Set Drive Memory 3 35 282 Decel Mask Masks A Owners 3 48 199 Save To User Set Drive Memory 3 35 283 Fault Clr Mask Masks amp Owners 3 48 200 Reset Meters Drive Memory 3 35 284 MOP Mask Masks amp Owners 3 48 201 Language Drive Memory 3 35 285 Local Mask Masks A Owners 3 48 202 Voltage Class Drive Memory 3 36 288 Stop Owner Masks amp Owners 3 48 203 Drive Checksum Drive Memory 3 36 289 Start Owner Masks amp Owners 3 48 204 Dyn UserSet Cnfg Drive Memory 3 36 290 Jog Owner Masks amp Owners 3 48 205 Dyn UserSet Sel Drive Memory 3 36 291 Direction Owner Masks amp Owners 3 49 206 Dyn UserSet Ach Drive Memory 3 37 292 Reference Owner Masks amp Owners _ 3 49 209 210 Drive Status X Diagnostics 3 37 293 Accel Owner Masks amp Owners 3 49 211 212 Drive Alarm X Diagnostics 3 38 294 Decel Owner Masks amp Owners 3 49 213 Speed Ref Source Diagnostics 3
151. X X XIX X X X X X x 0 0 0 ee Tue PS 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 x Reserved Bit Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 42 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Alarm 2 Fault Group File No 230 the last fault Values Captures and displays Drive Alarm 2 at the time of X X X X X X X X X X X X PS 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 2019 18 17 16 Bit Testpoint 1 Sel Testpoint 2 Sel Selects the function whose value is displayed value in Testpoint x Data These are internal values that are not accessible through parameters See Testpoint Codes and Functions on page 4 16 for a listing of available codes and functions Testpoint 1 Data Testpoint 2 Data The present value of the function selected in Testpoint x Sel Fault Config 1 Diagnostics 234 236 235 237 238 Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Enables disables annunciation of the listed faults Read Only 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x Reserved 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x Reserved 499 0 65535 1 Read Only 7142147483648 1 1 Enabled 0 Disabled x Reserved
152. ZZS 80S Z S6 2 SZE GLE 001 00c 001 cl 06 c8 776 O62 g 0S H amp S 804980 SLL SLL 09 OLL 09 POL 84 eG 19S 69v 80S t Sv 2 Gee Gee 08 Scl 08 06 99 09 6 89 7 78 g 0S v GI 0904802 OSH OSL 06 06 0S Ed 69 9r 08v FOr 80S y GLE a T SLL GLI 09 OLL 09 82 1G eG 19S 69v 80S Y Sv 9 25049800 1 DV OA 069 XEN XENI XEN ui UI z XEN i UIW DES ut L 1002 ku sdwy 2 20 GH ON 3 Jeun j 40199 0Jd cJ 1eeeug asn4 ejog asn4 Aejaq du nding sBuneg yduel bau Buneu 3 Bop nou mom Su u0N eui uauen indu WMd MA Wi Joo eng gj S8913q U093 01d 3ndu 2v 30A 069 JN ALL Publication 20B UM002C EN P A 16 Supplemental Drive Information Table A G 325 Volt DC Input Protection Devices See page A 19 for Notes Drive Catalog HP Rating Ge m Bee Output Amps jene Number ND HD kHz C Amps Cont 1Min 3Sec Fuse Fuse 2 20BB2P2 o 05 033 4 50 20 22 24 83 l5 JKS 5 20BB4P2 0 1 0 75 4 50 3 8 42 48 64 10 JKS 10 20BB6P8 1 2 be 4 50 je 68 lo 12 15 HSJ15 20BB9P6 118 2 4 50 9 7 9 6 10 6 14 4 20 HSJ20 20BB015 1 3 4 50 16 153 168 230 30 HSJ30 20BB022 1 75 5 4 50 23 3 22 24 2 33 45 HSJ45 20BB028 2 10 75 k 50 30 8 3 la eo HSJ60 20BB042 3 15 10 4 50 45 42 46 2 63 90 HSJ90 20BB052 3 20 15 J4 80 55 52 63 ao 100 HSJ100 20BB070 4 25 20 4 50 75 8 70 78 105 150 HSJ150 20BB080 4 30 25 l4 50 8
153. able 1 B Recommended Shielded Wire Rating Type Description 600V 90 C 194 F e Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation XHHW2 RHW 2 e Copper braid aluminum foil combination shield and Anixter B209500 B209507 tinned copper drain wire Belden 29501 29507 or e PVC jacket equivalent Standard Option 2 Tray rated 600V 90 C Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation 194 F RHH RHW 2 e 5mil single helical copper tape 25 overlap min with Anixter OLF 7xxxxx or three bare copper grounds in contact with shield equivalent e PVC jacket Class amp Il Division amp Tray rated 600V 90 C e Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation and Il 194 F RHH RHW 2 impervious corrugated continuously welded aluminum Anixter 7V 7xxxx 3G or armor equivalent e Black sunlight resistant PVC jacket overall e Three copper grounds on 10 AWG and smaller Publication 20B UM002C EN P Installation Wiring 1 7 EMC Compliance Refer to EMC Instructions on page 1 27 for details Cable Trays and Conduit If cable trays or large conduits are to be used refer to the guidelines presented in the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOO1 ATTENTION To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages unused wires in the conduit must be grounded at both ends For the same reason if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drive
154. able behavior can result if two or more devices are connected in this manner ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed bypass system can result in component damage or reduction in product life The most common causes are e Wiring AC line to drive output or control terminals e Improper bypass or output circuits not approved by Allen Bradley e Output circuits which do not connect directly to the motor Contact Allen Bradley for assistance with application or wiring Publication 20B UM002C EN P P 4 A Overview ATTENTION The adjust freq portion of the bus regulator function is extremely useful for preventing nuisance overvoltage faults resulting from aggressive decelerations overhauling loads and eccentric loads It forces the output frequency to be greater than commanded frequency while the drive s bus voltage is increasing towards levels that would otherwise cause a fault However it can also cause either of the following two conditions to occur 1 Fast positive changes in input voltage more than a 10 increase within 6 minutes can cause uncommanded positive speed changes However an OverSpeed Limit fault will occur if the speed reaches Max Speed Overspeed Limit If this condition is unacceptable action should be taken to 1 limit supply voltages within the specification of the drive and 2 limit fast positive input voltage changes to less than 10 Without taking such actions if this operation is un
155. acceptable the adjust freq portion of the bus regulator function must be disabled see parameters 161 and 162 2 Actual deceleration times can be longer than commanded deceleration times However a Decel Inhibit fault is generated if the drive stops decelerating altogether If this condition is unacceptable the adjust freq portion of the bus regulator must be disabled see parameters 161 and 162 In addition installing a properly sized dynamic brake resistor will provide equal or better performance in most cases Important These faults are not instantaneous Test results have shown that they can take between 2 12 seconds to occur ATTENTION Loss of control in suspended load applications can cause personal injury and or equipment damage Loads must always be controlled by the drive or a mechanical brake Parameters 600 611 are designed for lifting torque proving applications It is the responsibility of the engineer and or end user to configure drive parameters test any lifting functionality and meet safety requirements in accordance with all applicable codes and standards Publication 20B UM002C EN P Overview P 5 Catalog Number Explanation Position 1 8 4 57 8 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 1
156. ad Only sell 9 Accumulated percentage of drive Min Max 0 0 100 0 a overload Continuously operating the Units 0 196 drive over 100 of its rating will increase this value to 100 and cause a drive fault or foldback depending on the setting of Drive OL Mode 220 Motor OL Count Default Read Only Accumulated percentage of motor Min Max 0 0 100 0 overload Continuously operating the Units 0 1 motor over 100 of the motor overload setting will increase this value to 100 and cause a drive fault Refer to page C 16 221 Mtr OL Trip Time Default Read Only Amount of time before a Drive Overload Min Max 0 99999 fault F64 occurs if the load condition Units 1 remains constant A value of 99999 means that the drive is operating under the overload level 224 Fault Speed Default Read Only Captures and displays the output speed Min Max 0 0 Maximum Freq of the drive at the time of the last fault 0 0 Maximum Speed Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Publication 20B UM002C EN P Related Ka lO Ko lo lOc Ka e Ka SZ melo EN IO lo gt Kai Io Co IND IND Io File Group Diagnostics No 225 226 227 228 229 Programming and Parameters
157. afety requirements Publication 20B UM002C EN P 1 8 Installation Wiring AC Input Phase Selection Frames 5 amp 6 Only ATTENTION To avoid a shock hazard ensure that all power to the A drive has been removed before performing the following Moving the Line Type jumper shown in Figure 1 2 will allow single or three phase operation Important When selecting single phase operation input power must be applied to the R L1 and S L2 terminals only to assure power to the fan Selecting Verifying Fan Voltage Frames 5 amp 6 Only Important Read Attention statement above Frames 5 amp 6 utilize a transformer to match the input line voltage to the internal fan voltage If your line voltage is different than the voltage class specified on the drive nameplate it may be necessary to change transformer taps as shown below Common Bus DC input drives require user supplied 120 or 240V AC to power the cooling fans The power source is connected between 0 VAC and the terminal corresponding to your source voltage see Figure 1 4 Table 1 C Fan VA ratings DC Input Only Frame Rating 120V or 240V 5 100 VA 6 138 VA Figure 1 2 Typical Locations Phase Select Jumper amp Transformer Frame 5 shown ip Phase Selection Jumper o 3 PH 1 PH LINE TYPE U0 O spare D SPARE 2
158. age 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Save HIM Ref Enables HIM to control Speed Reference only or Reference Start and Jog in Manual mode including two wire control Also enables a feature to save the present frequency reference value issued by the HIM to drive memory on power loss Value is restored to the HIM on power up S Y GS L YAS Q X SASS XI XIX X XIXIXIX X X x x 0 x 0 1 porcus 8 7654 32 1 0 x Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values At Powr Down 1 Save at Power Down 0 Do Not Save Manual Mode 1 HIM controls Reference Start Jog Direction amp Clear Faults Start amp Jog Disabled from all other Sources regardless of 2 Wire 3 Wire control selection Must select Manual Mode on the HIM prior to setting this bit 0 HIM controls only the Reference HIM Disable 1 Start amp Jog on HIM Do Not Function in 3 Wire mode 0 Start amp Jog on HIM will Function in 3 Wire mode Man Ref Preload Default 0 Disabled Enables disables a feature to automati Options 0 Disabled cally load the present Auto frequency 1 Enabled reference value into the HIM when Man ual is selected Allows smooth speed transition from Auto to Manual Save MOP Ref Enables disables the feature that saves the present MOP frequency reference at power down or at stop
159. age will occur ATTENTION The drive start stop enable control circuitry includes solid state components If hazards due to accidental contact with mov ing machinery or unintentional flow of liquid gas or solids exist an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to remove the AC line to the drive An auxiliary braking method may be required Output Contactor Precaution ATTENTION To guard against drive damage when using output contactors the following information must be read and understood One or more output contactors may be installed between the drive and motor s for the purpose of disconnecting or isolating certain motors loads If a contactor is opened while the drive is operating power will be removed from the respective motor but the drive will continue to produce voltage at the output terminals In addition reconnecting a motor to an active drive by closing the contactor could produce excessive current that may cause the drive to fault If any of these conditions are determined to be undesirable or unsafe an auxiliary contact on the output contactor should be wired to a drive digital input that is programmed as Enable This will cause the drive to execute a coast to stop cease output whenever an output contactor is opened Publication 20B UM002C EN P 1 14 Installation Wiring Bypass Contactor Precaution ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed bypass system can A result in component damage or red
160. al resistor could cause damage If a dynamic brake resistor is connected to the drive Bus Reg Mode A amp B must be set to either option 2 3 or 4 Default Options 2 0 1 2 None Internal Res External Res None ATTENTION Equipment damage may result if a drive mounted internal resistor is installed and this parameter is set to External Res or None Thermal protection for the internal resistor will be disabled resulting in possible device damage Also see ATTENTION above Bus Reg Kp Proportional gain for the bus regulator Used to adjust regulator response Bus Reg Kd Derivative gain for the bus regulator Used to control regulator overshoot Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units 1500 0 10000 1 1000 0 10000 1 3 29 Related Em lo Ic I lo IG RS Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 30 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description Related 2 See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 166 Flux Braking Default 0 Disabled Set to use an increase in the motor flux Options 0 Disabled current to increase the motor losses and 1 Enabled o allow a faster deceleration time when a chopper brake or regenerative capability is not available Can be used as a stopping or fast deceleration method Stop Brake Modes Group 167 Powerup Delay Default 0 0 Secs Defines the programme
161. all drives refer to the Derating Guidelines in the PowerFlex Reference Manual Carrier Frequency 2 4 8 amp 10 kHz Drive rating based on 4 kHz see pages A 10 through A 15 for exceptions Output Voltage Range 0 to rated motor voltage Output Frequency Range 0 to 420 Hz Frequency Accuracy Digital Input Within 0 01 of set output frequency Analog Input Within 0 4 of maximum output frequency Publication 20B UM002C EN P Category Control continued Specification Frequency Control Supplemental Drive Information A 3 Speed Regulation w Slip Compensation Volts per Hertz Mode 0 5 of base speed across 40 1 speed range 40 1 operating range 10 rad sec bandwidth Speed Regulation w Slip Compensation Sensorless Vector Mode 0 5 of base speed across 80 1 speed range 80 1 operating range 20 rad sec bandwidth Speed Regulation w Feedback Sensorless Vector Mode 0 196 of base speed across 80 1 speed range 80 1 operating range 20 rad sec bandwidth Speed Control Speed Regulation w o Feedback Vector Control Mode 0 196 of base speed across 120 1 speed range 120 1 operating range 50 rad sec bandwidth Speed Regulation w Feedback Vector Control Mode 0 001 of base speed across 120 1 speed range 1000 1 operating range 250 rad sec bandwidth Torque Regulation Torque Regulation w o Feedback 5 600 rad sec bandwidth Torque Regulation w Feedback
162. ameter Name amp Description Parameter name as it appears on an LCD HIM with a brief description of the parameter s function Q Values Defines the various operating characteristics of the parameter Three types exist ENUM Default Lists the value assigned at the factory Read Only no default Options Displays the programming selections available Bit Bit Lists the bit place holder and definition for each bit Numeric Default Lists the value assigned at the factory Read Only no default Min Max The range lowest and highest setting possible for the parameter Units Unit of measure and resolution as shown on the LCD HIM Important Some parameters will have two unit values e Analog inputs can be set for current or voltage with Anlg In Config param 320 e Setting Speed Units parameter 79 selects Hz or RPM Important When sending values through DPI ports simply remove the decimal point to arrive at the correct value i e to send 5 00 Hz use 500 Q Related Lists parameters if any that interact with the selected parameter The symbol Oo indicates that additional parameter information is available in Appendix C Publication 20B UM002C EN P Programming and Parameters 3 3 How Parameters are Organized The LCD HIM displays parameters in a File Group Parameter or Numbered List view order To switch display mode access the Main Menu press ALT then Sel wh
163. ar Pin 4 8 Software 4 8 SW OverCurrent 4 8 TorgPrv Spd Band 4 8 Trnsistr OvrTemp 4 9 UnderVoltage 4 9 UserSet Chksum 4 9 Faults Cleared Fault 4 5 Faults Group 3 42 Faults Clearing 4 4 Fdbk Filter Sel 3 15 Feedback Select 3 17 FGP 3 3 File Applications 3 59 Communication 3 46 Dynamic Control 3 26 Inputs amp Outputs 3 51 Monitor 3 7 Motor Control 3 9 Pos Spd Profile 3 65 Speed Command 3 16 Utility 3 33 File Group Parameter 3 3 Filter RFI 1 4 Find Home Ramp 3 66 Find Home Speed 3 66 First Environment Installations 1 28 Flange Mount Dimensions A 28 A 29 A 31 A 32 A 33 Float Tolerance 3 60 Fit QueueCleared Fault 4 5 Flux Braking 3 30 Flux Current 3 7 Flux Current Ref 3 12 Flux Up Mode 3 11 Flux Up Time 3 11 Flux Vector Control Option 3 3 FluxAmpsRef Rang Alarm 4 11 FluxAmpsRef Rang Fault 4 5 Flying Start En 3 30 Flying StartGain 3 30 Frame Designations A 9 Frame Size Drive P 3 Functions ALT Key B 2 Fuses Input 1 5 Ratings A 9 G Gearbox Limit 3 63 Gearbox Rating 3 62 Gearbox Ratio 3 62 Gearbox Sheave 3 62 General Precautions P 3 Gnd Warn Level 3 32 Ground Fault 4 5 Ground Warn Alarm 4 11 Grounding Index 5 Bus 1 4 Conductor 1 4 Filter 1 4 General 1 4 Impedance 1 4 Safety PE 1 4 Shields 1 4 Group Adjust Voltage 3 63 Alarms 3 44 Analog Inputs 3 51 Analog Outputs 3 52 Comm Control 3 46 Datalinks 3 49 Diagnostics 3 37 Digital
164. arameters or functions Accel Decel Next Step Step Type Value Velocity Time Time Condition Dwell Batch Next Encoder Position amp Speed Accel Decel AtPosition Dwell NA Next Absolute Direction Rate Rate Time Step Encoder Position amp Speed Accel Decel AtPosition Dwell Batch Next Incremental Direction Rate Rate Time Number Step End Hold NA NA NA NA At Position Dwell NA Stop Position Time NA Function not applicable to this step type Encoder Absolute This is a move to an absolute position which is referenced from the home position When started the drive ramps to the desired velocity in the direction required holds the speed then ramps to zero speed landing or ending at the commanded position within the tolerance window Encoder Incremental Encoder Incr This is a move increment from the current position in the direction distance and speed programmed When started the drive ramps to the desired velocity holds the speed then ramps to zero speed landing or ending at the commanded position within the tolerance window End Hold Position The drive holds the last position and stops the profile after dwell time expires Must be used with position regulated profile Do Not use End Homing Routine Each time the profile indexer is enabled the drive requires a home position to be detected The following options are available e Homing to Marker Pulse wi
165. asic Detailed and Application aid the user in commissioning the drive asking simple Yes No or Enter Data questions The user is guided through the Start Up to reduce the amount of time necessary to get the drive up and running The following are included in startup Input Voltage Ratings Motor Data Motor Tests amp Auto tuning Speed Torque Control amp Direction Limits Speed Reference Start amp Stop Modes Ramp Setup Digital and Analog I O Application Set up TorqProve Oil Well Pumps Positioning Speed Profiling See page 2 5 for details Important Information Power must be applied to the drive when viewing or changing parameters Previous programming may affect the drive status and operation when power is applied If the I O Cassette has been changed a Reset Defaults operation must be performed Torque Proving applications can use the Assisted Start Up to tune the motor However it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the hoist crane equipment during the routine If this is not possible refer to the manual tuning procedure on page C 4 Publication 20B UM002C EN P eanpeooud dn peg eui ada pue synejep uojej 0 eAup Y JoSaJ siNd00 uomeniis siu J enjeA jeui amp uo 1194 0 joe eq Jou eui sJejeurered s y enpeooJd euni ojne eui Duuogg jnoyym s sa eu Buunp enup ay WOI pe ouiai s Jemod J 99e Loe pue g z 9 z 080 ESO eJe siejeurejed payo
166. at 1 10 the Find Home Speed to the switch position and then stop The Home Limit switch will be active when stopped Figure C 7 shows the sequence of operation for homing to a limit switch without encoder feedback Figure C 7 Homing to Limit Switch No Feedback Homing At Home Home Limit Input Y Y Start Command 200 150 100 50 Find Home Command V 45 Speed Feedback 25 m Profile Status 700 Dig In Status 216 50 Publication 20B UM002C EN P C 24 Application Notes e Position Redefine When Pos Redefine is set the present position is established as Home and Units Traveled is set to zero e Disable Homing Requirement If a home position is not required the routine can be disabled by clearing Alarm Config 1 bit 17 Prof SetHome to 0 This will disable the alarm from being set when Pos Spd Profile mode is configured in Speed Torque Mod and will set the present position as Home Once Homing is complete the Find Home command must be removed to allow the profile to be run If the Find Home command is not removed when the drive is started the routine will see that it is At Home and the drive will stop Example 1 Five Step Velocity Profile Time Based and Encoder Based The first three steps are Time steps followed by an Encoder Abs step to zero and then an End step For each Time step the drive ramp
167. ation Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake option 1 Restore defaults 2 Reload User Set if used 1 Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive 2 Program the drive parameters as needed Checkthe wiring between the drive and motor 2 Check motor for grounded phase 3 Replace drive Check the motor and drive output terminal wiring for a shorted condition 2 Replace drive If adapter was not intentionally disconnected check wiring to the port Replace wiring port expander adapters Main Control Board or complete drive as required 2 Check HIM connection 3 If an adapter was intentionally disconnected and the Logic Mask bit for that adapter is set to 4 this fault will occur To disable this fault set the Logic Mask bit for the adapter to 0 1 Check DPI device event queue and corresponding fault information for the device Publication 20B UM002C EN P 4 8 Troubleshooting Fault Se Power Loss 3 Io Power Unit 70 Pulse In Loss 92 Pwr Brd Chksum1 104 Pwr Brd Chksum2 105 Replaced MCB PB 107 See Manual 28 Shear Pin 63 9 Software Fault 88 Software Fault 89 SW OverCurrent 36 TorgPrv Spd Band 20 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Description DC bus voltage remained below 85 of nominal for longer than Power Loss Time Enable Disable with Fault Config 1 on page 3 42 One or more of the output transistor
168. ation is based on three parameters Motor NP FLA Motor OL Factor and Motor OL Hertz parameters 042 048 and 047 respectively Motor NP FLA is multiplied by Motor OL Factor to allow the user to define the continuous level of current allowed by the motor thermal overload Motor OL Hertz is used to allow the user to adjust the frequency below which the motor overload is derated The motor can operate up to 102 of FLA continuously If the drive was just activated it will run at 15096 of FLA for 180 seconds If the motor had been operating at 100 for over 30 minutes the drive will run at 150 of FLA for 60 seconds These values assume the drive is operating above Motor OL Hertz and that Motor OL Factor is set to 1 00 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 15 Operation below 100 current causes the temperature calculation to account for motor cooling Motor Overload Curve 100000 Cold Hot 10000 1000 Trip Time Sec Ss S 10 100 125 150 175 200 205 250 Full Load Amps Motor OL Hertz defines the frequency where motor overload capacity derate should begin The motor overload capacity is reduced when operating below Motor OL Hertz For all settings of Motor OL Hertz other than zero the overload capacity is reduced to 70 at an output frequency of zero Changing Overload Hz 120 OLHz 10 100 OL Hz 25 80 OL Hz 50 EN o Co
169. aye eu eyejduioo si df HEIS ueuw senjeA Eufug Ju 0 sa UA eJe senje eseu uonesado dN eg Jedojd 10 senje 1ejeurejed urea jipou Aew aaup y seinpeooud Burun pue sysa oo Buung s nd no Bojeuy SeouaJojoyg paads Ou reuBid On Seul due 40J 229g pue uoijoailg Aug 81M Ca Z 18980 1899 one BNOS pue poyjayy 10u09 gea epojy doe Sie ainByuog anbioy aziwdo ainbyuog dung 4a uz dN 1010W 19 u3 101 u09 enbioj peeds Sau dwey pue ejeq 1010W ed L duing We wg euog Kejdsig sse20id uuejy anbiol S1S91 10101 O i dois ueis eeg dung 1 saoualajay paedg 40J 8jeog pue one Bonos anbyuog seui dure 10u09 uoljoeiq uojeliq Aen 18980 1299 Dou pue peedg pue epojy doe eeg Jouog 100W wxg IZ xejy uljy 18S enbuoj ziundo AN 1010W au seunBijuo euog Buaod biol enbioj peeds 3 Buyoig bio seu dwey EIER S Syur peads q ISS 10101N pue ejeq 1010 104 u09 1010 a alyjoag pdsjso sduind II3M IIO 5 euog loid d Old p g z 9Nold bio aoid pds sod uonoejog S 77 ge yes Bu Le say ojny se yons N uogeajddy oyoedg SMANO Dopeuy E N D up Ou jeu amp ig 24 saqualajay peedg Saul dwey g Toun Cam 2 40J 9jeog pue J04uo uojoelig uonpeiig A oeren poule poujep Ou one BNOS pue Good pue apoy doe per IER E a re al og uoneoiddy eunBijuoz aunByuo9 Ap 199 enbioj eziudo dN 1010W 46 u3 sainByuog page 101 u09 soul dwey ypajas On doyspieis enbio j peeds syw pe
170. below 6 Hz 152 Droop RPM FLA Default 0 0 RPM Selects amount of droop that the speed Min Max 0 0 200 0 RPM reference is reduced when at full load Units 0 1 RPM torque Zero disables the droop function Important Selecting Slip Comp with parameter 080 in conjunction with parameter 152 may produce undesirable results 153 Regen Power Limit Default 50 0 053 Sets the maximum power limit allowed to Min Max 800 0 0 0 transfer from the motor to the DC bus Units 0 1 When using an external dynamic brake set this parameter to its maximum value 154 Current Rate Limit Default 400 0 053 Sets the largest allowable rate of change Min Max 1 0 800 0 for the current reference signal This Units 0 1 number is scaled in percent of maximum motor current every 250 microseconds Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 28 Programming and Parameters mo o Parameter Name amp Description s it See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 145 DB While Stopped Default 0 Disabled 161 9 Enables disables dynamic brake Options 0 Disabled Le operation when drive is stopped DB may 1 Enabled operate if input voltage becomes too high Disabled DB will only operate when drive is running Enable DB may operate whenever drive is energized 155 Stop Mode A Default 1 Ramp 157 156 Stop Mode B Default 0 Coast 158 Active stop mode Stop Mode All
171. bility of the user to determine compliance to the EMC directive i Comm Slot Code Version B BACnet ControlNet Coax DeviceNet EtherNet IP Vector Control Option utilizes DPI Only I Feedback Code Type 0 None 1 Encoder 12V 5V m Future Use n Special Firmware Code Type AD 60 Hz Maximum Remote I O RS485 DF1 z o moo None AE gt Cascading Fan Pump Control gt Must be used with Vector Control option C or D Position k Positions m n are only required when custom firmware is supplied Chapter 1 Installation Wiring This chapter provides information on mounting and wiring the PowerFlex 700 Drive Frames 0 6 For information on Seepage Forinformation on See page Opening the Cover 1 1 Disconnecting MOVs and 1 14 Mounting Considerations 1 2 Common Mode Capacitors AC Supply Source Considerations 1 2 UO Wiring 1 17 General Grounding Requirements 1 4 Reference Control 1 24 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 1 5 Auto Manual Examples 1 25 Power Wiring 1 5 Lifting Torque Proving 1 26 EMC Instructions 1 27 Most start up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring Every precaution must be taken to assure that the wiring is done as instructed All items must be read and understood before the actual installation begins installation The Allen Bradley Company cannot
172. blication 20B UM002C EN P D 6 Instructions for ATEX Approved Drives with ATEX Approved Motors 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Close Digital Input 6 The drive should not start but the HIM OIM should indicate that the drive is Stopped Important The drive should not start when closing Digital Input 6 even if a maintained start command is present and had not been removed when the drive stopped Provide the command to restart the drive In the case of a maintained start remove and reapply the start command In either case the drive should run normally With the motor running open Digital Input 5 The drive should stop and the motor coast to rest The HIM OIM should indicate that the drive is in an Auxiliary Input fault condition Close Digital Input 5 The drive should not start and the HIM OIM will continue to indicate an Auxiliary Input fault condition Provide the command to restart the drive In the case of a maintained start remove and reapply the start command In either case the drive should remain stopped and in a fault condition Provide a Fault Reset command to the drive The drive fault should clear The drive should not start even if a maintained start is applied when the fault is reset Provide the command to restart the drive In the case of a maintained start remove and reapply the start command In either case the drive should run normally Stop the drive and
173. c for DPI ports Changes to this parameter only become effective when power is cycled the drive is reset or bit 15 of Write Mask Ach transitions from 1 to 0 COMMUNICATIONS E E SRS eo S SES Ka Q Q Q 9q S x ixi xix xix x x x ix 1 1 1 1 1 x do NUM Prts 14 18 1211109 8 7 6 54 3210 vid od Bit Factory Default Bit Values 597 Write Mask Act Read Only Status of write access for DPI ports When bit 15 is set network security is controlling the write mask instead of Write Mask Cfg Zoe Ze Zo rn S SPSS S 9 QS A 3 SSSAAA 0 x xixixix x x xix 1 1 1 1 1 x ree P pis 1413 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 y Rosorved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Publication 20B UM002C EN P Related Programming and Parameters 3 51 o a eo E d Parameter Name amp Description Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values tc 276 Logic Mask 288 etermines which ports can control the drive If the bit for a port is set to 0 the Determi hich port trol the drive If the bit for a port is set to 0 th us port will have no co
174. cale In Value 3 45 Scale Out Hi 3 45 Scale Out Lo 3 45 Scale Out Value 3 45 Shear Pin Time 3 33 Skip Freq Band 3 18 Skip Frequency x 3 18 CDU CU UU 0 0 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Sleep Level 3 32 Sleep Time 3 32 Sleep Wake Mode 3 31 Sleep Wake Ref 3 32 Slip Comp Gain 3 21 Slip RPM FLA 3 21 Slip RPM Meter 3 21 Spd Fdbk No Filt 3 8 SpdBand Integrat 3 60 Speed Desired BW 3 25 Speed Dev Band 3 60 Speed Feedback 3 8 Speed Loop Meter 3 26 Speed Ref A Hi 3 19 Speed Ref A Lo 3 19 Speed Ref A Sel 3 19 Speed Ref B Hi 3 19 Speed Ref B Lo 3 19 Speed Ref B Sel 3 19 Speed Ref Source 3 39 Speed Reference 3 8 Speed Units 3 16 Speed Torque Mod 3 18 Start At PowerUp 3 30 Start Inhibits 3 39 Start Mask 3 47 Start Owner 3 48 Start Acc Boost 3 14 Status 1 Fault 3 41 Status 2 Fault 3 41 Step x AccelTime 3 68 Step x Batch 3 70 Step x DecelTime 3 69 Step x Dwell 3 70 Step x Next 3 71 Step x Type 3 67 Step x Value 3 69 Step x Velocity 3 68 Stop Mode x 3 28 Stop Owner 3 48 SV Boost Filter 3 11 TB Man Ref Hi 3 20 TB Man Ref Lo 3 20 TB Man Ref Sel 3 20 Testpoint x Data 3 42 Testpoint x Sel 3 42 Torq Prove Sts 3 61 Torq Ref A Div 3 13 TorgAlarm Action 3 61 TorgAlarm Dwell 3 61 TorgAlarm Level 3 61 TorgAlrm Timeout 3 61 TorgAlrm TO Act 3 62 TorqLim SlewRate 3 60 TorqProve Cnfg 3 59 TorqProve Setup 3 60 Torque Current 3 7 Torque Ref B Mult 3 13 T
175. cation requirements The interval must be determined by the requirements of the application but not be greater than one year In addition to any requirements to check the integrity of the over temperature device s and the wiring of the over temperature contact closure to the drive terminals the drive circuitry itself requires testing This must be done during a maintenance period when the motor environment is not hazardous and all necessary precautions have been taken to repeatedly start and stop the drive and motor safely following procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing i ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the Publication 20B UM002C EN P Instructions for ATEX Approved Drives with ATEX Approved Motors D 5 Preparation 1 Disconnect all power from the drive including control power if supplied 2 Disconnect the motor from the driven load if necessary to run this test 3 Disconnect the motor over temperature contact connections from
176. cified Sleep Level When Sleep Wake is enabled for Invert mode the drive will start wake when an analog signal is less than or equal to the user specified Wake Level and stop the drive when an analog signal is greater than or equal to the user specified Sleep Level Definitions e Wake A start command generated when the analog input value remains above Wake Level or below when Invert mode is active for a time greater than Wake Time e Sleep A Stop command generated when the analog input value remains below Sleep Level or above when Invert mode is active for a time greater than Sleep Time e Speed Reference The active speed command to the drive as selected by drive logic and Speed Ref x Sel e Start Command A command generated by pressing the Start button on the HIM closing a digital input programmed for Start Run Run Forward or Run Reverse Refer to Figure C 17 1 Invert mode is only available with Vector firmware 3 xxx and later Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 35 Figure C 17 Sleep Wake Mode Is Sleep Wake Working Have these conditions been met Sleep Wake Ref must be set to the analog input that will control Start Stop functions Meet all Conditions Sleep Wake Mode must 1 Direct Enable or 2 Invert Enable Sleep Level must be less than Wake Level in Direct mode or greater than Wake Level in Invert mode Speed Ref
177. cks Scalei 2 n Val 476 482 Scalet 2 In Lo 478 484 Scalei 2OutLo 480 486 Scale3 4 In Val 488 494 Scale3 4 In Lo 490 496 Scale3 4 OutLo 492 488 Scalet 2 In Hi 477 483 Scalei 2 Out H 479 485 Scale1 2 Out Val 481 487 Scale3 4 In Hi 489 495 Scale3 4 Out Hi 491 497 Scale3 4 Out Val 493 499 Communication Comm Control DPI Baud Rate 270 Drive Ramp Rslt 273 DPI Ref Select 298 Drive Logic Rslt 271 DPI Port Sel 274 DPI Fdbk Select 299 Drive Ref Rslt 272 DPI Port Value 275 Masks amp Logic Mask 276 Fault Clr Mask 283 Reference Owner 292 Owners Start Mask 277 MOP Mask 284 Accel Owner 293 Jog Mask 278 Local Mask 285 Decel Owner 294 Direction Mask 279 Stop Owner 288 Fault Cr Owner 295 Reference Mask 280 Start Owner 289 MOP Owner 296 Accel Mask 281 Jog Owner 290 Local Owner 297 Decel Mask 282 Direction Owner 291 Datalinks Data In A1 D2 300 307 Data OutA1 D2 310 317 Security Port Mask Act 595 Write Mask Act 597 Logic Mask Act 598 Write Mask Cfg 596 Logic Mask 276 Inputs amp Analog Inputs Anlg In Config 320 Analog In1 2 Hi 322 325 Analog Int 2 Loss 324 327 Outputs Anlg In Sqr Root 321 Analog Int 3 Lo 323 326 Analog Outputs Anlg Out Config 340 Analog Out 2 Hi 343 346 Anlg Out1 2 Scale 354 355 Anlg Out Absolut 341 Analog Out 2Lo 344 347 Anlgi Out Geint 377 378 Analog Out 2 Sel 342 345 Digital Inputs Digital In1 6 Sel 361 366 Digital Outputs Digital Out Gel 380 384 388 Dig Out OffTime383 387 391 Dig Out Param 393 D
178. cs 0 1 Condition True 0 Condition False 0 x Reserved 1 Condition True 910 9 0 Condition False x Reserved XIX X EIX I XI X XIX X X PS 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Related IK IND IK Bit Group File No Diagnostics 213 214 215 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Speed Ref Source Default Read Only Displays the source of the speed Options 0 Pl Output reference to the drive 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 3 6 Reserved 7 Pulse In 8 Encoder 9 MOP Level 10 Jog Speed 1 11 17 Preset Spd1 7 1822 DPI Port 1 5 23 Reserved 24 Autotune 25 Jog Speed 2 2629 Scale Block 1 4 30 Pos Spd Prof 31 Position Reg 32 Micro Pos 33 Homing 34 Decel Switch 35 End Switch 36 Unipolar Lim 37 Rev Dis Lim 38 Max Spd Lim 39 Min Spd Lim 40 Rev Spd Lim 41 Load Trq Lim Start Inhibits Read Only Displays the inputs currently preventing the drive from starting 1 Inhibit True Oz Inhibit False x Reserved A Ex m Bit Description Fast Brake bit 7 Either a digital input i
179. d Do not use cable with an insulation thickness less than or equal to 15 mils 0 4mm 0 015 in Use Copper wire only Wire gauge requirements and recommendations are based on 75 C Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire Unshielded THHN THWN or similar wire is acceptable for drive installation in dry environments provided adequate free air space and or conduit fill rates limits are provided Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wet areas Any wire chosen must have a minimum insulation thickness of 15 Mils and should not have large variations in insulation concentricity Shielded Armored Cable Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi conductor cable with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise generated by a typical AC Drive Strong consideration for shielded cable should be given in installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales capacitive proximity switches and other Publication 20B UM002C EN P 1 6 Location Standard Option 1 Installation Wiring devices that may be affected by electrical noise in the distribution system Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar location imposed EMC regulations or a high degree of communications networking are also good candidates for shielded cable Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearing currents for some applications In addition the inc
180. d the drive continues at its present velocity or position until the dwell time expires At that point the next step is executed Not applicable for blend type moves Step 1 Batch Step 2 Batch Step 3 Batch Step 4 Batch Step 5 Batch Step 6 Batch Step 7 Batch Step 8 Batch Step 9 Batch Step 10 Batch Step 11 Batch Step 12 Batch Step 13 Batch Step 14 Batch Step 15 Batch Step 16 Batch Sets the number of times to run this step 0 continuously run this step Publication 20B UM002C EN P Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Related 10 0 Based on Step x Type 0 01 Secs If Step x Type Param Level units are the same as the parameter number specified in Step x Value 1 0 1000000 1 Programming and Parameters 3 71 Kal 5 Parameter Name amp Description Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 727 Step 1 Next Default 2 737 Step 2 Next Min Max 1 16 747 Step 3 Next 757 Step 4 Next 767 Step 5 Next 777 Step 6 Next 787 Step 7 Next 797 Step 8 Next 807 Step 9 Next 817 Step 10 Next 827 Step 11 Next 837 Step 12 Next 847 Step 13 Next 857 Step 14 Next 867 Step 15 Next 877 Step 16 Next Sets the step number to execute after this step is complete including Step x Batch Units 1 Lu EE oi SR 44 OQ oa 2 fay o 5 2 ob M o Lef
181. d delay time in Min Max 0 0 10800 0 Secs seconds before a start command is Units 0 1 Secs accepted after a power up 168 Start At PowerUp Default 0 Disabled Enables disables a feature to issue a Options 0 Disabled Start or Run command and automatically 1 Enabled o resume running at commanded speed after drive input power is restored Requires a digital input configured for Run or Start and a valid start contact ATTENTION Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do not use this function without considering applicable local national and international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines 169 Flying Start En Default 0 Disabled 170 o Enables disables the function which Options 0 Disabled eo EE uj 3 reconnects to a spinning motor at actual 1 Enabled RPM when a start command is issued 5 Not required in FVC Vector mode when d using an encoder 170 Flying StartGain Default 4000 169 Sets the response of the flying start Min Max 20 32767 function Units 1 Important Lower gain may be required for permanent magnet motors 174 Auto Rstrt Tries Default 0 175 Sets the maximum number of times the Min Max 0 9 drive attempts to reset a fault and restart Units 1 ATTENTION Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do Not
182. der Terminal Designations No Description refer to page A 4 for encoder specifications See Detail in 8 12V 0 DC Power Internal power source Figure 1 6 7 12V DC Return Common 250 mA 6 Encoder Z NOT Pulse marker or registration 5 Encoder Z input 4 Encoder B NOT Quadrature B input 3 Encoder B 2 Encoder A NOT Single channel or 1 Encoder A quadrature A input 1 Jumper selectable 5 12V is available on 20B ENC 1 Encoder Boards 2 Z channel can be used as a pulse input while A amp B are used for encoder Figure 1 8 Encoder Board Jumper Settings J3 EE J3 12V 5V J F Output Config DOO DOO o 5 12V 5 12V 20B ENC 2 20B ENC 1 Series B Figure 1 9 Sample Encoder Wiring 1 0 Connection Example 1 0 Connection Example Encoder E Encoder Power e 8 Power Internal slon External Drive Power 5 OT waat ni Power Internal drive 4 Source E 12V DC de id 250mA ue Encoder Heen 3 Encoder rz esp Signal E Jeune Signal ef 6 Single Ended 2 Safe Differential A zi Dual Channel lome ii h Dual lome Lu sek Channel eiebut A a o ANOT H 2 ANOT T 1 O H 2 1 O mF 1 SHLD connection is on drive chassis see Figure 1 3 on page 1 11 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Installation Wiring 1 21 Hardware Enable Circuitry Vector Control Option Only By default the user can program a digital input as an Enable input The status of this input is interpreted by drive softwa
183. div shielded 152 to 259 m Power 87900 0 750 mm 18AWG 500 to 850 ft Cor ined 9773 97749 0 750 mm 18AWG indiv shielded pair 1 9780 is 3 individually shielded pairs 2 channel power If 3 channel is required use 9728 Hl 8790 is 1 shielded pair 3 9892 is 3 individually shielded pairs 3 channel 0 33 mm 22 AWG 1 shielded pair 0 5 mm 20 AWG for power Hl 9773is3 individually shielded pairs 2 channel power If 3 channel is required use 9774 5 If the wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits the use of shielded wire may not be necessary but is always recommended Publication 20B UM002C EN P 1 18 Installation Wiring Table 1 G Recommended Control Wire for Digital UO Minimum Type Wire Type s Description Insulation Rating Unshielded Per US NEC or applicable national 300V or local code 60 degrees C Shielded Multi conductor shielded cable 0 750 mm 18AWG 3 140 degrees F such as Belden 8770 or equiv conductor shielded The I O Control Cassette Figure 1 6 shows the I O Control Cassette and terminal block locations The cassette provides a mounting point for the various PowerFlex 700 I O options To remove the cassette follow the steps below Cassette removal will be similar for all frames Frame 0 drive shown Step Description amp Disconnect the two cable connectors shown in Figure 1 6 B Loosen the tw
184. e amp Limits 080 081 082 Programming and Parameters 3 17 Uo Parameter Name amp Description s See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Feedback Select Default 0 Open Loop 412 Selects the source for motor speed Options 0 Open Loop 152 feedback Note that all selections are 1 Slip Comp available when using Process PI 2 Reserved Open Loop 0 no encoder is present 3 Encoder and slip compensation is not needed 4 Reserved Slip Comp 1 tight speed control is 5 Simulator needed and encoder is not present Encoder 3 an encoder is present Simulator 5 Simulates a motor for testing drive operation amp interface check Minimum Speed Default 0 0 079 Sets the low limit for speed reference Min Max 0 0 Maximum Speed after scaling is applied Refer to Units 0 1 Hz 095 parameter 083 Overspeed Limit 0 1 RPM Sg Maximum Speed Default 50 0 or 60 0 Hz volt class 055 Sets the high limit for speed reference Motor NP RPM after scaling is applied Refer to Min Max 5 0 400 0 Hz 091 parameter 083 Overspeed Limit 75 0 24000 0 RPM boo D 094 Units 0 1Hz 202 0 1 RPM m Overspeed Limit Default 10 0 Hz 055 Sets the incremental amount of the 300 0 RPM output frequency above Maximum Min Max 0 0 20 0 Hz Au Speed allowable for functions such as 0 0 600 0 RPM slip compensation Units 0 1Hz o Maximum Speed Overspeed Limit
185. e Lengths 1 7 Motor Cntl Sel 3 10 Motor Control File 3 9 Motor Control Technology C 12 Motor Data Group 3 9 Motor Fdbk Type 3 15 Motor NP FLA 3 9 Motor NP Hertz 3 9 Motor NP Power 3 9 Motor NP RPM 3 9 Motor NP Volts 3 9 Motor OL Count 3 40 Motor OL Factor 3 10 Motor OL Hertz 3 10 Motor Overload C 14 Motor Overload Fault 4 6 Motor Overload Memory Retention C 16 Motor Poles 3 10 Motor Sheave 3 62 Motor Thermistor Alarm 4 11 Motor Thermistor Fault 4 6 Motor Type 3 9 Motor Type Cflct Alarm 4 11 Mounting Clearances 1 2 Orientation 1 2 Mounting Dimensions A 20 MOVs 1 14 Mtr OL Trip Time 3 40 Mtr Tor Cur Ref 3 14 N Neg Torque Limit 3 14 NET LED 4 2 Index 7 Non Resettable 4 1 Notch Filter K 3 15 Notch FilterFreq 3 15 NP Hz Conflict Alarm 4 12 NVS I O Checksum Fault 4 6 NVS I O Failure Fault 4 7 O OilWell Pump Sel 3 62 Opening the Cover 1 1 Operating Modes 1 24 Operating Temperature 1 2 Operator Interface B 5 Output Contactor Start Stop 1 13 Output Current 3 7 Output Devices Cable Terminators A 9 Common Mode Cores A 9 Contactors 1 13 A 9 Output Freq 3 7 Output PhaseLoss Fault 4 7 Output Power 3 7 Output Powr Fctr 3 7 Output Voltage 3 7 Overspeed C 16 Overspeed Limit 3 17 OverSpeed Limit Fault 4 7 OverVoltage Fault 4 7 P Param Access Lvl 3 35 Parameter Changing Editing B 5 Descriptions 3 1 File Group Parameter Organization 3 3 Linear List
186. e Name Set 1 Input Voltage L 2 Motr Data Ramp Detailed 3 Motor Tests ES Applications 4 Speed Limits Make a Selection More Info 5 Speed Trq Cntl Abort GC Identity 6 Strt Stop I O Backup hange Password 7 Done Exit Resume e User Dspy Lines Start Up Menu User Dspy Time gt More Info aY User Dspy Video Torq Prove Done Exit must be Reset User Dspy Pos Speed Profile selected to save Contrast Oil Well Pumps any changes Press GE to move 1 level back in the menu structure Press YE ES to select how to view parameters Publication 20B UM002C EN P BA HIM Overview Diagnostics Menu When a fault trips the drive use this menu to access detailed data about the drive Option Description Alarms View alarm queue and clear alarms Faults View fault queue or fault information clear faults or reset drive Status Info View parameters that display status information about the drive Device Version View the firmware version and hardware series of components HIM Version View the firmware version and hardware series of the HIM Parameter Menu Refer to Viewing and Editing Parameters on page B 5 The drive is initially set to Basic Parameter View To view all parameters set parameter 196 Param Access Lvl to option 1 Advanced To view Engineering parameters refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM002 for details select option 2 Reserved Parameter 196 is not affected by t
187. e active Options 0 Coast 159 unless Stop Mode B is selected by 1 Ramp inputs 2 Ramp to Hold o 1 When using options 1 2 or 4 refer to 3 DC Brake i the Attention statements at DC Brake 4 Fast Brake 1 Level 157 DC Brake Lvi Sel Default 0 DC Brake Lvl 155 Selects the source for DC Brake Level Options 0 DC Brake Lv 1 Analog In 1 159 2 Analog In 2 2 158 DC Brake Level Default Rated Amps o 3 Defines the DC brake current level Min Max O Rated Amps x 1 5 o injected into the motor when DC Brake Equation yields E is selected as a stop mode This also approximate maximum sets the braking current level when Fast value Stop is selected Units 0 1 Amps The DC braking voltage used in this function is created by a PWM algorithm and may not generate the smooth holding force needed for some applications Refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual ATTENTION If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used ATTENTION This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors Motors may be demagnetized during braking 159 DC Brake Time Default 0 0 Secs 155 Sets the amount of time DC brake current Min Max 0 0 90 0 Secs Hh is injected into the motor Not used for Units 0 1 Secs Em Ramp to Hold which will apply DC o braking continuously See page C 39 160 Bus
188. e drive The drive fault should clear but the drive should not restart Provide the command to restart the drive The drive should run normally Stop the drive and disconnect all power including external control power Remove the test mechanism reconnect original wires and verify all wiring Reconnect the motor to the load if it had been previously disconnected Check for proper operation Publication 20B UM002C EN P D 8 Instructions for ATEX Approved Drives with ATEX Approved Motors Notes Publication 20B UM002C EN P A AC Input Circuit Breakers A 9 Ground 1 4 Line Fuses A 9 AC Supply Resistive Grounded 1 3 Source 1 2 Unbalanced 1 3 Ungrounded 1 3 Accel Mask 3 48 Accel Owner 3 49 Accel Time x 3 26 Access Panel Removal 1 7 Adj Volt AccTime 3 64 Adj Volt Command 3 63 Adj Volt DecTime 3 64 Adj Volt Phase 3 63 Adj Volt Preset 3 63 Adj Volt Ref Hi 3 63 Adj Volt Ref Lo 3 63 Adj Volt S Curve 3 65 Adj Volt Select 3 63 Adj Volt Trim 96 3 64 Adj Volt Trim Hi 3 64 Adj Volt Trim Lo 3 64 Adj Volt TrimSel 3 64 Adjust Voltage Group 3 63 Adjustable Voltage Operation C 1 AdjVoltRef Cflct Alarm 4 10 Agency Certification A 1 Alarm amp Fault Types 4 1 Alarm 1 Fault 3 41 Alarm 2 Fault 3 42 Alarm Clear 3 44 Alarm Config 1 3 44 Alarm Descriptions 4 10 Alarm x Code 3 44 Alarms AdjVoltRef Cflct 4 10 Analog In Loss 4 10 Bipolar Conflict 4 10 Brake Slipped 4 10 Decel Inhibt 4 1
189. e impedance to limit 2 inrush current when the power line recovers The input impedance should be equal to or greater than the equivalent of a 5 e transformer with a VA rating 5 times the drives input VA rating o M I I LLLLLLLLLIIBLLIIITIIIHZ IS A LL a 187 Load Loss Level Default 200 096 Zia Sets the percentage of motor nameplate Min Max 0 0 800 0 259 torque absolute value at which a load Units 0 196 loss alarm will occur 188 Load Loss Time Default 0 0 Secs 187 Sets the time that current is below the Min Max 0 0 300 0 Secs level set in Load Loss Level before a Units 0 1 Secs fault occurs 189 Shear Pin Time Default 0 0 Secs 238 Sets the time that the drive is at or above Min Max 0 0 30 0 Secs current limit before a fault occurs Zero Units 0 1 Secs disables this feature Utility File rr mo a eo S Parameter Name amp Description amp o See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 190 Direction Mode Default 0 Unipolar 320 9 9 Selects method for changing direction Options 0 Unipolar thru e R pi 1 327 c Mode Direction Change 1 Bipolar e f 361 z Unipolar Drive Logic 2 Reverse Dis thru 2 Bipolar Sign of Reference a Reverse Dis Not Changeable 366 Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 34 HIM Ref Config Programming and Parameters No 192 193 194 195 Parameter Name amp Description See p
190. eAup paysajoidun jo uerquie or S Hues einjejeduie juerquie xurs yeay junoui eBuej vsdl z ed L IN Uonel ejsui uoee 10 uesouo eq snw ezis DEZ OFAN SN Aq Buyer ejqewoje wnwixeyy Aen Kew 10 99 01d 1010 WOP upang eui jo sunei giy eur dui JOU JM Suen y yeu eDuei nu eui 0 es du jueuno eu eveu pinoys eBue jueuno ejqersn pe YIM WOH upang WNWIXeW ase umous Sugey v14 10101 Jo GZI SI ezis WNWIUIW JIN SN 104 Jexeeiq YN du snoeuejuejsul 10129 01d 1212 JOJO Unulixeui eje umous sBurjeg v 13 1010UJ JO GZI SI ezis WNWIUIW OFAN SN 104 Jeyeeug eur esieAui Jexeeig WO Unuiixeul are umous SURRY v14 1010W Jo GZI SI ezis WNWIUIW JIN SN 104 uonoeyoud eAup seiiddns jeu 049p payer zs yfiy y SI ezis eoiep uonoejoJd uinuuixejy Buiddi eouesinu noui uonoejod wnwxew seiddns yey eowep payed Samo eu S ezis eoiwep uonoejoid un ci 21 LL o1 6 8 9 s p 2 1 SejoN 00t DCL osz OSL 8 amp 2 BAL 6LL ZEL SLL 60S Z DEL 2 Dk GIL 00 S L ele DCL evt SOL gel g 0S 4 2b 9 cvi380c 2 z GLE Sel 002 Sel 961 Lvl 86 ELL Z6 80S z 06 2 00v DCL 0S DL BIL EL GLL ZEL StL g 0S 4 OLL 9 6rrdaoc Zz GLE GLE 001 00c 001 Or cl c8 vv6 064 ek Zi GL ep GLE GLE Scl 00c Scl pna 804 86 ELL Z v6 6 0t 4 06 9 8604802 See Sec 08 Sel 08 DCL 06 09 689
191. ection is performed regardless of the setting of Bit 12 of Fault Config 1 parameter 238 If the drive passes all tests the brake will be released and the drive will take control of the load after the programmed time in Brk Release Time parameter 604 which is the typical mechanical release time of the brake Brake Proving When the drive receives a stop command to end a lifting operation the following actions occur 1 The brake is commanded closed when the speed of the motor reaches zero After the time period programmed in Brk Set Time parameter 607 the drive will verify if the brake is capable of holding torque It will do this by ramping the torque down at a rate set in TorqLim SlewRate parameter 608 Note that the drive can be started again at anytime without waiting for either of the above timers to finish While the torque is ramping down the drive will perform a brake slip test If movement exceeds the limit set in BrkSlip Count parameter 609 then an alarm is set 32 Brake Slipped and the drive will start a brake slip procedure The drive will allow the motor to travel the distance programmed Brk Alarm Travel parameter 610 Another slip test will be performed and will repeat continuously until A the load stops slipping or B the load reaches the ground This feature keeps control of the load and returns it to the ground in a controlled manner in the event of a mechanical brake failure Once a Brake S
192. ed are the recommended sizes based on 40 degree C and the U S N E C Other country state or local codes may require different ratings Fusing If fuses are chosen as the desired protection method refer to the recommended types listed below If available amp ratings do not match the tables provided the closest fuse rating that exceeds the drive rating should be chosen e JEC BS88 British Standard Parts 1 amp 2 EN60269 1 Parts 1 amp 2 type gG or equivalent should be used e UL UL Class CC T RK1 or J should be used Circuit Breakers The non fuse listings in the following tables include both circuit breakers inverse time or instantaneous trip and 140M Self Protecting Motor Starters If one of these is chosen as the desired protection method the following requirements apply e EC and UL Both types of devices are acceptable for IEC and UL installations 1 Typical designations include but may not be limited to the following Parts 1 amp 2 AC AD BC BD CD DD ED EFS EF FF FG GF GG GH Publication 20B UM002C EN P Supplemental Drive Information A 10 i 00t 009 009 Gee 06v Gee Oly SOE S02 CL 661 06 Zi GL Cu E 2 E 00v 084 064 00 SZS 00 06 98c 09c 616 ES Sy H 001 9 09c880c a e ei osz 00s 00S Gee ose Sec 80 990 ZZ F09 19L 0G y 09 x
193. eds Steet 1010 pue ejeq 010 101002 1010 uonoejes out 4900 WEIS enunuo dr ueis nx 8uog ES Publication 20B UM002C EN P Running S M A R T Start During a Start Up the majority of applications require changes to only a few parameters The LCD HIM on a PowerFlex 700 drive offers S M A R T start which displays the most commonly changed parameters With these parameters you can set the following functions S Start Mode and Stop Mode M Minimum and Maximum Speed A Accel Time 1 and Decel Time 1 R Reference Source T Thermal Motor Overload To run a S M A R T start routine Step 1 Press ALT and then Esc S M A R T The SMART start screen appears 2 View and change parameter values as desired For HIM information see Appendix B 3 Press Esc to exit the S M A R T start Key s Running an Assisted Start Up Start Up 2 5 Example LCD Displays F gt Stopped auto SMART List Digital In2 Sel Stop Mode A Minimum Speed Important This start up routine requires an LCD HIM The Assisted start up routine asks simple yes no or enter data questions Access Assisted Start Up by selecting Start Up from the Main Menu To perform an Assisted Start Up Step 1 In the Main Menu press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll to Start Up 2 Press Enter Key s Example LCD Displays F Stopped Auto Hz
194. efault Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Programming and Parameters Motor NP Volts x 0 25 0 0 Motor NP Volts 0 1 VAC Motor NP Hz x 0 25 0 0 Maximum Freq 0 1 Hz 0 Quadrature Quadrature Quad Check Single Chan Single Check ono 1024 PPR 2 20000 PPR 1 PPR Read Only 2147483647 1 Read Only 420 0 Hz 25200 0 RPM 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM None None Light 2 Heavy zb E o 0 0 Hz 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 3 Hz 0 1 0 9 Hz 0 1 Hz 3 15 Related I gt o1 Io o Ei IND o CO Ca KE CH a o Ei Ico o CO Ino o SA Co Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 16 Programming and Parameters o e Parameter Name amp Description S Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values oc 421 Marker Pulse Default Read Only Latches the raw encoder count at each Min Max 2147483647 marker pulse Units 1 422 Pulse In Scale Default 64 9 Sets the scale factor gain for the Pulse Min Max 2 20000 Input when P423 is set to Pulse Input Units 1 Calculate for the desired speed command as follows for Hz Pulse In Scale Input Pulse Rate Hz Desired Cmd Hz for RPM Pulse In Scale Input Pulse Rate Hz 120 Desired Cmd RPM x Motor Poles 4
195. either a coupled or uncoupled load will produce valid result Ready Parameter returns to this setting following a completed inertia tune Inertia Tune A temporary command that initiates an inertia test of the motor load combination The motor will ramp up and down while the drive measures the amount of inertia Za 427 Torque Ref A Sel Default 0 Torque Stpt1 053 z 431 Torque Ref B Sel 24 Disabled J 1 2 Selects the source of the external torque Options 0 Torque Stptt bed SS reference to the drive How this reference 1 Analog In 1 o iy is used is dependent upon Speed 2 Analog In 2 9 2 Torque Mod 3 17 Reserved 1 1822 DPI Port 1 5 See Appendix B for DPI port locations 23 Reserved 24 Disabled 2528 Scale Block1 4 29 Torque Stpt2 428 Torque Ref A Hi Default 100 0 053 432 Torque Ref B Hi 100 0 Scales the upper value of the Torque Ref Min Max 800 0 X Sel selection when the source is an Units 0 1 analog input 429 Torque Ref A Lo Default 0 096 053 433 Torque Ref B Lo 0 0 Scales the lower value of the Torque Ref Min Max 800 0 X Sel selection when the source is an Units 0 196 analog input 430 Torq Ref A Div Default 1 0 053 Defines the value of the divisor for the Min Max 0 1 3276 7 Torque Ref A Sel selection Units 0 1 434 Torque Ref B Mult Default 1 0 053 Defines the value of the multiplier for
196. ependently and directly to this point bar Figure 1 1 Typical Grounding Safety Ground PE This is the safety ground for the drive that is required by code This point must be connected to adjacent building steel girder joist a floor ground rod or bus bar see above Grounding points must comply with national and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes Shield Termination SHLD The Shield terminal see Figure 1 3 on page 1 11 provides a grounding point for the motor cable shield The motor cable shield should be connected to this terminal on the drive drive end and the motor frame motor end A shield terminating cable gland may also be used When shielded cable is used for control and signal wiring the shield should be grounded at the source end only not at the drive end RFI Filter Grounding Using an optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents Therefore the filter must only be used in installations with grounded AC supply systems and be permanently installed and solidly grounded bonded to the building power distribution ground Ensure that the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected bonded to the same building power distribution ground Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection Some local codes may require redundant
197. er to Figure 1 10 on 44 RunFwd Level page 1 24 for details 45 RunRev Level 12 7 Opening an Enable input will cause 46 Run w Comm 12 the motor to coast to stop ignoring any 47 Hold Step 12 programmed Stop modes 48 Redefine Pos 02 8 Dig In ConflictB alarm will occur if a 49 Find Home 12 Start input is prog without a Stop input 50 Home Limit 12 9 Refer to the Sleep Wake Mode 51 Vel Override 12 Attention statement on page 3 31 5256 Pos Sel 1 5 12 continued 57 Prof Input 12 Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 56 Programming and Parameters o Parameter Name amp Description ir See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values g 10 A dedicated hardware enable input is available via a jumper selection Refer to a page 1 21 for further information 11 Only available when Torque Proving function is selected 12 Refer to Option Definitions on page 3 54 A 13 Refer to Dyn UsrSet Sel on page 3 36 for selection information e 379 Dig Out Setpt Sets the digital output value from a communication device a Example oo Set Data In B1 to 379 The first three bits of this value will determine the setting 2 e of Digital Outx Sel which should be set to 30 Param Cnitl 3 en E OS Sy ED KAA a S SS AA 1 Output Energized X XIX X X XIX X X X X X x 0 0 0 Oz Output De energized pis 14 13
198. ero off 2 No further power is supplied to the motor The drive has released control 3 The motor will coast for a time that is dependent on the mechanics of the system inertia friction etc Publication 20B UM002C EN P C 38 Mode Brake to Stop Application Notes Description Output Voltage Output Current Motor Speed Stop B O A Command Le DC Brake Time gt This method uses DC injection of the motor to Stop and or hold the load 1 On Stop 3 phase drive output goes to zero off 2 Drive outputs DC voltage on the last used phase at the level programmed in DC Brake Level Par 158 This voltage causes a stopping brake torque If the voltage is applied for a time that is longer than the actual possible stopping time the remaining time will be used to attempt to hold the motor at zero speed 3 DC voltage to the motor continues for the amount of time programmed in DC Brake Time Par 159 Braking ceases after this time expires 4 After the DC Braking ceases no further power is supplied to the motor The motor may or may not be stopped The drive has released control 5 The motor if rotating will coast from its present speed for a time that is dependent on the mechanics of the system inertia friction etc Ramp Output Voltage Output Current Time stop Zero pc Brake Time gt Command Command Speed This method uses drive output reduc
199. ertia KR during the autotune inertia procedure m Adjusting this parameter will cause the 2 drive to calculate and change Ki Speed m d Loop and Kp Speed Loop gains EH 451 Speed Loop Meter Default Read Only 053 Value of the speed regulator output Min Max 800 0 1 1 or j 2s 4800 0 Hz ZE if Motor Cntl Sel FVC Vector 800 0 RPM Units 0 1 Hz RPM Dynamic Control File o o F Parameter Name amp Description s ir S 2 goe page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values amp 140 Accel Time 1 Default 10 0 Secs 142 141 Accel Time 2 10 0 Secs 143 Sets the rate of accel for all speed Min Max 0 0 3600 0 Secs E increases 0 1 Secs DEN Units Max Speed _ Accel Time Accel Rate a 142 Decel Time 1 Default 10 0 Secs 140 amp 143 Decel Time 2 10 0 Secs 141 nS Sets the rate of decel for all speed Min Max 0 0 3600 0 Secs S E decreases 0 1 Secs m R Max Speed Units X Decel Time Decel Rate 146 S Curve Default 0 140 Sets the percentage of accel or decel Min Max 0 100 n time that is applied to the ramp as S Units 1 Ge Curve Time is added 1 2 at the beginning and 1 2 at the end of the ramp 147 Current Lmt Sel Default 0 Cur Lim Val 146 E Zi 9 Selects the source for the adjustment of Options 0 Cur Lim Val 149 3 current limit i e parameter analog input 1 Analog In 1 3 etc 2 Analog In 2 Pub
200. etailed PowerFlex 700 information Title Publication Available Online at PowerFlex Reference Manual PFLEX RM004 www rockwellautomation com Frame 7 10 Installation Instructions 20B INO14 literature Series A User Manual 20B UMO001 For Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support Title Online at Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support www ab com support abdrives Manual Conventions e In this manual we refer to the PowerFlex 700 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive as drive PowerFlex 700 or PowerFlex 700 Drive e To help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from other text the following conventions will be used Parameter Names will appear in brackets For example DC Bus Voltage Display Text will appear in quotes For example Enabled e The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action Word Meaning Can Possible able to do something Cannot Not possible not able to do something May Permitted allowed Must Unavoidable you must do this Shall Required and necessary Should Recommended Should Not Not recommended Publication 20B UM002C EN P GPP PE Pb Overview P 3 Drive Frame Sizes Similar PowerFlex 700 drive sizes are grouped into frame sizes to simplify spare parts ordering dimensioning etc A cross reference of drive catalog numbers and their respective frame size is provided in Appendix A General Precautio
201. ew Results Parameter 002 Analog Voltage e Configure Input with parameter 320 Input Unipolar Speed Reference 0 to 10V Input e Adjust Scaling Parameters 91 92 and 325 326 e View results Parameter 002 Analog Current Input Unipolar Speed Reference e Configure Input for Current Parameter 320 and add jumper at appropriate terminals 0 20 mA Input e Adjust Scaling Parameters 91 92 and 325 326 e View results Parameter 002 Analog Input PTC Ferrite S e Set Fault Config 1 PTC OT set gt 5V Bead 4 as Parameter 238 bit 7 Enabled PTC OT cleared 4V 18 ma F e Set Alarm Config 1 PTC Short lt 0 2V D Parameter 259 bit 11 Enabled e View Status Drive Alarm 1 2 Parameter 211 bit 11 True Ohm HW PTC Input Ferrite e Set Fault Config 1 PTC OT set gt 5V Bead Parameter 238 bit 13 Enabled PTC OT cleared lt 4V 1 8k 23 e Set Alarm Config 1 PTC Short lt 0 2v Parameter 259 bit 18 Enabled e View Status Drive Alarm 1 Parameter 211 bit 18 True II Refer to the Attention statement on page 1 17 for important bipolar wiring informati
202. f 17 Speed Fdbk 2 18 Pulse In Ref 19 Reserved 20 23 Scale Block1 4 1 24 Param Cnt 25 SpdFb Not 276 Logic Mask 288 Determines which ports can control the drive when Write Mask Act bit 15 is set to 17 If the bit for a port is set to 0 the port will have no control functions except lt COMMUNICATION for stop 2 eo 4 05 V N S SEES S 2 SS SS l 2 IFAFIESERESES ELESESEREDERERERER I eoi Peraited E EE 0 xzReserved z Bit Factory Default Bit Values 277 Start Mask See Logic Mask 288 Gen Controls which adapters can issue start ue commands 297 Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 48 Programming and Parameters mod o 3 a Parameter Name amp Description it Se page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values T 278 Jog Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters can issue jog thru commands 2u 279 Direction Mask See Logic Mask 288 Gen Controls which adapters can issue thru forward reverse direction commands 297 280 Reference Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters can select an thru alternate reference Speed Ref A B Sel 231 or Preset Speed 1 7 281 Accel Mask See Logic Mask 288 thru Controls which adapters can select 297 Accel Time 1 2 282 Decel Mask See Logic
203. f B Hi 133 PI Preload 433 Torque Ref B Lo 140 Accel Time 1 434 Torq Ref B Mult 141 Accel Time 2 435 Torque Setpoint 142 Decel Time 1 436 Pos Torque Limit 143 Decel Time 2 437 Neg Torque Limit 146 S Curve 445 Ki Speed Loop 148 Current Lmt Val 446 Kp Speed Loop 149 Current Lmt Gain 447 Kf Speed Loop 151 PWM Frequency 449 Speed Desired BW 152 Droop RPM FLA 450 Total Inertia 153 Regen Power Limit 454 Rev Speed Limit 154 Current Rate Limit 460 PI Reference Hi 158 DC Brake Level 461 PI Reference Lo Publication 20B UM002C EN P B 8 HIM Overview Removing Installing the HIM The HIM can be removed or installed while the drive is powered Important HIM removal is only permissible in Auto mode If the HIM is removed while in Manual mode or the HIM is the only remaining control device a fault will occur Step Key s Example Displays To remove the HIM 1 Press ALT and then Enter Remove The Q9 e Remove Op Intr c Remove HIM confirmation screen appears Press Enter to Disconnect Op Intrfc 2 Press Enter to confirm that you want to Port 1 Control remove the HIM 3 Remove the HIM from the drive To install HIM 1 Insert into drive or connect cable Publication 20B UM002C EN P Appendix C Application Notes For information on See page For information on See page Adjustable Voltage Operation C 1 Posit
204. factory 148 defaults En gt Important Frames 5 amp 6 the internal lacs 2 fan voltage may have to be changed o when using Option 2 or 3 See Selecting z wi o Nerifying Fan Voltage on page 1 8 amp 198 Load Frm Uer Set Default 0 Ready 199 Loads a previously saved set of Options 0 Ready parameter values from a selected user 1 User Set 1 set location in drive nonvolatile memory 2 User Set 2 to active drive memory 3 User Set 3 199 Save To User Set Default 0 Ready 198 Saves the parameter values in active Options Q Ready drive memory to a user set in drive 1 User Set 1 nonvolatile memory 2 User Set 2 3 User Set 3 200 Reset Meters Default 0 Ready Resets selected meters to zero Options 0 Ready 1 MWh 2 Elapsed Time 201 Language Default 0 Not Selected Selects the display language when using Options 0 Not Selected an LCD HIM This parameter is not 1 English functional with an LED HIM 2 Francais Options 6 8 and 9 are Reserved i iin an e This parameter is not reset when Reset 5 Deutsch to Defaults is selected 7 Portugu s 10 Nederlands Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 36 Programming and Parameters o eo o d Parameter Name amp Description s ic amp Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values oc 202 Voltage Class Default Based on Drive Cat 04
205. g 3 7 92 95 Speed Ref X Lo Speed Reference 3 19 6 Output Voltage Metering 3 7 96 TB Man Ref Sel Speed Reference 3 20 7 Output Power Metering 3 7 97 TB Man Ref Hi Speed Reference 3 20 8 Output PowrFctr Metering 3 7 98 TB Man Ref Lo Speed Reference 3 20 9 Elapsed MWh Metering 3 7 99 Pulse Input Ref Speed Reference 3 20 10 Elapsed Run Time Metering 3 7 100 Jog Speed 1 Discrete Speeds 3 20 11 MOP Reference Metering 37 101 107 Preset Speed 1 7 Discrete Speeds 3 20 12 DC Bus Voltage _ Metering 3 7 108 Jog Speed 2 Discrete Speeds 3 20 13 DC Bus Memory Metering 3 7 116 Trim 96 Setpoint Speed Trim 3 21 14 Elapsed kWh Metering 3 8 117 Trim In Select Speed Trim 3 21 16 Analog Ini Value Metering 3 8 118 Trim Out Select Speed Trim 3 21 17 Analog In2 Value Metering 3 8 119 Trim Hi Speed Trim 3 21 18 PTC HW Value Metering 3 8 120 Trim Lo Speed Trim 3 21 21 Spd Fdbk No Filt Metering 3 8 121 Slip RPM FLA Slip Comp 3 21 22 Ramped Speed Metering 3 8 122 Slip Comp Gain Slip Comp 3 21 23 Speed Reference Metering 3 8 123 Slip RPM Meter Slip Comp 3 21 24 Commanded Torque Metering 3 8 124 PI Configuration Process PI 3 22 25 Speed Feedback Metering 3 8 125 PI Control Process PI 3 22 26 Rated kW Drive Data 3 8 126 PI Reference Sel Process PI 3 22 27 Rated Volts Drive Data 3 8 127 PI Setpoint Process PI 3 23 28 Rated Amps Drive Data 3 8 128 PI Feedback Gel Process PI 3 23 29 Control SW Ver Drive Data 3 9 129 PI Integral Time Pr
206. ge of 440V AC was used then nominal DC bus voltage would be only 594V DC If the drive were to react to the fixed 533V level only 1046 for line loss detect any anomaly might trigger a false line loss detection Line loss therefore always uses the 6 minute average for DC bus voltage and detects line loss based on a fixed percentage of that memory In the same example the average would be 594V DC instead of 650V DC and the fixed percentage 27 for Coast to Stop and 18 for all others would allow identical operation regardless of line voltage The PowerFlex 70 uses only these fixed percentages The PowerFlex 700 can selectively use the same percentages or the user can set a trigger point for line loss detect The adjustable trigger level is set using Power Loss Level see Power Loss Level on page 3 33 Figure C 11 Power Loss Mode Coast Nominal Bus Voltage 73 Motor Speed ie A Power Loss Output Enable Publication 20B UM002C EN P C 28 Application Notes Figure C 12 Power Loss Mode Decel Bus Voltage Nominal 82 Motor Speed i sie IL Power Loss Output Enable Process PID The internal PI function of the PowerFlex 700 provides closed loop process control with proportional and integral control action The function is designed for use in applications that require simple control of a
207. ggn yuoo Id BEES wn BS T Dech DR HI Li fp 8D oaa em e Kee D amnia CED E Car es uenbe 0 nano z li e T Cad i mp pem s eoinog E Ca Ca OK ve aiqeieles qun UPD PPH ES Hoe s 7 Ce D les yoeqp204 id 1 H Io Km E dou welt Cu Ca Cm E Ko wan le COP sess urd d ZS V ma dno k lt ok ji T g 5 T en SL ve s ecinog t 2 Cer teg ien ndino ld ueg q ena se spy Je 19W EH Id Co eg eoueigje Id Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 31 Reverse Speed Limit Figure C 14 Rev Speed Limit parameter 454 set to zero 10V Maximum Speed l l Reverse Forward Speed r Speed l Minimum Speed 0 Maximum i Speed I 10V 10V Maximum i Speed Minimum i 1 Speed z 0 Reverse v Forward Speed ER 1 Speed Minimum iind Speed 0 Speed 10V Figure C 15 Rev Speed Limit parameter 454 set to a non zero Value 10V Reverse Speed Limit Reverse Speed Forward Speed Maximum Speed 10V Publication 20B UM002C EN P C 32 Application Notes Skip Frequency Figure C 16 Skip Frequency Command F Frequency Frequency Drive Output gFrequency A Skip 1 2 Band F F 53 X 44 Skip Frequency gt Time Some machinery may have a resonant operating frequency that must be avoided to minimize the risk of equipment damage To assure that the motor can
208. ground connections The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked Refer to the instructions supplied with the filter Publication 20B UM002C EN P Installation Wiring 1 5 Fuses and Circuit Breakers The PowerFlex 700 can be installed with input fuses or an input circuit breaker National and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes may determine additional requirements for these installations Refer to Appendix A for recommended fuses circuit breakers circuit protection Specifications for the recommended fuse or circuit breaker to provide protection against short circuits are provided in Appendix A ATTENTION The PowerFlex 700 does not provide branch short Power Wiring and local codes outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire types conductor sizes branch circuit protection and disconnect devices Failure to do so may result in personal injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION National Codes and standards NEC VDE BSI etc Cable Types Acceptable for 200 600 Volt Installations A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations For many installations unshielded cable is adequate provided it can be separated from sensitive circuits As an approximate guide allow a spacing of 0 3 meters 1 foot for every 10 meters 32 8 feet of length In all cases long parallel runs must be avoide
209. gs are entered No Name Vale Mee 053 Motor Cntl Sel 4 FVC Vector or 0 Sensrls Vect 080 Feedback Select 1 Slip Comp Encoderless Guidelines You can not hold zero speed in encoderless mode or operate near zero speed because of this it is very important to set Minimum Speed parameter 81 to two or three times the slip frequency when in encoderless mode Example A 1740 RPM motor has 2 Hz of slip Set Minimum Speed to 4 6 Hz Also set Float Tolerance parameter 606 to one to three times the slip frequency when in encoderless mode You should also use fast accel and decel times less than 2 seconds when operating in encoderless mode Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes Installation Wiring When TorqProve Cnfg is set to Enable the Digital Out 1 relay is used to control the external brake contactor The normally open N O contact when closed is intended to energize the contactor This provides the mechanical brake with voltage causing the brake to release Any interruption of power to the contactor will set the mechanical brake Programming Digital Out Sel parameter 380 will be ignored when TorqProve Cnfg is set to Enable Figure C 3 Typical Torque Proving Configuration Brake Set Normally Open Brake Set 115V AC Q Brake Contactor 24V configuration shown see page 1 21 f
210. he Reset to Defaults Option Description Changed Parameters changed for default Device Select Menu Use this menu to access parameters in connected peripheral devices Memory Storage Menu Drive data can be saved to or recalled from User and HIM sets User sets are files stored in permanent nonvolatile drive memory HIM sets are files stored in permanent nonvolatile HIM memory Option Description HIM Copycat Save data to a HIM set load data from a HIM set to active drive Device HIM memory or delete a HIM set Device HIM Device User Sets Save data to a User set load data from a User set to active drive memory or name a User set Reset To Defaults Restore the drive to its factory default settings Start Up Menu See Chapter 2 Publication 20B UM002C EN P HIM Overview Preferences Menu B 5 The HIM and drive have features that you can customize Option Description Drive Identity Add text to identify the drive Change Password Enable disable or modify the password User Dspy Lines Select the display parameter scale and text for the User Display The User Display is two lines of user defined data that appears when the HIM is not being used for programming User Dspy Time Set the wait time for the User Display or enable disable it User Dspy Video Select Reverse or Normal for the Frequency and User Display lines ResetUserDspy Return all the options for the User Display t
211. he derived power DC Bus Disconnects Allen Bradley Bulletin No 1494 30 400A 194 30 400A or ABB OESA 600 amp 800A OESL all Sizes Fuses Bussmann Type JKS all sizes Type 170M Case Sizes 1 2 and 3 or Ferraz Shawmut Type HSJ all sizes For any other devices please contact the factory Drives have dual current ratings one for normal duty applications and one for heavy duty applications The drive may be operated at either rating UL Type 12 IP54 flange mount heat sink ambient temperature rating is 40 C ambient of unprotected drive portion inside enclosure is 55 C The ambient temperature for the UL Type 12 IP54 stand alone drives is 40 Also applies to H voltage class Frame 5 amp 6 NEMA UL Type 12 enclosures codes F amp G are not available in H and J voltage class Also applies to J voltage class Frame 5 amp 6 NEMA UL Tyoe 12 enclosures codes F amp G are not available in H amp J voltage class Must remove top label and vent plate drive enclosure rating will be IP00 NEMA UL Type Open Two 630A Bussmann 170M6608 can also be used Two 700A Bussmann 170M6611 can also be used Publication 20B UM002C EN P A 20 Supplemental Drive Information Dimensions Figure A 3 PowerFlex 700 Frames 0 3 0 Frame Shown stall e A H A 15 0 0 59 gt D gt 5 8 0 23 dia see below gt lt T 2000
212. he drive will output at Break Voltage Refer to parameter 083 Motor Fdbk Type Selects the encoder type single channel or quadrature Options 1 amp 3 detect a loss of encoder signal when using differential inputs regardless of the Feedback Select param 080 setting For FVC Vector mode use a quadrature encoder only option 0 1 If a single channel encoder is used option 2 3 in sensorless vector or V Hz mode select Reverse Dis option 2 in param 190 Encoder PPR Contains the encoder pulses per revolution For improved operation in FVC Vector mode PPR should be gt 64 x motor poles Enc Position Fdbk Displays raw encoder pulse count For single channel encoders this count will increase per rev by the amount in Encoder PPR For quadrature encoders this count will increase by 4 times the amount defined in Encoder PPR Encoder Speed Provides a monitoring point that reflects speed as seen from the feedback device Fdbk Filter Sel Selects the type of feedback filter desired Light uses a 35 49 radian feedback filter Heavy uses a 20 40 radian feedback filter Notch FilterFreq Sets the center frequency for an optional 2 pole notch filter Filter is applied to the torque command 0 disables this filter Notch Filter K Sets the gain for the 2 pole notch filter Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options D
213. hether measured by encoder feedback or estimated Ramped Speed Value of commanded speed after Accel Decel and S Curve are applied Speed Reference Summed value of ramped speed process PI and droop When FVC Vector mode is selected droop will not be added Commanded Torque Final torque reference value after limits and filtering are applied Percent of motor rated torque Speed Feedback Displays the lightly filtered value of the actual motor speed whether measured by encoder feedback or estimated Rated kW Drive power rating Rated Volts The drive input voltage class 208 240 400 etc Rated Amps The drive rated output current Publication 20B UM002C EN P Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Read Only 0 0 429496729 5 kWh 0 1 kWh Read Only 0 000 20 000 mA 10 000V 0 001 mA 0 001 Volt Read Only 5 00 Volts 0 01 Volts Read Only 400 0 Hz 24000 0 RPM 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Read Only 400 0 Hz 24000 0 RPM 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Read Only 400 0 Hz 24000 0 RPM 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Read Only 800 0 0 1 Read Only 400 0
214. ibility EMC Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized European Norm EN standards published in the Official Journal of the European Communities PowerFlex Drives comply with the EN standards listed below when installed according to this User Manual and the Wiring amp Grounding Guidelines Manual CE Declarations of Conformity are available online at http www ab com certification ce docs Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC e ENS50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations EMC Directive 89 336 EEC e EN61800 3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods 1 600V class drives below 77A Frames 0 4 are declared to meet the essential requirements of the Low Voltage Directive It is the responsibility of the user to determine compliance to the EMC directive Publication 20B UM002C EN P 1 28 Installation Wiring General Notes If the adhesive label is removed from the top of the drive the drive must be installed in an enclosure with side openings less than 12 5 mm 0 5 in and top openings less than 1 0 mm 0 04 in to maintain compliance with the LV Directive The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents Use of line filters in ungrounded systems is not recommended PowerFlex drives may cause radio frequency interference if used in a residential or dome
215. ig Out Level 381 385 389 Dig Out Geint 379 Dig Out Mask 394 Dig Out OnTime382 386 390 Dig Out Invert 392 Torq Proving TorqProve Cnfg 600 ZeroSpdFloatTime 605 Brk Alarm Travel 610 TorgProve Setup 601 Float Tolerance 606 MicroPos Scale 611 Spd Dev Band 602 Brk Set Time 607 Torq Prove Sts 612 SpdBand Integrat 603 TorqLim SlewRate 608 Brk Release Time 604 BrkSlip Count 609 Adjust Voltage Adj Volt Phase 650 Min Adj Voltage 661 Adj Volt Trim Lo 671 Adj Volt Select 651 Adj Volt Command 662 Adj Volt Trim 672 Adj Volt Ref Hi 652 MOP Adj VoltRate 663 Adj Volt AccTime 675 Adj Volt Ref Lo 653 Adj Volt TrimSel 669 Adj Volt DecTime 676 Adj Volt Preseti 7 654 660 Adj Volt Trim Hi 670 Adj Volt S Curve 677 Oil Well Pump Max Rod Torque 631 PCP Pump Sheave 637 Gearbox Sheave 643 TorgAlarm Level 632 PCP Rod Torque 638 Gearbox Ratio 644 TorgAlarm Action 633 Min Rod Speed 639 Motor Sheave 645 TorgAlarm Dwell 634 Max Rod Speed 640 Total Gear Ratio 646 TorgAlrm Timeout 635 OilWell Pump Sel 641 DB Resistor 647 TorgAlrm TO Act 636 Gearbox Rating 642 Gearbox Limit 648 Pos Spd Profile ProfSetup Pos Spd Prof Sts 700 Counts Per Unit 708 Pos Reg Filter 718 Status Units Traveled 701 Vel Override 711 Pos Reg Gain 719 Pos Spd Prof Cmd 705 Find Home Speed 713 Encoder Pos Tol 707 Find Home Ramp 714 Profile Step Step x Type Step x DecelTime Step x Batch 1 16 Step x Velocity Step x Value Step x Next Step x AccelTime Step x Dwell Publication 20B UM002C EN P Mon
216. ile Status will be set while the homing routine is running The drive will ramp to the speed and direction set in Find Home Speed at the rate set in Find Home Ramp until the digital input defined as Home Limit is activated The drive will then reverse direction at 1 10 the Find Home Speed to the point where the Home Limit switch activated and stop Figure C 6 shows the sequence of operation for homing to a limit switch with encoder feedback without a marker pulse Encoder Z Chan must be set to Pulse Input or Pulse Check Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 23 Figure C 6 Homing to a Limit Switch 250 30 Homing 3 23 Ei S gt e P T g 2 KI Ei m 9 2 Home Limit Input E o ES 5 5 3 o 5 E HI t 5 Start Command Find Home Command 0 50 Encoder Speed 415 ex Profile Status 700 lt Units Traveled 701 Dig In Status 216 e Homing to Limit Switch w o Encoder Feedback When Find Home is commanded the homing routine is run when a Start command is issued The Homing bit 11 in Profile Status will be set while the homing routine is running The drive will ramp to the speed and direction set in Find Home Speed at the rate set in Find Home Ramp until the digital input defined as Home Limit is activated The drive will then decelerate to zero If the switch is no longer activated the drive will reverse direction
217. ile cursor is on the parameter selection In addition using Param Access Lvl the user has the option to display the full parameter set Advanced commonly used parameters Basic or diagnostic advanced tuning parameters Reserved To simplify programming the displayed parameters will change according to the selection made with Motor Cntl Sel For example if FVC Vector is selected the parameters associated solely with other operations such as Volts per Hertz or Sensorless Vector will be hidden Refer to pages 3 4 and 3 5 File Group Parameter Order This simplifies programming by grouping parameters that are used for similar functions The parameters are organized into files Each file is divided into groups and each parameter is an element in a group By default the LCD HIM displays parameters by File Group Parameter view Numbered List View All parameters are in numerical order Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 4 Programming and Parameters Basic Parameter View Parameter 196 Param Access Lvl set to option 0 Basic File Group Parameters Monitor Metering Output Freq 001 Commanded Speed002 Commanded Torque 024 Output Current 003 Torque Current 004 DC Bus Voltage 012 Motor Control Motor Data Motor NP Volts 041 Motor NP RPM 044 Motor OL Hertz 047 Motor NP FLA 042 Motor NP Power 045 Motor Poles 049 B c Motor NP Hertz 043 Mtr NP Pwr Units 046 Torq Attribu
218. im In Select 117 Trim Hi 119 Trim Setpoint 116 Trim Out Select 118 Trim Lo 120 Slip Comp Slip RPM FLA 121 Slip Comp Gain 122 Slip RPM Meter 123 Process PI PI Configuration 124 PI Upper Limit 132 PI Reference Lo 461 PI Control 125 PI Preload 33 Pl Feedback Hi 462 PI Reference Sel 126 PI Status 134 Pl FeedbackLo 463 PI Setpoint 127 PI Ref Meter 35 PI BW Filter 139 PI Feedback Sel 128 PI Fdback Meter 136 PI Deriv Time 459 PI Integral Time 129 PI Error Meter 37 PI Output Gain 464 PI Prop Gain 130 PI Output Meter 38 PI Lower Limit 131 PI Reference Hi 460 Speed Regulator Ki Speed Loop 445 Kf Speed Loop 447 Total Inertia 450 Kp Speed Loop 446 Speed Desired BW 449 Speed Loop Meter 451 Ramp Rates Accel Time 1 2 140 141 Decel Time 1 2 42 143 S Curve 146 Load Limits CurrentLmt Sel 147 Drive OL Mode 150 Regen Power Limit 153 Current Lmt Val 148 PWM Frequency 151 Current Rate Limit 154 Current Lmt Gain 149 Droop RPM FLA 152 Stop Brake Stop Mode 155 156 Bus Reg Ki 160 Bus Reg Kd 165 Modes DC Brk Lvl Sel 157 Bus Reg Mode 161 162 Flux Braking 166 DC Brake Level 158 DB Resistor Type 163 DB While Stopped 145 DC Brake Time 159 Bus Reg Kp 164 Restart Modes Start At PowerUp 168 Auto Rstrt Delay 175 Wake Time 181 Flying Start En 169 Sleep Wake Mode 178 Sleep Level 182 Flying StartGain 170 Sleep Wake Ref 179 Sleep Time 183 Auto Rstrt Tries 174 Wake Level 80 Powerup Delay 167 These parameters will only be
219. ime greater Dwell Time Batch Nex Time Direction than Step Value Number Step Time Blend Total Time Speed amp Accel Rate Decel Rate Time greater NA NA Next Direction than Step Value Step Digital Input Digital Input Speed amp Accel Rate Decel Rate Digital Input logic Dwell Time Batch Nex Number Direction Number Step Encoder Position amp Speed Accel Rate Decel Rate At Position NA NA Next Incremental Direction Step Value Step Blend Parameter Parameter Speed amp Accel Rate Decel Rate Step Value gt or Compare NA Nex Level Number A Direction lt Step Dwell Value Step End NA NA NA Decel Rate At Zero transition Dwell Time NA Stop NA Function not applicable to this step type Publication 20B UM002C EN P C 20 Application Notes Time When started the drive will ramp to the desired velocity hold the speed and then ramp to zero in the programmed time for the given step Dwell time and batch affect when the next step is executed Time Blend When started the drive will ramp to the desired velocity and hold speed for the programmed time At this point it will transition to the next step and ramp to the programmed velocity without going to zero speed Digital Input When started the drive will ramp to the desired velocity and hold speed until the digital input programmed in the value transitions in the direction defined When
220. imits 3 27 64 Ixo Voltage Drop Torq Attributes 3 12 153 Regen Power Limit Load Limits 3 27 66 Autotune Torque Torq Attributes 3 13 154 Current Rate Limit Load Limits 3 27 67 Inertia Autotune Torq Attributes 3 13 155 156 Stop Mode X Stop Brake Modes 3 28 69 Start Acc Boost Volts per Hertz 3 14 157 DC Brk Lvl Sel Stop Brake Modes 3 28 70 Run Boost Volts per Hertz 3 14 158 DC Brake Level Stop Brake Modes 3 28 71 Break Voltage Volts per Hertz 3 15 159 DC Brake Time Stop Brake Modes 3 28 72 Break Frequency Volts per Hertz 3 15 160 Bus Reg Ki Stop Brake Modes 3 28 79 Speed Units Spd Mode amp Limits 3 16 161 162 Bus Reg Mode X Stop Brake Modes 3 29 80 Feedback Select Spd Mode amp Limits 3 17 163 DB Resistor Type Stop Brake Modes 3 29 81 Minimum Speed Spd Mode amp Limits 3 17 164 BusRegKp Stop Brake Modes 3 29 82 Maximum Speed Spd Mode amp Limits 3 17 165 Bus Reg Kd Stop Brake Modes 3 29 83 Overspeed Limit Spd Mode amp Limits 3 17 166 Flux Braking Stop Brake Modes 3 30 84 86 Skip Frequency 1 3 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 18 Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 76 Programming and Parameters
221. in order to maintain maximum motor speed The figure below illustrates a typical Custom V Hz profile Minimum Speed is entered in Hertz and determines the lower speed reference limit during normal operation Maximum Speed is entered in Hertz and determines the upper speed reference limit The two Speed parameters only limit the speed reference and not the output frequency The actual output frequency at maximum speed reference is the sum of the speed reference plus speed adder components from functions such as slip compensation The Overspeed Limit is entered in Hertz and added to Maximum Speed and the sum of the two Speed Limit limit the output frequency This sum Speed Limit must is compared to Maximum Frequency and an alarm is initiated which prevents operation if the Speed Limit exceeds Maximum Frequency Allowable Output Frequency Range Bus Regulation or Current Limit lt lt Allowable Output Frequency Range Normal Operation lower limit on this range can be 0 depending on the value of Speed Adder es Allowable Speed Reference Range s 1 Maximum Voltage Motor NP Voltage 4 l disnei nen Conran iita I Frequency Trim due to Speed l l 1 Control Mode Overspeed gt Limit Break Voltage Start Boost Run Boost Output Voltage 0 Minimum Break Motor NP Hz Maximum Output Maximum Speed Frequency Speed Frequency Frequency Frequency Li
222. in the direction the drive was running when the switch was activated momentarily or continuously see C in Figure C 4 A Start command in the same direction will only allow 0 Hz to be commanded A Start in the opposite direction will allow motion with a speed command from the selected speed reference If TorqProve is Enabled the drive will hold zero speed for a time determined by ZeroSpdFloat Time parameter 605 Two different input switches can be connected in series to one digital input to provide an end limit at both ends of the application e g lift conveyor etc With proper set up the drive will automatically apply the proper stopping based on the direction of the load even though only one digital input is being used Publication 20B UM002C EN P C 12 Application Notes Limit Switch Set up 1 Move the load to a position between the two decel switches A in Figure C 4 2 Select the switches in Digital In1 6 Select If switches are only used on one end of travel simply keep the load off of both switches when selecting in Digital In1 6 Select If the set up is done incorrectly the application will not move or will move at an incorrect slower speed This can be corrected by selecting Not Used for both limit switches in Digital In1 6 Select Then move the load between the Decel Switches and select the limit switches again in Digital In1 6 Select Important When properly set up the drive will
223. ing its number Publication 20B UM002C EN P B 6 Step 1 Select a valid destination parameter see Table B B to be linked refer to page B 5 The parameter value screen will appear Accel Time 1 Accel Time 2 2 Press Enter to edit the parameter The Decel Time 1 cursor will move to the value line TS in 0 1 Secs 3 Press ALT and then View Sel Next press Gi Max 3600 0 Secs HIM Overview Linking Parameters Most parameter values are entered directly by the user However certain parameters can be linked so the value of one parameter becomes the value of another For Example the value of an analog input can be linked to Accel Time 2 Rather than entering an acceleration time directly via HIM the link allows the value to change by varying the analog signal This can provide additional flexibility for advanced applications Each link has 2 components e Source parameter sender of information e Destination parameter receiver of information Most parameters can be a source of data for a link except parameter values that contain an integer representing an ENUM text choice These are not allowed since the integer is not actual data it represents a value Table B B lists the parameters that can be destinations All links must be established between equal data types parameter value formatted in floating point can only source data to a destination parameter value that is also floating point
224. ion 3 11 Control Status 3 14 Control SW Ver 3 9 Counts per Unit 3 66 Current Lmt Gain 3 27 Current Lmt Sel 3 26 Current Lmt Val 3 27 Current Rate Limit 3 27 Data In Ax 3 49 Data Out Ax 3 50 DB Resistor 3 62 DB Resistor Type 3 29 DB While Stopped 3 28 DC Brake Level 3 28 DC Brake Time 3 28 DC Brk Levl Sel 3 28 DC Bus Memory 3 7 DC Bus Voltage 3 7 Decel Mask 3 48 Decel Owner 3 49 Decel Time x 3 26 Dig In Status 3 40 Dig Out Invert 3 58 Dig Out Mask 3 59 Dig Out Param 3 58 Dig Out Setpt 3 56 Dig Out Status 3 40 Dig Outx Level 3 57 Dig Outx OffTime 3 58 Dig Outx OnTime 3 57 Digital Inx Sel 3 55 Digital Outx Sel 3 57 Direction Mask 3 48 Direction Mode 3 33 Direction Owner 3 49 DPI Baud Rate 3 46 DPI Fdbk Select 3 47 DPI Port Sel 3 47 DPI Port Value 3 47 DPI Ref Select 3 47 Drive Alarm 1 3 38 Drive Alarm 2 3 38 Drive Checksum 3 36 Drive Logic Rslt 3 46 Drive OL Count 3 40 Drive OL Mode 3 27 Drive Ramp Rslt 3 46 Drive Ref Rslt 3 46 Drive Status 1 3 37 Drive Status 2 3 37 Drive Temp 3 40 Droop RPM Q FLA 3 27 Dyn UserSet Actv 3 37 Dyn UsrSet Cnfg 3 36 Dyn UsrSet Sel 3 36 Elapsed kWh 3 8 Elapsed MWh 3 7 Elapsed Run Time 3 7 Enc Position Fdbk 3 15 Encoder Pos Tol 3 66 Encoder PPR 3 15 Encoder Speed 3 15 Encoder Z Chan 3 16 Fault 1 Time 3 43 Fault Amps 3 41 Fault Bus Volts 3 41 Fault Clear 3 42 Fault Clear Mode 3 43 Fault Clr Mask 3 48 Fa
225. ion 20B UM002C EN P 1 30 Installation Wiring Notes Publication 20B UM002C EN P Chapter 2 Start Up This chapter describes how you start up the PowerFlex 700 Drive Refer to Appendix B for a brief description of the LCD HIM Human Interface Module For information on See page Prepare For Drive Start Up 2 1 Status Indicators 2 2 Start Up Routines 2 3 Running S M A R T Start 2 5 Running an Assisted Start Up 2 5 following start up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing i ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the Prepare For Drive Start Up Before Applying Power to the Drive 1 Confirm that all inputs are connected to the correct terminals and are secure 2 Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the rated value of the drive 3 Verify that control power voltage is correct The remainder of this procedure requires that a HIM be installed If an operator interface
226. ion Indexer Speed C 17 Profiler External Brake Resistor C 3 Power Loss Ride Through C 27 Lifting Torque Proving C 4 Process PID C 28 Limit Switches for Digital Inputs C 11 Reverse Speed Limit C 31 Minimum Speed C 12 Skip Frequency C 32 Motor Control Technology C 12 Sleep Wake Mode C 34 Motor Overload C 14 Start At PowerUp C 36 Motor Overload Memory C 16 Stop Mode C 36 Retention Per 2005 NEC Overspeed C 16 Voltage Tolerance C 40 Adjustable Voltage Operation In Adjustable Voltage control mode the output voltage is controlled independently from the output frequency The voltage and frequency components have independent references and acceleration deceleration rates Single phase and three phase output is possible with this feature The Adjustable Voltage mode is designed to operate on electro magnetic loads not typical AC motors Typical applications include e Linear Motors e Vibration Welding e Vibratory conveying e Electromagnetic Stirring e Induction Heating 400 Hz or lower e Resistive Loads dryers e Power Supplies Enabling Adjustable Voltage Adjustable Voltage is enabled in Motor Cntl Sel parameter 053 by selecting 5 Adj Voltage In this mode current limit will now reduce voltage instead of frequency when the threshold is reached Aggressive ramp rates on the voltage command should be avoided to minimize nuisance overcurrent trips Publication 20B UM002C EN P C 2 Application Notes Fixed Freque
227. is not available remote devices should be used to start up the drive Important When power is first applied the HIM may require approximately 5 seconds until commands are recognized including the Stop key Publication 20B UM002C EN P 2 2 Start Up Applying Power to the Drive 4 Apply AC power and control voltages to the drive If any of the six digital inputs are configured to Stop CF CF Clear Fault or Enable verify that signals are present or reconfigure Digital Inx Sel If an I O option is not installed i e no I O terminal block verify that Digital Inx Sel is not configured to Stop CF or Enable If this is not done the drive will not start Refer to Alarm Descriptions on page 4 10 for a list of potential digital input conflicts If a fault code appears refer to Chapter 4 If the STS LED is not flashing green at this point refer to Status Indicators below 5 Proceed to Start Up Routines Status Indicators Figure 2 1 Drive Status Indicators PowerFiex GU n KI Name Color State Description PWR Green Steady llluminates when power is applied to the drive Power STS Green Flashing Drive ready but not running and no faults are present Status Steady Drive running no faults are present Yellow Flashing A start inhibit condition exists the drive cannot be See page Drive Stopped star
228. itor File m Group File No 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 Metering 008 009 010 011 012 013 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Output Freq Output frequency present at T1 T2 amp T3 U V amp W Commanded Speed Value of the active Speed Frequency Reference Displayed in Hz or RPM depending on value of Speed Units Output Current The total output current present at T1 T2 amp T3 U V amp W Torque Current Based on the motor the amount of current that is in phase with the fundamental voltage component Flux Current Amount of current that is out of phase with the fundamental voltage component Output Voltage Output voltage present at terminals T1 T2 amp T3 U V amp W Output Power Output power present at T1 T2 amp T3 U V amp W Output Powr Fctr Output power factor Elapsed MWh Accumulated output energy of the drive Elapsed Run Time Accumulated time drive is outputting power MOP Reference Value of the signal at MOP Motor Operated Potentiometer DC Bus Voltage Present DC bus voltage level DC Bus Memory 6 minute average of DC bus voltage level Programming and Parameters Values Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Defa
229. its Default Min Max Units Fault Run Run 1 4 4 1 Fault 2 Alarm 3 Ready 4 Rum 5 Forward Run 6 Reverse Run 7 Auto Restart 8 X Powerup Run 9 A Speed 2 At Freg 9 11 At Current 3 12 At Torque 13 At Temp 14 At Bus Volts 9 15 At P Error 16 DC Braking 17 Curr Limit 18 Economize 19 Motor Overld 20 Power Loss 21 26 Input 1 6 Link 27 PI Enable 28 PI Hold 29 Drive Overload 30 Param Cnt 2 31 Mask 1 AND 32 Mask 1 OR 33 Prof At Pos 34 Prof Enabled 35 Prof Running 36 Prof Holding 37 Prof At Home 38 ProfComplete 39 Prof Homing 40 Prof Dwell 41 Prof Batch 42 57 Prof Step1 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 819 2 0 1 0 00 Secs 0 00 Secs 0 00 600 00 Secs 0 01 Secs Ka Ico I Ico Ico CH Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 58 Ra LE E a 2 9 o N LE EJ a Group e 2 E 2 3 o T 2 a Programming and Parameters 392 393 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Dig Out OffTime Dig Out2 OffTime Dig Out3 OffTime Sets the OFF Delay time for the digital outputs This is the time between the disappearance of a condition and de activation of the relay Dig Out Invert Inverts the selected digital output Values Default Min Max Units
230. its Default Units Min Max Min Max Read Only 7142147483647 1 Read Only 7142147483647 1 Related Programming and Parameters 3 47 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Group Related File No 274 DPI Port Sel Default DPI Port 1 Selects which DPI port reference value Options 1 5 DPI Port 1 5 will appear in DPI Port Value 275 DPI Port Value Default Read Only Value of the DPI reference selected in Min Max 32767 DPI Port Sel Units 1 298 DPI Ref Select Default 0 Max Freq Scales DPI on maximum frequency or Options 0 Men Freq maximum speed 1 Max Speed 299 DPI Fdbk Select Default 17 Speed Fdbk Selects the DPI units displayed on the Options 0 Output Freq first line of the HIM and the feedback 1 Command Spd zt word through any connected DPI 2 Output Amps peripheral 20 COMM x 1203 USB 3 Torque Amps S etc 4 Flux Amps o E 1 Refer to Input Output Definitions on 5 Output Power 5 page 3 54 6 Output Volts o 2 amp SECH 7 DC Bus Volts 2 Speed Fdbk is a filtered value 8 PI Ref ant Choose 25 SpdFb NoFilt if your 5 ES one process requires speed feedback via S S E a communication network 10 PI Error 11 Pl Output 12 9eMotor OL 13 Drive OL 14 CommandedTrq 15 MirTrqCurRef 0 16 Speed Re
231. its 0 0 Hz zero disables this parameter and uses 0 0 RPM Maximum Speed for reverse speed limit Publication 20B UM002C EN P Related CO Kai Sal i CD o1 co IO WSA I2 MaxSpeedjooRPM 3 File SPEED COMMAND Speed References Group No 09 e 09 092 093 094 095 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Speed Ref A Sel Selects the source of the speed reference to the drive unless Speed Ref B Sel or Preset Speed 1 7 is selected 1 See Appendix B for DPI port locations Speed Ref A Hi Scales the upper value of the Speed Ref A Sel selection when the source is an analog input Speed Ref A Lo Scales the lower value of the Speed Ref A Sel selection when the source is an analog input Speed Ref B Sel See Speed Ref A Sel Speed Ref B Hi Scales the upper value of the Speed Ref B Sel selection when the source is an analog input Speed Ref B Lo Scales the lower value of the Speed Ref B Sel selection when the source is an analog input Programming and Parameters Values Default Options Default Units Default Units Default Options Default Units Default Units Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max 2 Analog In 2 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 3 6 Reserved 7 Pulse In 8 Encoder 9 MOP Level 10 Reserved
232. k 3 48 Direction Mode 3 33 Direction Owner 3 49 Discrete Speeds Group 3 20 Distribution Systems 1 14 Resistive Grounded 1 3 Unbalanced 1 3 Ungrounded 1 3 DPI Baud Rate 3 46 DPI Fdbk Select 3 47 DPI Port 1 5 Fault 4 7 DPI Port Locations B 1 DPI Port Sel 3 47 DPI Port Value 3 47 DPI Ref Select 3 47 Drive Alarm 1 3 38 Drive Alarm 2 3 38 Drive Checksum 3 36 Drive Data Group 3 8 Drive Frame Size P 3 Drive Grounding 1 4 Drive Logic Rslt 3 46 Drive Memory Group 3 35 Drive OL Count 3 40 Drive OL Level Alarm 4 11 Drive OL Mode 3 27 Drive Overload Fault 4 5 Drive Powerup Fault 4 5 Drive Ramp Rslt 3 46 Drive Ratings A 9 Drive Ref Rslt 3 46 Drive Status 1 3 37 Drive Status 2 3 37 Drive Temp 3 40 DriveExecutive 3 1 DriveExplorer 3 1 Droop RPM FLA 3 27 Dyn UserSet Actv 3 37 Dyn UsrSet Cnfg 3 36 Dyn UsrSet Sel 3 36 Dynamic Brake Resistor Selection 3 29 Setup 3 29 Dynamic Control File 3 26 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Index 4 E Earthing see Grounding Editing Parameters 3 1 Elapsed kWh 3 8 Elapsed MWh 3 7 Elapsed Run Time 3 7 EMC Directive 1 27 Instructions 1 27 EMI RFI Filter Grounding RFI Filter 1 4 Enc Position Fdbk 3 15 Enclosure Rating 1 2 Encoder Loss Fault 4 5 Encoder Pos Tol 3 66 Encoder PPR 3 15 Encoder Quad Err Fault 4 5 Encoder Speed 3 15 Encoder Terminal Block 1 18 1 20 Encoder Wiring 1 20 Encoder Z Chan 3 16 ESD Static Discharge P 3 Exce
233. l Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss gt Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures gt gt PowerFlex DriveExplorer DriveExecutive PLC Force Technology DPI and SCANport are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International Ltd DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Summary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes to the Powe
234. le Status 700 Units Traveled 701 Current Step Step x Step x Step x Step x Stepx Stepx Stepx Step Step x Type Velocity AccelTime DecelTime Value Dwell Batch Next 1 Encoder Incr 100 0 5 0 5 10 00 1 00 i 2 2 Encoder Incr 200 0 5 0 5 10 00 1 00 i 3 3 Encoder Incr 300 0 5 0 5 10 00 1 00 J1 4 4 Encoder Abs 400 0 5 0 5 0 00 100 N A 5 5 End Hold N A N A 0 5 N A 0 00 N A N A Position Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 27 Power Loss Ride Through When AC input power is lost energy is being supplied to the motor from the DC bus capacitors The energy from the capacitors is not being replaced via the AC line thus the DC bus voltage will fall rapidly The drive must detect this fall and react according to the way it is programmed Two parameters display DC bus voltage e DC Bus Voltage displays the instantaneous value e DC Bus Memory displays a 6 minute running average of the voltage All drive reactions to power loss are based on DC Bus Memory This averages low and high line conditions and sets the drive to react to the average rather than assumed values For example a 480V installation would have a 480V AC line and produce a nominal 648V DC bus If the drive were to react to a fixed voltage for line loss detect i e 533V DC then normal operation would occur for nominal line installations However if a lower nominal line volta
235. le3 In Hi Scale4 In Hi Scales the upper value of ScaleX In Value Scale1 In Lo Scale2 In Lo Scale3 In Lo Scale4 In Lo Scales the lower value of ScaleX In Value Scale1 Out Hi Scale2 Out Hi Scale3 Out Hi Scale4 Out Hi Scales the upper value of ScaleX Out Value Scale1 Out Lo Scale2 Out Lo Scale3 Out Lo Scale4 Out Lo Scales the lower value of ScaleX Out Value Scale1 Out Value Scale2 Out Value Scale3 Out Value Scale4 Out Value Value of the signal being sent out of the Universal Scale block Typically this value is used as the source of information and will be linked to another parameter Programming and Parameters Values Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max 0 0 1 432767 000 0 01 Scale 1 amp 2 0 001 Scale 3 amp 4 0 0 32767 000 0 01 Scale 1 amp 2 0 001 Scale 3 amp 4 0 0 32767 000 0 01 Scale 1 amp 2 0 001 Scale 3 amp 4 0 0 32767 000 0 01 Scale 1 amp 2 0 001 Scale 3 amp 4 0 0 32767 000 0 01 Scale 1 amp 2 0 001 Scale 3 amp 4 Read Only 32767 000 0 01 Scale 1 amp 2 0 001 Scale 3 amp 4 3 45 Related Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 46 Programming and Parameters Communication File d Pa
236. leX Out Hi 63 Flux Current Ref 180 Wake Level 480 498 ScaleX Out Lo 69 Start Acc Boost 181 Wake Time 602 Spd Dev Band 70 Run Boost 182 Sleep Level 603 SpdBand Integrat 71 Break Voltage 183 Sleep Time 604 Brk Release Time 72 Break Frequency 185 Power Loss Time 605 ZeroSpdFloatTime 84 Skip Frequency 1 186 Power Loss Level 606 Float Tolerance 85 Skip Frequency 2 321 Anlg In Sqr Root 607 Brk Set Time 86 Skip Frequency 3 322 Analog In1 Hi 608 TorqLim SlewRate 87 Skip Freq Band 323 Analog In1 Lo 609 BrkSlip Count 91 Speed Ref A Hi 324 Analog In1 Loss 610 Brk Alarm Travel 92 Speed Ref A Lo 325 Analog In2 Hi 611 MicroPos Scale 94 Speed Ref B Hi 326 Analog In2 Lo 95 Speed Ref B Lo 327 Analog In2 Loss 97 TB Man Ref Hi 343 Analog Out Hi 98 TB Man Ref Lo 344 Analog Out Lo 100 Jog Speed 346 Analog Out2 Hi 101 Preset Speed 1 347 Analog Out2 Lo 102 Preset Speed 2 381 Dig Out Level 103 Preset Speed 3 382 Dig Out OnTime 104 Preset Speed 4 383 Dig Out OffTime 105 Preset Speed 5 385 Dig Out2 Level 106 Preset Speed 6 386 Dig Out2 OnTime 107 Preset Speed 7 387 Dig Out2 OffTime 119 Trim Hi 389 Dig Out3 Leve 120 Trim Lo 390 Dig Out3 OnTime 121 Slip RPM FLA 391 Dig Out3 OffTime 122 Slip Comp Gain 416 Fdbk Filter Se 123 Slip RPM Meter 419 Notch Filter Freq 127 PI Setpoint 420 Notch Filter K 129 PI Integral Time 428 Torque Ref A Hi 130 PI Prop Gain 429 Torque Ref A Lo 131 PI Lower Limit 430 Torq Ref A Div 132 PI Upper Limit 432 Torque Re
237. lect selection when the source is an Units 0 1 Hz 5 analog input 1 RPM Important Parameters in the Slip Comp Group are used to enable and tune the Slip Compensation Regulator In order to allow the regulator to control drive operation parameter 080 Speed Mode must be set to 1 Slip Comp 121 Slip RPM FLA Default Based on Motor NP RPM 061 Sets the amount of compensation to Min Max 0 0 1200 0 RPM er drive output at motor FLA Units 0 1 RPM 123 If the value of parameter 061 Autotune m 3 Calculate changes made to this 8 parameter will not be accepted 2 Value may be changed by Autotune e when Encoder is selected in Feedback Select parameter 080 122 Slip Comp Gain Default 40 0 080 Sets the response time of slip Min Max 1 0 100 0 i compensation Units 0 1 123 Slip RPM Meter Default Read Only 080 Displays the present amount of Min Max 300 0 RPM adjustment being applied as slip Units 0 1 RPM Ke compensation Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 22 Programming and Parameters a z lt q E eo D TT HI a N No 124 125 126 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions PI Configuration Sets configuration of the PI regulator Values X 1 Enabled X x x x 0 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 0 Disabled x Reserved F Bit Factory Default Bit
238. lication 20B UM002C EN P Programming and Parameters 3 27 Kal o Parameter Name amp Description s it See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 148 Current Lmt Val Default Rated Amps x 1 5 147 Defines the current limit value when ee Wee approxi 149 Current Lmt Sel Cur Lim Val mate default value When in Adj Voltage mode the output ge SE on Drive Rating voltage will not be allowed to exceed this ruts LAMPS value 149 Current Lmt Gain Default 250 147 Sets the responsiveness of the current Min Max 0 5000 limit Units 1 150 Drive OL Mode Default 3 Both PWM tst 219 Selects the drives response to increasing Options 0 Disabled drive temperature and may reduce the 1 Reduce CLim current limit value as well as the PWM 2 Reduce PWM frequency If the drive is being used with 3 Both PWM 1st a sine wave filter the filter is likely tuned to a specific carrier frequency To ensure stable operation it is recommended to set this parameter to Reduce CLim 151 PWM Frequency Default 4 kHz f 2 kHz Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM S 2 output Drive derating may occur at Refer to Appendix A E higher carrier frequencies For derating Min Max 2 10 kHz information refer to the PowerFlex Units 2 4 8 10 kHz z Reference Manual l Important If parameter 053 Motor Cntl Sel is set to FVC Vector the drive will run at 2 kHz when operating
239. lipped alarm occurs drive power must be cycled to clear the alarm and re start the drive Publication 20B UM002C EN P C 10 Application Notes Speed Monitoring Speed Band Limit This routine is intended to fault the drive if the difference between the speed reference and the encoder feedback is larger than the value set in Spd Dev Band parameter 602 and the drive is NOT making any progress toward the reference SpdBand Integrat parameter 603 sets the time that the speed difference can be greater than the deviation band before causing a fault and setting the brake Float Float is defined as the condition when the drive is holding the load at zero hertz while holding off the mechanical brake The float condition starts when the frequency drops below the speed set in Float Tolerance parameter 606 Float will stay active for a period of time set by ZeroSpdFloatTime parameter 605 If a digital input parameters 361 366 is set to Micro Pos also Float and it is closed the Float condition will stay active and will disregard the timer This signal is also available through a communication device see TorqProve Setup parameter 601 When encoderless TorqProve is enabled the drive cannot hold the load at zero speed Parameter 606 Float Tolerance will then define the speed at which the brake is set Micro Position Micro Position refers to rescaling of the commanded frequency by a percentage entered in MicroPos Scale
240. logy combines the basic Volts Hertz concept with known motor parameters such as Rated FLA HP Voltage stator resistance and flux producing current Knowledge of the individual motor attached to the drive allows the drive to adjust the output pattern to the motor and load conditions By identifying motor parameters the drive can maximize the torque produced in the motor and extend the speed range at which that torque can be produced This technology is excellent for applications that require a wider speed range and applications that need maximum possible torque for breakaway acceleration or overload Centrifuges extruders conveyors and others are candidates Torque Controllers Vector This technology differs from the two above because it actually controls or regulates torque Rather than allowing the motor and load to actually determine the amount of torque produced Vector technology allows the drive to regulate the torque to a defined value By independently identifying and controlling both flux and torque currents in the motor true control of torque is achieved High bandwidth current regulators remain active with or without encoder feedback to produce outstanding results This technology is excellent for those applications where torque control rather than mere torque production is key to the success of the process These include web handling demanding extruders and lifting applications such as hoists or material handling Vector
241. mit Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 17 Position Indexer Speed Profiler The PowerFlex 700 includes a position indexer speed profiler which provides either point to point positioning with a position regulator or speed profiling using a velocity regulator Point to point positioning can be either incremental moves or absolute moves which are referenced to home Encoder feedback incremental encoder is required for the position regulator Speed profiling steps can be time based or triggered by digital inputs encoder counts or parameter levels These speed profiling steps can be operated open loop or with an encoder The indexer is programmed by entering data into a 16 step array Each step has several variables for optimal customization see below The steps can be run in a continuous cycle or a single cycle The process can also move to or from any step in the array Accel Decel Next Step Step Type Value Velocity Time Time Condition Next This feature also includes homing capability to a limit switch or a marker pulse using an automatic homing procedure Important The PowerFlex 700 uses an incremental encoder only Since absolute encoders are not used your process must be able to accommodate this homing procedure after a power down or power loss Common Guidelines for all Step Types e Enabling Position Indexer Speed Profiler This feature is enabled by selecting 7 Pos Spd Prof in Speed Torque Mod
242. n 20B UM002C EN P C 40 Application Notes Voltage Tolerance Nominal Line Nominal Motor Drive Full Power Drive Operating Drive Rating Voltage Voltage Range Range 200 240 200 200 200 264 180 264 208 208 208 264 240 230 230 264 380 480 380 380 380 528 342 528 400 400 400 528 480 460 460 528 500 600 600 575 575 660 432 660 Frames 0 4 Only 500 690 600 575 575 660 475 759 Frames 5 6 Only 690 690 690 759 475 759 Drive Full Power Range Nominal Motor Voltage to Drive Rated Voltage 10 Rated power is available across the entire Drive Full Power Range Drive Operating Range Lowest Nominal Motor Voltage 10 to Drive Rated Voltage 10 Drive Output is linearly derated when Actual Line Voltage is less than the Nominal Motor Voltage gt k 3 a H 5 o o E amp s lt gt Derated Power Range 2 lt Full Power Range E Breed Drive Operating Range 2 Nominal Motor Voltage 10 Drive Rated Voltage i Nominal Motor Voltage gt Drive Rated Voltage 10 Actual Line Voltage Drive Input Example Calculate the maximum power of a 5 HP 460V motor connected to a 480V rated drive supplied with 342V Actual Line Voltage input e Actual Line Voltage Nominal Motor Voltage 74 3 e 74 3 x 5 HP 3 7 HP e 74 3 x 60 Hz 44 6 Hz At 342V Actual Line Voltage the maximum power the 5 HP 460V motor can produce is 3 7
243. n the drive can be configured to regulate the frequency or voltage commands of the drive Typical applications using the Adjustable Voltage mode will close the loop around the voltage command Process PI is enabled by selecting 1 AdjVoltTrim in bit 10 of PI Configuration parameter 124 This bit configures the PI regulator output to trim the voltage reference rather than the torque or speed references The trim can be configured to be exclusive by selecting 1 Excl Mode in bit 0 of PI Configuration parameter 124 Trimming the voltage reference is not compatible with trimming the torque reference thus if bits 10 and 8 of PI Configuration are set a type II alarm will occur setting bit 19 PI Cfg Cflct in Drive Alarm 2 parameter 212 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 3 External Brake Resistor ATTENTION The drive does not offer protection for externally A mounted brake resistors A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected External resistor packages must be self protected from over temperature or a circuit equivalent to the one shown below must be supplied Figure C 1 External Brake Resistor Circuitry Three Phase AC Input Input Contactor M Power Off Power On M M Do X Power Source DB Resistor Thermostat Publication 20B UM002C EN P CA Application Notes Lifting Torque Proving The TorqProve M feature of the PowerFlex 700 is intended f
244. nce Control 1 24 Speed Reference Selection 1 24 Speed References Group 3 19 Speed Regulator Group 3 25 Speed Trim Group 3 21 Speed Units 3 16 Speed Torque Mod 3 18 Standard Control Option 3 3 Start At PowerUp 3 30 C 36 Start At PowerUp Alarm 4 12 Start Inhibits 3 39 Start Mask 3 47 Start Owner 3 48 Start Acc Boost 3 14 Start Stop Repeated 1 13 Start Up Assisted 2 3 Checklist 2 1 SMART 2 3 Static Discharge ESD P 3 Status 1 Fault 3 41 Status 2 Fault 3 41 Status LEDs 4 2 Step x AccelTime 3 68 Step x Batch 3 70 Step x DecelTime 3 69 Step x Dwell 3 70 Step x Next 3 71 Step x Type 3 67 Step x Value 3 69 Step x Velocity 3 68 Stop Mode x 3 28 Stop Owner 3 48 Stop Brake Modes Group 3 28 STS LED 4 2 Supply Source 1 2 SV Boost Filter 3 11 SW OverCurrent Fault 4 8 System Grounding 1 4 T TB Man Ref Cflct Alarm 4 12 TB Man Ref Hi 3 20 TB Man Ref Lo 3 20 Index 13 TB Man Ref Sel 3 20 Terminal Block Encoder 1 18 1 20 IO 1 18 1 19 Power 1 11 Wire Size Encoder 1 18 IO 1 18 Power 1 10 Testpoint Codes and Functions 4 16 Testpoint x Data 3 42 Testpoint x Sel 3 42 Torq Attributes Group 3 10 Torq Prove Cflct Alarm 4 12 Torq Prove Sts 3 61 Torq Ref A Div 3 13 TorgAlarm Action 3 61 TorgAlarm Dwell 3 61 TorgAlarm Level 3 61 TorgAlrm Timeout 3 61 TorgAlrm TO Act 3 62 TorqLim SlewRate 3 60 TorgProve Cnfg 3 59 TorgProve Setup 3 60 TorqPrv Spd Band Fault 4 8
245. ncy Control Applications Many of the applications require a fixed frequency operation with variable voltage levels For these applications it is best to set the frequency ramp rates to 0 using Accel Time 1 amp 2 and Decel Time 1 amp 2 parameters 140 143 The ramp rates for output voltage are independently controlled with parameters Adj Volt AccTime and Adj Volt DecTime parameters 675 676 Output Filters Several adjustable voltage applications may require the use of output filters Any L C or sine wave filter used on the output side of the drive must be compatible with the desired frequency of operation as well as the PWM voltage waveform developed by the inverter The drive is capable of operating from 0 400 Hz output frequency and the PWM frequencies range from 2 10 kHz When a filter is used on the output of the drive Drive OL Mode parameter 150 should be programmed so that PWM frequency is not affected by an overload condition i e 0 Disabled or 1 Reduce CLim Trim Function The trim function can be used with the Adjustable Voltage mode The value of the selection in Adj Volt TrimSel parameter 669 is summed with the value of Adj Volt Select parameter 651 Scaling of the trim function is controlled with Adj Volt Trim parameter 672 When the sign of Adj Volt Trim is negative the value selected in Adj Volt TrimSel is subtracted from the reference Process Control The Process PI loop i
246. ne 0 Open Loop Output Frequency Torque Reference Source The torque reference is normally supplied by an analog input or network reference Switching between available sources while the drive is running is not available Digital inputs programmed as Speed Sel 1 2 3 and the HIM Auto Manual function see above do not affect the active torque reference when the drive is in Vector Control Mode t To access Preset Speed 1 set parameter 090 or 093 to Preset Speed 1 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Installation Wiring 1 25 Auto Manual Examples PLC Auto HIM Manual A process is run by a PLC when in Auto mode and requires manual control from the HIM during set up The Auto speed reference is issued by the PLC through a communications module installed in the drive Since the internal communications is designated as Port 5 Speed Ref A Sel is set to DPI Port 5 with the drive running from the Auto source Attain Manual Control e Press ALT then Auto Man on the HIM When the HIM attains manual control the drive speed command comes from the HIM speed control keys Release to Auto Control e Press ALT then Auto Man on the HIM again When the HIM releases manual control the drive speed command returns to the PLC PLC Auto Terminal Block Manual A process is run by a PLC when in Auto mode and requires manual control from an analog potentiometer wired to the drive terminal block The auto speed reference
247. ngineer and or end user to configure drive parameters test any lifting functionality and meet safety requirements in accordance with all applicable codes and standards ATTENTION Loss of control in suspended load applications can Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 5 ATTENTION User must read the following prior to the use of TorgqProve with no encoder Encoderless TorqProve must be limited to lifting applications where personal safety is not a concern Encoders offer additional protection and must be used where personal safety is a concern Encoderless TorgqProve cannot hold a load at zero speed without a mechanical brake and does not offer additional protection if the brake slips fails Loss of control in suspended load applications can cause personal injury and or equipment damage It is the responsibility of the engineer and or user to configure drive parameters test any lifting functionality and meet safety requirements in accordance with all applicable codes and standards If encoderless TorqProve is desired the user must certify the safety of the application To acknowledge that the end user has read this Attention and properly certified their encoderless application bit 8 TPEncdless of Compensation parameter 56 must be changed to a 1 This will disable Fault 28 See Manual and allow bit 1 of Parameter 600 to be changed to a 1 enabling encoderless TorqProve TorqProve Manual Start Up
248. not continuously operate at one or more of the points skip frequencies are used Parameters 084 086 Skip Frequency 1 3 are available to set the frequencies to be avoided The value programmed into the skip frequency parameters sets the center point for an entire skip band of frequencies The width of the band range of frequency around the center point is determined by parameter 87 Skip Freq Band The range is split half above and half below the skip frequency parameter If the commanded frequency of the drive is greater than or equal to the skip center frequency and less than or equal to the high value of the band skip plus 1 2 band the drive will set the output frequency to the high value of the band See A in Figure C 16 If the commanded frequency is less than the skip center frequency and greater than or equal to the low value of the band skip minus 1 2 band the drive will set the output frequency to the low value of the band See B in Figure C 16 Acceleration and deceleration are not affected by the skip frequencies Normal accel decel will proceed through the band once the commanded frequency is greater than the skip frequency See A amp B in Figure C 16 This function affects only continuous operation within the band Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 33 Skip Frequency Examples The skip frequency will have hysteresis so the output does not toggle between high and low values
249. nput line instability or add an isolation transformer 5 Reset drive Publication 20B UM002C EN P 4 16 Troubleshooting Testpoint Codes and Functions Select testpoint with Testpoint x Sel parameters 234 236 Values can be viewed with Testpoint x Data parameters 235 237 Values No Description Units Minimum Maximum Default 01 DPI Error Status 1 0 255 0 02 Heatsink Temp 0 1 degC 100 0 100 0 0 03 Active Cur Limit 1 0 32767 0 04 Active PWM Freq 1 Hz 2 10 4 05 Life MegaWatt Hd 0 0001 MWh 0 214748 3647 0 06 Life Run Time 0 0001 Hrs 10 214748 3647 0 07 Life Pwr Up Time 0 0001 Hrs 0 214748 3647 0 08 Life Pwr Cycles 1 0 4294967295 0 09 Life MW HR Fract 1 0 4294967295 0 10 MW HR Frac Unit 1 0 4294967295 0 11 MCB Life Time 0 0001 Hrs 10 214748 3647 0 12 Raw Analog In 1 1 0 0 13 Raw Analog In 2 1 0 0 16 CS Msg Rx Cnt 1 0 65535 0 17 CS Msg Tx Cnt 1 0 65535 0 18 CS Timeout Ont 1 0 255 0 19 CS Msg Bad Cnt 1 0 255 0 22 PC Msg Rx Cnt 1 0 65535 0 23 PC Msg Tx Cnt 1 0 65535 0 24 29 PC1 6 Timeout Cnt 1 0 255 0 30 CAN BusOff Cnt 1 0 65535 0 31 No of Analog Inputs 1 0 D 0 32 Raw Temperature 1 0 65535 0 33 MTO Norm Mtr Amp 0 1 Amps 0 65535 0 34 DTO Cmd Frequency 1 0 420 0 35 DTO Cmd Cur Lim 0 1 0 0 36 DTO Cmd DC Hold 1 0 32767 0 37 Control Bd Temp 0 1 0 0 60 0 0 0 1 Enter in Testpoint x Sel 0 Use the equation belo
250. ns ATTENTION This drive contains ESD Electrostatic Discharge sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A B publication 8000 4 5 2 Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage or any other applicable ESD protection handbook ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC amp DC terminals of the Power Terminal Block refer to Chapter for location The voltage must be zero ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists DPI or SCANport host products must not be directly connected together via 1202 cables Unpredict
251. ns 0 Zero Torque Zero Torque 0 torque command 0 1 Speed Reg Speed Reg 1 drive operates as a 2 Torque Reg 3 Min Torg Spd speed regulator b e 4 Max Torg Spd Torque Reg 2 an external torque 5 Sum Torg Spd reference is used for the torque 6 Absolute Min command 7 Pos Spd Prof Min Torq Spd 3 selects the smallest algebraic value to regulate to when the torque reference and torque generated from the speed regulator are compared Max Torq Spd 4 selects the largest algebraic value when the torque reference and the torque generated from the speed regulator are compared Sum Torq Spd 5 selects the sum of the torque reference and the torque generated from the speed regulator Absolute Min 6 selects the smallest absolute algebraic value to regulate to when the torque reference and torque generated from the speed regulator are compared Pos Spd Prof 7 drive operates as a speed or position regulator as determined by the Profile Step parameters 720 877 and Setup parameters 705 719 ATTENTION The speed of the drive could reach Maximum Speed Overspeed Limit to meet required torque when any of the torque modes have been selected Equipment damage and or personal injury may result Rev Speed Limit Default 0 0 RPM Sets a limit on speed in the negative Min Max Max Speed 0 0 Hz direction when in FVC Vector mode Used in bipolar mode only A value of Un
252. nt of filtering used to boost Min Max 0 32767 voltage during Sensorless Vector and Units 1 FVC Vector encoderless operation CO Torq Attributes I gt CO IO I gt On Co o SA Co 05 CO I gt On Co 05 eo Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 12 Programming and Parameters Kl eo o 3 d Parameter Name amp Description E it Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values oc 061 Autotune Default 3 Calculate 053 9 Provides a manual or automatic method Options 0 Ready 062 for setting IR Voltage Drop Flux 1 Static Tune Current Ref and Ixo Voltage Drop Valid 2 Rotate Tune only when parameter 53 is set to Sensrls 3 Calculate Vect SV Economize or FVC Vector Ready 0 Parameter returns to this setting following a Static Tune or Rotate Tune It also permits manually setting IR Voltage Drop Ixo Voltage Drop and Flux Current Ref Static Tune 1 A temporary command that initiates a non rotational motor stator resistance test for the best possible automatic setting of IR Voltage Drop in all valid modes and a non rotational motor leakage inductance test for the best possible automatic setting of Ixo Voltage Drop in FVC Vector mode A start command is required following initiation of this setting The parameter returns to Ready 0 follo
253. ntenance procedures beyond those stated in the standard user manual Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if all additional instructions in this document are not observed Publication 20B UM002C EN P D 2 Instructions for ATEX Approved Drives with ATEX Approved Motors Motor Requirements e The motor must be manufactured under the guidelines of the ATEX directive 94 9 EC It must be installed operated and maintained per the motor manufacturer supplied instructions e Only motors with nameplates marked for use on an inverter power source and labeled for specific hazardous areas may be used in hazardous areas on inverter variable frequency power e When the motor is indicated for ATEX Group II Category 2 for use in gas environments Category 2G the motor must be of flameproof construction EEx d according to EN50018 or Ex d according to EN60079 1 or IEC60079 1 Group II motors are marked with a temperature or a temperature code e When the motor is indicated for ATEX Group II Category 2 for use in dust environments Category 2D the motor must be protected by an enclosure according to EN50281 1 1 or according to IEC61241 1 Ex tD Group II motors are marked with a temperature e The motor over temperature signal supplied to the drive must be a normally closed contact open during over temperature condition compatible with the drive s digital logic input circuitry If multiple sensors are required in the motor
254. ntinuous Rating o e Ds o o 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Base Speed Motor NP FLA is multiplied by Motor OL Factor to select the rated current for the motor thermal overload This can be used to raise or lower the level of current that will cause the motor thermal overload to trip The effective overload factor is a combination of Motor OL Hertz and Motor OL Factor Changing Overload Factor 140 OL 1 20 120 OL 1 00 2 100 OL 0 80 Tog E 3 60 amp 40 20 Publication 20B UM002C EN P C 16 Application Notes Motor Overload Memory Retention Per 2005 NEC The PowerFlex 700 firmware version 4 002 or greater has the ability to retain the motor overload count at power down per the 2005 NEC motor overtemp requirement To Enable Disable this feature refer to the table below Once Enabled the value for Testpoint 1 Sel may be changed Overload Retention Testpoint 1 Sel param 234 Testpoint 1 Data param 235 Enable 629 a Disable SES ot 1 Default setting Overspeed Overspeed Limit is a user programmable value that allows operation at maximum speed but also provides an overspeed band that will allow a speed regulator such as encoder feedback or slip compensation to increase the output frequency above maximum speed
255. ntrol 1 The PI Loop Running to Stop Jogging enabled Signal Loss s Enabled ge UE Ae dl A I l l l Enabled Status MW Digital Input is Reflected Di Bit 6 A Digital Input The Configured in PI Status PI Configuration is Configured Digital Input Bit0 1 to PI Enable is Closed The drive must be running for the PI loop to be enabled The loop will be disabled when the drive is ramping to a stop unless Stop Mode is configured in PI Configuration jogging or the signal loss protection for the analog input s is sensing a loss of signal If a digital input has been configured to PI Enable two events are required to enable the loop the digital input must be closed AND bit 0 of the PI Control parameter must be 1 If no digital input is configured to PI Enable then only the Bit 0 1 condition must be met If the bit is permanently set to a 1 then the loop will become enabled as soon as the drive goes into run PI Enabled E HERR E HER _ Cl pp oan LEET p CG a i EE HH LECHE PHI lue PI Output jin iB E n e HU EH Men AAA LLL Wa Spd Cmd l J
256. ntrol 15 position of the catalog number string equals C or D Consult the factory when using an auxiliary power supply in these instances Use of an auxiliary power supply to keep the drive control logic up when the main AC power is removed requires the use of some type of AC line monitoring as well as control of the Precharge Enable signal Consult the factory for additional guidance Publication 20B UM002C EN P 1 10 Installation Wiring Power Terminal Block Refer to Figure 1 3 for typical locations Table 1 D Power Terminal Block Specifications Wire Size Range Torque No Name Frame Description Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended PowerTerminal 0 amp 1 Inputpowerand 40mm 0 5 mm2 17N m 0 8N m Block motor connections 10 AWG 22 AWG 15 Ib in 7 Ib in 2 Input power and 10 0 mm 0 8mm 1 7 N m 1 4 N m motor connections 6 AWG 18 AWG 15 Ib in 12 Ib in 3 Input power and 25 0 mm 2 5 mm 3 6N m 1 8N m motor connections 3 AWG 14 AWG 32 Ib in 16 Ib in BR1 2 terminals 10 0 mm 10 8 mm 1 7N m 1 4 N m 6AWG 18 AWG 15 Ib in 12 Ibin 4 Input power and 35 0 mm 10 0 mm 4 0N m 4 0 N m motor connections 1 0 AWG 8 AWG 35Ib in 35 Ib in 5 Input power BR1 50 0 mm 4 0 mm zeng 2 DC DC and 1 0 AWG 12 AWG 480V motor connections 10
257. ntrol functions except for stop rem KE E SI SS Q Q Q Q S xixix ix x x x x x x 1 1 1 1 1 1 gai Pads Control Maske 2 pits 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 y Reserved E E Bit S Factory Default Bit Values 5 amp 598 Logic Mask Act Read Only 276 E Indicates status of the logic mask for DPI ports When bit 15 is set network security is controlling the logic mask instead of Logic Mask Zo ASA AA Sy S Su 1 Control Permitted EE 3 87 6 E 3 y 1 o eegal Masked i x Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Inputs amp Outputs File 3 5 Parameter Name amp Description E ir See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 320 Anlg In Config 322 Selects the mode for the analog inputs E NAT Ge SIS 326 Zi SKY DCH wy 1 Current x x x x x x x x x x x x x x o0jo Z Hd 0 Voltage Ep EE x Reserved K EI Bit E Factory Default Bit Values o5 c e 2 321 Anlg In Sqr Root a lt Enables disables the square root function for each input Ee ele 979 X XIX X X X X X X X X X X X 0 0 eg XzHheservel pits 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R d Bit Factory Default Bit Values Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 52 File INPUTS amp OUTPUTS Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Analog In 1 Hi Default 10 000 Volt Analog In 2 Hi 10 000 Volt Sets the highest in
258. o factory default values Viewing and Editing Parameters LCD HIM Step Example Displays 1 In the Main Menu press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll to Parameter 2 Press Enter FGP File appears on the top line and the first three files appear below it 3 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through the files 4 Press Enter to select a file The groups in the file are displayed under it 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select a group and then a parameter The parameter value screen will appear 6 Press Enter to edit the parameter 7 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to change the value If desired press Sel to move from digit to digit letter to letter or bit to bit The digit or bit that you can change will be highlighted 8 Press Enter to save the value If you want to cancel a change press Esc 9 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through the parameters in the group or press Esc to return to the group list Numeric Keypad Shortcut Key s O O eS O Rap File Monitor Motor Control Speed Command F EP Group Motor Data Torq Attributes Volts per Hertz FG g Parameter Maximum Voltage Compensation FGP Maximum Freq 60 00 Hz 25 400 00 Par 55 FGP Par 55 90 00 Hz 25 400 00 If using a HIM with a numeric keypad press the ALT key and the key to access the parameter by typ
259. o screw latches shown in Figure 1 6 Slide the cassette out D Remove screws securing cassette cover to gain access to the boards Figure 1 6 PowerFlex 700 Typical Cassette amp I O Terminal Blocks UO Terminal Blocks Table 1 H I O Terminal Block Specifications Wire Size Range Torque No Name Description Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended O Cassette Removable I O Cassette 1 0 Terminal Signal amp control 2 1 mm 0 30mm 0 6 N m 0 6 N m Block connections 14 AWG 22 AWG 5 2 Ib in 5 2 Ib in Encoder Encoder power amp signal 0 75 mm 0 196 mm2 0 6N m 0 6 N m Terminal Block connections 18 AWG 24 AWG 5 2 Ib in 5 2 Ib in II Maximum minimum that the terminal block will accept these are not recommendations Publication 20B UM002C EN P A c o ojo Aloin Installation Wiring 1 19 Figure 1 7 UO Terminal Designations oz Uo 23 SS No Signal A Description co Analog In 1 LA 2 Isolated 3 bipolar differential 10V 0 20 320 Analog In 1 LO mA 11 bit amp sign For 0 20 mA a jumper 327 Analog In 2 CH must be installed at terminals 17 amp 18 or Analog In 2 4 0 19 amp 20 88k ohm input impedance when configured for volt amp 95 3 ohm for current Pot Common For and 10V pot refe
260. ocess PI 3 23 40 Motor Type Motor Data 3 9 130 PI Prop Gain Process PI 3 23 41 Motor NP Volts Motor Data 3 9 131 PI Lower Limit Process PI 3 23 42 Motor NP FLA Motor Data 3 9 132 PI Upper Limit Process PI 3 23 43 Motor NP Hertz Motor Data 3 9 133 PI Preload Process PI 3 23 44 Motor NP RPM Motor Data 3 9 134 PI Status Process PI 3 24 45 Motor NP Power Motor Data 3 9 135 PI Ref Meter Process PI 3 24 46 Mtr NP Pwr Units Motor Data 3 9 136 PI Fdback Meter Process PI 3 24 47 Motor OL Hertz Motor Data 3 10 137 PI Error Meter Process PI 3 24 48 Motor OL Factor Motor Data 3 10 138 PI Output Meter Process PI 3 24 49 Motor Poles Motor Data 3 10 139 PI BW Filter Process PI 3 24 53 Motor Cntl Sel Torq Attributes 3 10 140 141 Accel Time X Ramp Rates 3 26 54 Maximum Voltage Torq Attributes 3 10 142 143 Decel Time X Ramp Rates 3 26 55 Maximum Freq Torq Attributes 3 10 145 DB While Stopped Stop Brake Modes 3 28 56 Compensation Torq Attributes 3 11 146 S Curve Ramp Rates 3 26 57 Flux Up Mode Torq Attributes 3 11 147 Current Lmt Sel Load Limits 3 26 58 Flux Up Time Torq Attributes 3 11 148 Current Lmt Val Load Limits 3 27 59 SV Boost Filter Torq Attributes 3 11 149 Current Lmt Gain Load Limits 3 27 61 Autotune Torq Attributes 3 12 150 Drive OL Mode Load Limits 3 27 62 IR Voltage Drop Torq Attributes 3 12 151 PWM Frequency Load Limits 3 27 63 Flux Current Ref Torq Attributes 3 12 152 Droop RPM FLA Load L
261. oil well application Disable 0 Disables oil well parameters Pump Jack 1 Sets parameters based on Pump Jack type oil well PC Oil Well 2 Sets parameters based on Progressive Cavity type Pumps Gearbox Rating Sets the gearbox rating Gearbox Sheave Sets the Sheave diameter on the Gearbox Gearbox Ratio Specifies the nameplate gear ratio Motor Sheave Sets the sheave diameter on the motor Total Gear Ratio Displays the calculated total gear ratio as follows Gearbox Sheave x Gearbox Ratio Motor Sheave DB Resistor Calculates the negative torque maximum available from the dynamic brake resistor Publication 20B UM002C EN P Values Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Min Max Units Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max 0 Resume 0 Resume 1 Fault Drive 20 00 Inch 0 25 200 00 Inch 0 01 Inch 500 0 FtLb 0 0 3000 0 FtLb 0 1 FtLb 0 0 RPM 0 0 199 0 RPM 0 1 RPM 300 0 RPM 200 0 600 0 RPM 0 1 RPM 0 Disable Disable 0 1 Pump Jack 2 DC Oil Well 640 0 Kin 16 0 2560 0 Kin 0 1 Kin 0 25 Inch 0 25 100 00 Inch 0 01 Inch
262. on Publication 20B UM002C EN P 1 0 Wiring Examples continued Installation Wiring 1 23 Input Output Connection Example Required Parameter Changes Analog Output e Configure with Parameter 340 10V 0 20 mA Bipolar e Select Source Value 10V Unipolar shown Parameter 380 Digital Out1 Sel e Adjust Scaling Parameters 343 344 2 Wire Control e Disable Digital Input 1 Non Reversing 24V DC internal supply Stop Run Parameter 361 0 Unused e Set Digital Input 2 Parameter 362 7 Run e Set Direction Mode Parameter 190 0 Unipolar 2 Wire Control Reversing External supply Neutral 115V Common 424V 25 e Set Digital Input 1 Parameter 361 8 Run Forward Run Fwd SA O Board dependent Io e Set Digital Input 2 B Parameter 362 9 Run Tuner Reverse 3 Wire Control e No Changes Required Internal supply 3 Wire Control External supply UO Board dependent Requires 3 wire functions only Digital In1 Sel Using 2 wire selections will cause atype 2 alarm page 4 10 Neutral 115V Common 24V Stop Lang Start e No Changes Required Digital Input PLC Output Card Board dependent Neutral O Common 10k Ohm 2 Watt e No Changes Required Digital Output Relays two at terminals 14 16 sh
263. ond Environment Industrial 1 First Environment Restricted Distribution Any Drive and Option Any Drive and Option Motor cable limited to 30 m 98 ft for Filter may be required for motor cable lengths installations without additional external greater than 150 m 492 ft line filters t External filters for First Environment installations and increasing motor cable lengths in Second Environment installations are available Roxburgh models KMFA RF3 for UL installations and MIF or Schaffner FN3258 and FN258 models are recommended Refer to Table 1 K and http www deltron emcon com and http www mtecorp com USA or http www schaffner com respectively Table 1 K PowerFlex 700 Recommended Filters Manufacturer Class Manufacturer Class Part A B Part A B Manufacturer Frame Number Meters Meters Number Meters Meters Deltron 0 KMF318A 2 100 MIF316 150 1 KMF325A 150 2 KMF350A 200 150 SS 2 w o DC CM KMF350A 176 150 Capacitor 3 KMF370A 150 100 3 w o DC CM KMF370A 150 100 Capacitor Schaffner 0 FN3258 16 45 150 1 FN3258 30 47 150 2 FN3258 42 47 50 50 2 w o DC CM FN3258 42 47 150 150 2 i Capacitor 3 FN3258 75 52 100 100 3 w o DC CM FN3258 75 52 150 150 Capacitor 1 Use of these filters assumes that the drive is mounted in an EMC enclosure Publicat
264. ons 0 No Action amp Alarm is exceeded Note only active with 1 Goto Preset1 ZS PC pump applications see param 641 5 634 TorgAlarm Dwell Default 0 0 Secs Sets the time that the torque must Min Max 0 0 60 0 Secs exceed TorgAlarm Level before Units 0 1 Secs TorgAlarm Action takes place Note only active with PC pump applications see param 641 635 TorgAlrm Timeout Default 0 0 Secs Sets the amount of time a Torque Alarm Min Max 0 0 600 0 Secs can be active until timeout action begins Units 0 1 Secs Note only active with PC pump applications see param 641 Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 62 Group File No 636 637 638 639 640 641 Oil Well Pump 642 643 644 645 646 647 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions TorgAlrm TO Act Sets the drive action when TorgAlrm Timeout is exceeded Note only active with PC pump applications see p 641 PCP Pump Sheave Specifies the pump sheave diameter Max Rod Torque Sets the desired maximum torque on the polished rod in a PCP oil well application Min Rod Speed Sets the minimum speed for the polished rod in a PCP oil well application Max Rod Speed Sets the maximum speed for the polished rod in a PCP oil well application Oil Well Pump Sel Selects the type of
265. or 15 seconds To guard against personal injury and or equipment damage this test should not be performed if either of the above conditions are considered unacceptable by the user 7 Setthe following parameters as shown No Wen ee We 053 Motor Cnt Gell 4 FVC Vector 080 Feedback Select 3 Encoder 061 Autotune 2 Rotate Tune Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 7 8 Start the drive and run the motor in the desired direction Parameters 062 063 064 amp 121 will be updated Inertia AutoTune Test 9 Set Inertia Autotune parameter 067 to 1 Inertia Tune 10 Press Start and run the motor in the direction desired Parameters 445 446 and 450 will be updated 11 Set Speed Desired BW parameter 449 to desired setting 12 Set up is complete check for proper operation Drive Setup TorqProve with Encoder To Enable TorqProve with an encoder bit 0 of TorqProve Cnfg parameter 600 must be set to 1 Once this is set a Type 2 alarm will be active until the following settings are entered No Name Value Notes 053 Motor Cntl Sel 4 FVC Vector 080 Feedback Select 3 Encoder 412 Motor Fdbk Type 1 Quad Check Encoderless TorqProve To Enable Encoderless TorqProve both bits 0 and 1 of TorqProve Cnfg parameter 600 must be set to 1 Once this is set a Type 2 alarm will be active until the following settin
266. or applications where proper coordination between motor control and a mechanical brake is required Prior to releasing a mechanical brake the drive will check motor output phase continuity and verify proper motor control torque proving The drive will also verify that the mechanical brake has control of the load prior to releasing drive control brake proving After the drive sets the brake motor movement is monitored to ensure the brakes ability to hold the load TorqProve can be operated with an encoder or encoderless TorgProve functionality with an encoder includes e Torque Proving includes flux up and last torque measurement e Brake Proving e Brake Slip feature slowly lowers load if brake slips fails e Float Capability ability to hold full torque at zero speed e Micro Positioning e Fast Stop e Speed Deviation Fault Output Phase Loss Fault Encoder Loss Fault Encoderless TorqProve functionality includes e Torque Proving includes flux up and last torque measurement e Brake Proving e Micro Positioning e Fast Stop e Speed Deviation Fault Output Phase Loss Fault Important Brake Slip detection and Float capability ability to hold load at zero speed are not available in encoderless TorqProve cause personal injury and or equipment damage Loads must always be controlled by the drive or a mechanical brake Parameters 600 612 are designed for lifting torque proving applications It is the responsibility of the e
267. or other examples Lifting Torque Proving Application Programming The PowerFlex 700 lifting application is mainly influenced by parameters 600 through 611 in the Torque Proving group of the Application file Figure C 3 and the paragraphs that follow describe programming Figure C 3 Torque Proving Flow Diagram Operator Run Run Commands Command Command Released Run can be initiated anytime Time gt gt ch hl o l J i Brk Set Time Brk Release Time ZeroSpdFloatTime Parameter 604 Parameter 605 Parameter 607 Drive Torque Brake Float Brake Brake Actions Prove Initiated Released Initiated Set Slip Test All times between Drive Actions are programmable and can be made very small i e Brake Release Time can be 0 1 seconds Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 9 Torque Proving When the drive receives a start command to begin a lifting operation the following actions occur 1 The drive first performs a transistor diagnostic test to check for phase to phase and phase to ground shorts A failure status from either of these tests will result in a drive fault and the brake relay will NOT be energized brake remains set The drive will then provide the motor with flux as well as perform a check for current flow through all three motor phases This ensures that torque will be delivered to the load when the mechanical brake is released When torque proving is enabled open phase loss det
268. or the condition is true e Numeric Parameters These parameters have a single numerical value i e 0 1 Volts The example on the following page shows how each parameter type is presented in this manual Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 2 Programming and Parameters 0000 kJ a eo 2 ts 29 o ir Parameter Name amp Description Values a 198 Load Frm Usr Set Default 0 Ready 199 Loads a previously saved set of Options 0 Ready L parameter values from a selected user 1 UserSet 1 o amp set location in drive nonvolatile memory 2 UserSet2 to active drive memory 3 User Set 3 216 Dig In Status Read Only 361 arr thru Status of the digital inputs 366 2 E fb tv gt S 1 Input Present X XIX X X X X X x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 Z plis i413 t2lit io 9 8 7 6 5 4 8 2 1 O w Rened resent Bit 434 Torque Ref B Mult Default 1 0 053 E Defines the value of the multiplier for the Min Max 32767 0 eg Torque Ref B Sel selection Units 0 1 No Description File Lists the major parameter file category Group Lists the parameter group within a file No Parameter number Note that all parameters in the PowerFlex 700VC are 32 bit 9 Parameter value cannot be changed until drive is stopped Parameter only displayed when Motor Cntl Sel is set to 4 Par
269. ork if connected NETB Bed Status of secondary network if connected Publication 20B UM002C EN P Name Power Troubleshooting 4 3 Precharge Board LED Indications Precharge Board LED indicators are found on Frame 5 amp 6 drives The LEDs are located above the Line Type jumper shown in Figure 1 2 Color Green State Steady ligue l1 Description ndicates when precharge board power supply is operational Alarm Yellow JO Oo E WON Flashing Number in indicates flashes and associated alarm Low line voltage lt 90 Very low line voltage lt 50 Low phase one phase lt 80 of line voltage Frequency out of range or asymmetry line sync failed Low DC bus voltage triggers ride through operation Input frequency momentarily out of range 40 65 Hz DC bus short circuit detection active Fault 1 An alarm condition a Red Flashing 2 4 Number in indicates flashes and associated fault DC bus short Udc lt 2 after 20 ms Line sync failed or low line Uac lt 50 Unom utomatically resets when the condition no longer exists 2 A fault indicates a malfunction that must be corrected and can only be reset after cycling power HIM Indication The LCD HIM also provides visual notification of a fault or alarm condition Condition Display Drive is indicating a fault The LCD HIM immediately reports the fault condition b
270. orque Ref XLo 429 433 Torq Attributes 3 13 ScaleX In Value 476 494 Scaled Blocks 3 45 Torque Ref X Sel 427 431 Torq Attributes 3 18 ScaleX Out Hi 479 497 Scaled Blocks 3 45 Torque Setpoint 435 Torq Attributes 3 14 ScaleX Out Lo 480 498 Scaled Blocks 3 45 Torque Setpoint2 438 Torq Attributes 3 14 ScaleX Out Value 481 499 Scaled Blocks 3 45 Total Gear Ratio 646 Oil Well Pump 3 62 Shear Pin Time 189 Power Loss 3 33 Total Inertia 450 Speed Regulator 3 26 Skip Freq Band 87 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 18 Trim Setpoint 116 Speed Trim 3 21 Skip Frequency 1 3 84 86 Spd Mode A Limits 3 18 Trim Hi 119 Speed Trim 3 21 Sleep Level 182 Restart Modes 3 32 Trim In Select 117 Speed Trim 3 21 Sleep Time 183 Restart Modes 3 32 Trim Lo 120 Speed Trim 3 21 Sleep Wake Mode 178 RestartModes 3 31 Trim Out Select 118 Speed Trim 3 21 Sleep Wake Ref 179 Restart Modes 3 32 Units Traveled 701 ProfSetup Status 3 65 Slip Comp Gain 122 Slip Comp 3 21 Vel Override 711 ProfSetup Status 3 66 Slip RPM FLA 121 Slip Comp 3 21 Voltage Class 202 Drive Memory 3 36 Slip RPM Meter 123 Slip Comp 3 21 Wake Level 180 Restart Modes 3 32 Spd Dev Band 602 Torq Proving 3 60 Wake Time 181 Restart Modes 3 32 Spd Fdbk No Filt 21 Metering 3 8 Write Mask Act 597 Security 3 50 SpdBand Integrat 603 Torg Proving 3 60 Write Mask Cfg 596 Security 3 50 Speed Desired BW 449 Speed Regulator 3 25 ZeroSpdFloatTime 605 Torq Proving 3 60 Speed Feedback 25 Me
271. orque Ref x Hi 3 13 Torque Ref x Lo 3 13 Torque Ref x Sel 3 13 Torque Setpoint1 3 14 Torque Setpoint2 3 14 Total Gear Ratio 3 62 Total Inertia 3 26 Trim 96 Setpoint 3 21 Trim Hi 3 21 Trim In Select 3 21 Trim Lo 3 21 Trim Out Select 3 21 Units Traveled 3 65 Vel Override 3 66 Voltage Class 3 36 Wake Level 3 32 Wake Time 3 32 Write Mask Act Write Mask Act 3 50 Write Mask Cfg 3 50 Zero SpdFloatTime 3 60 Params Defaulted Fault 4 7 PCP Pump Sheave 3 62 PE Ground 1 4 Phase Short Fault 4 7 Phase to Grnd Fault 4 7 P U UU UU U UUUuUUuuUuuu uu uuurt BW Filter 3 24 Config Conflict Alarm 4 12 Configuration 3 22 Control 3 22 Deriv Time 3 24 Error Meter 3 24 Fdback Meter 3 24 Feedback Hi 3 24 Feedback Lo 3 24 Feedback Sel 3 23 Integral Time 3 23 Lower Limit 3 23 Output Gain 3 25 Output Meter 3 24 Preload 3 23 Prop Gain 3 23 Ref Meter 3 24 Reference Hi 3 24 Reference Lo 3 24 Reference Sel 3 22 Setpoint 3 23 Index 11 PI Status 3 24 PI Upper Limit 3 23 Port 1 5 DPI Loss Fault 4 7 PORT LED 4 2 Ports DPI Type B 1 Pos Reg Filter 3 66 Pos Reg Gain 3 66 Pos Torque Limit 3 14 Pos Spd Prof Cmd 3 66 Pos Spd Prof Sts 3 65 Pos Spd Profile File 3 65 Potentiometer Wiring 1 22 Power Cables Wiring 1 5 Power Conditioning Input 1 3 Power Loss Alarm 4 12 Power Loss Fault 4 8 Power Loss Group 3 32 Power Loss Level 3 33 Power Loss Mode 3 32 Power Loss Ride Th
272. ot available on PowerFlex 700 Param Allows entry of a parameter number for viewing editing Publication 20B UM002C EN P HIM Overview B 3 Menu Structure Figure B 1 HIM Menu Structure User Display View Alarm Queue yvy Alarms gt Clr Alarm Queue Faults Fault Info Diagnostics status info gt Drive Status 1 View Fault Queue Device Items Drive Status 2 Clear Faults O Device Version gt PowerFlex 700 Drive Alarm 1 Clr Fault Queue HIM Version Product Data Drive Alarm 2 Reset Device Main Control Board Speed Ref Source Power Unit Board Start Inhibits Last Stop Source LCD Module Product Data Dig In Status LCD HIM Dig Out Status Control Board Drive Temp Keyboard Numeric Drive OL Count Motor OL Count 89 view selected through GI ED Y Basic Param Access Lvl Advanced e FGP FGP File Reserved Numbered List Changed Params View Links Press Y GBD to move between menu items Press to select a menu item PowerFlex 700 Device Select e Connected DPI Devices Him CopyCat xl Memory Storage e Device User Sets Drive User Set Reset To Defaults Save To User Set J Continue _ L Start Up 5 Stat Over Io E File 2 Name Group 1 Name FGP Parameter File 3 Name Group 2 Name Parameter Name Group 3 Name Parameter Name Parameter Name Been Device gt HIM Device HIM Delete HIM Set Load Frm Usr Set Activ
273. own in powered state with drive faulted See pages 1 19 Zt Fault NOT Fault Z NOT Run e Select Source to Activate Parameters 380 384 Enable Input 1 Important Programming inputs for 2 wire control deactivates all H e Configure with parameter 366 For dedicated hardware Enable Remove Jumper J10 see 1 21 M Start buttons unless parameter 192 Save HIM Ref bit 1 Manual Mode 1 This will allow HIM to control Start and Jog Publication 20B UM002C EN P 1 24 Installation Wiring Reference Control Auto Speed Sources The drive speed command can be obtained from a number of different sources The source is determined by drive programming and the condition of the Speed Select digital inputs Auto Manual digital inputs or reference select bits of a command word The default source for a command reference all speed select inputs open or not programmed is the selection programmed in Speed Ref A Sel If any of the speed select inputs are closed the drive will use other parameters as the speed command source Manual Speed Sources The manual source for speed command to the drive is either the HIM requesting manual control see ALT Functions on page B 2 or the control terminal block analog input if a digital input is programmed to Auto Manual Changing Speed Sources The
274. pacitor D Bac o o BR2 f BRi DC T DC XSETSCCOPPERWIREORUYTORGUESE NTE ERW 7 Common Bus Drives wPrecharge Only use7sc E EH TORQUE ONLY y Y w PE TES RNa me Lolels d ECH OUTPUT H Publication 20B UM002C EN P gt Installation Wiring 1 13 Terminal Description Notes BRI DC Brake DB Resistor Connection Important Only one DB resistor BR2 DC Brake can be used with Frames 0 3 Connecting an internal A external resistor could cause damage DC DC Bus DC Input Brake Connections DC DC Bus PE PE Ground Refer to Figure 1 3 for location on 3 Frame drives PS AUX Auxiliary Control Voltage see Table 1 D PS AUX 4 Motor Ground Refer to Figure 1 3 for location on 3 Frame drives U U T1 To Motor V V T2 W W T3 R R L1 AC Line Input Power S S L2 Three Phase R S amp T T T L3 Single Phase R amp S Only Using Input Output Contactors Input Contactor Precautions ATTENTION A contactor or other device that routinely disconnects and reapplies the AC line to the drive to start and stop the motor can cause drive hardware damage The drive is designed to use control input signals that will start and stop the motor If an input device is used oper ation must not exceed one cycle per minute or drive dam
275. peed 1 100 Discrete Speeds 3 20 PI Error Meter 137 Process PI 3 24 Jog Speed 2 108 Discrete Speeds 3 20 PI Fdback Meter 136 Process PI 3 24 Kf Speed Loop 447 Speed Regulator 3 25 PI Feedback Hi 462 Process PI 3 24 Ki Speed Loop 445 Speed Regulator 3 25 PI Feedback Lo 463 Process PI 3 24 Kp Speed Loop 446 Speed Regulator 3 25 PI Feedback Sel 128 Process PI 3 23 Language 201 Drive Memory 3 35 PI Integral Time 129 Process PI 3 23 Last Stop Source 215 Diagnostics 3 39 PI Lower Limit 131 Process PI 3 23 Load Frm Uer Set 198 Drive Memory 3 35 PI Output Gain 464 Process PI 3 25 Load Loss Level 187 Power Loss 3 33 PI Output Meter 138 Process PI 3 24 Load Loss Time 188 Power Loss 3 33 PI Preload 138 Process PI 3 23 Local Mask 285 Masks A Owners 3 48 PI Prop Gain 130 Process PI 3 23 Local Owner 297 Masks amp Owners 3 49 PI Ref Meter 135 Process PI 3 24 Logic Mask 276 Masks amp Owners 3 47 PI Reference Hi 460 Process PI 3 24 Security 3 51 PI Reference Lo 461 Process PI 3 24 Logic Mask Act 598 Security 3 51 PI Reference Sel 126 Process PI 3 22 Man Ref Preload 193 HIM Ref Config 3 34 PI Setpoint 127 Process PI 3 23 Marker Pulse 421 Speed Feedback 3 16 PI Status 134 Process PI 3 24 Maximum Freq 55 Torq Attributes 3 10 PI Upper Limit 132 Process PI 3 23 Maximum Speed 82 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 17 Port Mask Act 595 Security 3 50 Maximum Voltage 54 Torq Attributes 3 10 Pos Reg Filter 718 ProfSetup Status 3 66 Publication 20B UM002C
276. per Limit PES Units 0 1Hz 0 196 Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 24 Programming and Parameters Uo d Parameter Name amp Description s Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 134 PI Status Read Only 124 Status of the Process PI regulator CH RE ANNY 1 Condition True X XIX X XIXIX X XIX X x 0 0 0 0 a dn pits 14 18 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EM s Bit 135 PI Ref Meter Default Read Only 124 Present value of the Pl reference signal Min Max 100 0 ae Units 0 1 LIS 136 PI Fdback Meter Default Read Only 124 Present value of the Pl feedback signal Min Max 100 0 A Units 0 1 137 PI Error Meter Default Read Only 124 Present value of the PI error Min Max 200 0 Hs Units 0 1 a 138 PI Output Meter Default Read Only 124 Present value of the PI output Min Max 800 0 He Units 0 1 Ex 139 PI BW Filter Default 0 0 Radians 137 D Provides filter for Process PI error signal Min Max 0 0 240 0 Radians a Ei The output of this filter is displayed in PI Units 0 1 Radians Error Meter Zero will disable the filter 459 PI Deriv Time Default 0 00 Secs 9 Refer to formula below Min Max 0 00 100 00 Secs dpi Error Units 0 01 Secs Plout KD Sec x d Sec 460 PI Reference Hi Default 100 096 Scales the upper value of PI Reference Min Max 100 0 Sel
277. portant 0 20mA operation requires a jumper at terminals 17 amp 18 or 19 amp 20 Drive damage may occur if jumper is not installed These inputs outputs are dependant on a number of parameters see Related Parameters Differential Isolation External source must be maintained at less than 160V with respect to PE Input provides high common mode immunity Contacts in unpowered state Any relay programmed as Fault or Alarm will energize pick up when power is applied to drive and deenergize drop out when a fault or alarm exists Relays selected for other functions will energize only when that condition exists and will deenergize when condition is removed 150 mA maximum Load Not present on 115V versions A 10k ohm 2 watt burden resistor must be installed on each digital input when using a triac type device The resistor is installed between each digital input and neutral common Publication 20B UM002C EN P 1 20 Installation Wiring Encoder Terminal Block Table 1 1 Enco
278. process without external control devices The PI function allows the microprocessor of the drive to follow a single process control loop The PI function reads a process variable input to the drive and compares it to a desired setpoint stored in the drive The algorithm will then adjust the output of the PI regulator changing drive output frequency to try and make the process variable equal the setpoint It can operate as trim mode by summing the PI loop output with a master speed reference Slip Adder Linear Ram Spd Ref Jee See Spd Cmd PI Ref r7 Ltb Process PI L 4 Controller 1 PIFbk rg PI Enabled Speed Control Or it can operate as control mode by supplying the entire speed reference This method is identified as exclusive mode Slip Comp Slip Adder O gt Open Linear Ramp Loop Spd Ref E amp S Curve gt Spd Cmd Process PI DI Dei E Process PI PIFbk p PI Enabled Speed Control Controller Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 29 PI Enable The output of the PI loop can be turned on enabled or turned off disabled This control allows the user to determine when the PI loop is providing part or all of the commanded speed The logic for enabling the PI loop is shown below Drive Bit 0 of Drive Ramping Drive PI Co
279. put value to the analog Min Max 0 000 20 000mA input x scaling block 10 000V Anlg In Config parameter 320 defines if Units eed ad this input will be 10V or 0 20 mA 0 001 Volt Analog In 1 Lo Default 0 000 Volt Analog In 2 Lo 0 000 Volt Sets the lowest input value to the analog Min Max 0 000 20 000mA input x scaling block 10 000V Anlg In Config parameter 320 defines if Units oum this input will be 10V or 0 20 mA 0 001 Volt If set below 4 mA Analog In x Loss should be Disabled Analog In 1 Loss Default 0 Disabled Analog In 2 Loss 0 Disabled Selects drive action when an analog Options 0 Disabled signal loss is detected Signal loss is 1 Fault defined as an analog signal less than 1V 2 Hold Input or 2mA The signal loss event ends and 3 Set Input Lo normal operation resumes when the 4 Get Input Hi input signal level is greater than or equal 5 Goto Preset to 1 5V or 3mA 6 Hold OutFreq Anlg Out Config Selects the mode for the analog outputs LS RAY OS xc alse xe 91 Dese x Ec cc ee En 4 ie eser 87 63 419 210 ec ere Bit Factory Default Bit Values Anlg Out Absolut Selects whether the signed value or absolute value of a parameter is used before being scaled to drive the analog output V s SY Q 9 x xIxixix x ix 1 1
280. r Mo Re Units 0 0001 Hr Fault 5 Time Fault 6 Time Fault 7 Time Fault 8 Time The time between initial drive power up and the occurrence of the associated trip fault Can be compared to Power Up Marker for the time from the most recent power up Fault x Time Power Up Marker Time difference to the most recent power up A negative value indicates fault occurred before most recent power up A positive value indicates fault occurred after most recent power up To convert this value to the number days hours minutes and seconds the following formula may be used Fault x Time 24 hours of days remaining time Remaining Time x 24 hours of hours Remaining Time x 60 minutes of minutes remaining time Remaining Time x 60 seconds of seconds Result of days of hours of minutes of seconds Example 1909 2390 Hrs 1 Day 24 Hrs 79 551625 Days 0 551625 Days x 24 Hrs Day 13 239 Hrs 0 239 Hrs x 60 Min Hr 14 34 Min 0 34 Min x 60 Sec Min 20 4 Secs 3 43 Related 242 Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 M File Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 25 eo Alarm Config 1 XIXIXIJX XJX x x x x x x Pst 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Bit Description 26
281. r Freq Speed Feedback 3 15 420 Notch Filter K Speed Feedback 3 15 421 Marker Pulse Speed Feedback 3 16 422 Pulse In Scale Speed Feedback 3 16 423 Encoder Z Chan Speed Feedback 3 16 427 431 Torque Ref X Sel Torq Attributes 3 13 428 432 Torque Ref X Hi Torg Attributes 3 13 429 433 Torque Ref X Lo Torq Attributes 3 13 430 Torq Ref A Div Torq Attributes 3 13 434 Torque Ref B Mult Torq Attributes 3 13 435 Torque Setpoint Torq Attributes 3 14 436 Pos Torque Limit Torq Attributes 3 14 437 Neg Torque Limit Torq Attributes 3 14 438 Torque Setpoint2 Torq Attributes 3 14 440 Control Status Torq Attributes 3 14 441 Mtr Tor Cur Ref Torg Attributes 3 14 445 Ki Speed Loop Speed Regulator 3 25 446 Kp Speed Loop Speed Regulator 3 25 447 Kf Speed Loop Speed Regulator 3 25 449 Speed Desired BW Speed Regulator 3 25 450 Total Inertia Speed Regulator 3 26 451 Speed Loop Meter Speed Regulator 3 26 454 Rev Speed Limit Speed Regulator 3 18 459 PI Deriv Time Process PI 3 24 460 PI Reference Hi Process PI 3 24 461 PI Reference Lo Process PI 3 24 462 PI Feedback Hi Process PI 3 24 463 PI Feedback Lo Process PI 3 24 464 PI Output Gain Process PI 3 25 476 494 ScaleX In Value Scaled Blocks 3 45 471 495 ScaleX In Hi Scaled Blocks 3 45 478 496 ScaleX In Lo Scaled Blocks 3 45 479 497 ScaleX Out Hi Scaled Blocks 3 45 480 498 ScaleX Out Lo Scaled Blocks 3 45 481 499 ScaleX Out Value Scaled Blocks 3 45 595 Port Mask Ac
282. r step types 722 Step 1 AccelTime Default 10 0 Secs 732 Step 2 AccelTime 742 Step 3 AccelTime n idi D 5808 752 Step 4 AccelTime 762 Step 5 AccelTime 772 Step 6 AccelTime 782 Step 7 AccelTime 792 Step 8 AccelTime 802 Step 9 AccelTime 812 Step 10 AccelTime 822 Step 11 AccelTime 832 Step 12 AccelTime 842 Step 13 AccelTime 852 Step 14 AccelTime 862 Step 15 AccelTime 872 Step 16 AccelTime This is the acceleration rate for the step Sets the time to ramp from zero to Maximum Speed File Group Related POS SPD PROFILE Profile Step 1 16 Publication 20B UM002C EN P File POS SPD PROFILE Profile Step 1 16 873 724 734 744 754 764 774 784 794 804 814 824 834 844 854 864 874 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Step 1 DecelTime Step 2 DecelTime Step 3 DecelTime Step 4 DecelTime Step 5 DecelTime Step 6 DecelTime Step 7 DecelTime Step 8 DecelTime Step 9 DecelTime Step 10 DecelTime Step 11 DecelTime Step 12 DecelTime Step 13 DecelTime Step 14 DecelTime Step 15 DecelTime Step 16 DecelTime This is the deceleration rate for the step Sets the time to ramp from Maximum Speed to zero Step 1 Value Step 2 Value Step 3 Value Step 4 Value Step 5 Value Step 6 Value Step 7 Value Step 8 Value Step 9 Value Step 10 Value Step 11 Val
283. rFlex 700 User Manual publication 20B UMO002 since the last release Manual Updates Change Page s General Maintenance Updates All Publication 20B UM002C EN P soc ii Summary of Changes Notes Publication 20B UM002C EN P Preface Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Overview Installation Wiring Start Up Programming and Parameters Troubleshooting Table of Contents Who Should Use this Manual P 1 What Is Not in this Manual P 1 ATEX Approved Drives amp Motors P 1 Reference Materials P 2 Manual Conventions P 2 Drive FBT EE P 3 Generalibrecautionsee a ree P 3 Catalog Number Explanation P 5 Opening the Cover yee 1 1 Mounting Considerations 1 2 AC Supply Source Considerations 1 2 General Grounding Requirements 1 4 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 1 5 Rowen Witin teers ees e cs ron 1 5 Using Input Output Contactors 1 13 Disconnecting MOVs and CM Capacitors 1 14 HEEMWEE 1 17 Reference Control E 1 24 Auto Manual Examples 1 25 Lifting Torque Proving 1 26 Using PowerFlex Drives w Regen Units 1 26 Common Bus Precharge Notes 1 27 EMELIE 1 27 Prepare For Drive Start Up 2 1 Status Indicators ee ee e E Ne 2 2 Start Up Routines 2 3 Running S M A R T San 2 5 Running an Assisted Start Up 2 5 About Parametersa m
284. rage Temp all const 40 to 70 degrees C 40 to 158 degrees F Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere Relative Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Shock 15G peak for 11ms duration 1 0 ms Vibration 0 152 mm 0 006 in displacement 1G peak Sound Fan Sound Note Sound pressure level is Frame Speed Level measured at 2 meters 0 30CFM 58 dB 1 30 CFM 59 dB 2 50 CFM 57 dB 3 120 CFM 61 dB 4 190 CFM 59 dB 5 200 CFM 71 dB 6 300 CFM 72 dB Voltage Tolerance See page C 40 for full power and operating range Input Frequency Tolerance 47 63 Hz Input Phases Three phase input provides full rating for all drives Single phase operation provides 50 of rated current The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or 18 pulse in a configured package Refer to page 1 7 Displacement Power Factor 0 98 across entire speed range Efficiency 97 5 at rated amps nominal line volts Max Short Circuit Rating 200 000 Amps symmetrical Actual Short Circuit Rating Method Determined by AIC rating of installed fuse circuit breaker Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency Ratings apply to
285. rameter Name amp Description Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions 270 DPI Baud Rate 9 Sets the baud rate for attached drive peripherals When changing this value the drive must be reset for the change to take affect 271 Drive Logic Rei The final logic command resulting from the combination of all DPI and discrete inputs This parameter has the same structure as the product specific logic command received via DPI and is used in peer to peer communications File Group Values Default Options COMMUNICATION Comm Control 272 273 1 500 kbps 0 125 kbps 1 500 kbps Read Only 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x Reserved Description No Command Man Mode Ref A Auto Ref B Auto Preset 3 Auto Preset 4 Auto Preset 5 Auto Preset 6 Auto Preset 7 Auto Drive Ref Rslt Present frequency reference scaled as a DPI reference for peer to peer communications The value shown is the value prior to the accel decel ramp and the corrections supplied by slip comp PI etc Drive Ramp Rslt Present frequency reference scaled as a DPI reference for peer to peer communications The value shown is the value after the accel decel ramp but prior to any corrections supplied by slip comp Pl etc Anna EECH EH CH iOO MOO C C c C Publication 20B UM002C EN P Default Un
286. ration C 1 External Brake Resistor C 3 Lifting Torque Proving C 4 Limit Switches for Digital Inputs C 11 Minimum Speed 04 C 12 Motor Control Technology C 12 Motor Overload 0 C 14 Motor Overload Memory Retention C 16 Overspeed eege ven pes C 16 Position Indexer Speed Profiler C 17 Power Loss Ride Through C 27 Process PID C 28 Reverse Speed Limit C31 Skip Frequency ENEE C 32 Sleep Wake Mode C 34 Start At Bowen C 36 Stop Mngde sas sc rae ges ER Y C 36 Voltage Tolerance C 40 Genetal re svp E bh es D 1 Motor Requirements D 2 Drive Wiring D 3 Drive Configuration D 3 Start Up Periodic Testing Requirement Preface Overview The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the basic information needed to install start up and troubleshoot the PowerFlex 700 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive with Vector Control For information on See page Who Should Use this Manual Bi What Is Not in this Manual P 1 Reference Materials P 2 ATEX Approved Drives amp Motors P 1 Manual Conventions P 2 Drive Frame Sizes P 3 General Precautions P 3 Catalog Number Explanation P 5 Who Should Use this Manual This manual is intended for qualified personnel You must be able to program and operate Adjustable Frequency AC
287. rations PowerFlex 700 drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering up to a maximum of 200 000 rms symmetrical amperes and a maximum of 690 volts Publication 20B UM002C EN P Installation Wiring 1 3 ATTENTION To guard against personal injury and or equipment damage caused by improper fusing or circuit breaker selection use only the recommended line fuses circuit breakers specified in Appendix A If a system ground fault monitor RCD is to be used only Type B adjustable devices should be used to avoid nuisance tripping Unbalanced Ungrounded Resistive or B Phase Grounded Distribution Systems If phase to ground voltage will exceed 125 of normal line to line voltage or the supply system is ungrounded refer to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives pub DRIVES INO01 ATTENTION PowerFlex 700 drives contain protective MOVs and common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground These devices must be disconnected if the drive is installed on an ungrounded resistive or B phase grounded distribution system See page 1 14 for jumper locations Input Power Conditioning Certain events on the power system supplying a drive can cause component damage or shortened product life These conditions are divided into 2 basic categories 1 All drives The power system has power factor correction capacitors switched in and out of the system either by the user or by the power company
288. re 1 Reprogram Motor NP FLA with the correct motor nameplate value 2 Repeat Autotune Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition 1 Check jumper Replace Main Control Board m Cycle power Replace Main Control Board Cycle power Replace Main Control Board wpa we gt Publication 20B UM002C EN P 4 6 Troubleshooting Fault 2 Hardware PTC 18 Heatsink OvrTemp 8 HW OverCurrent 12 Incompat MCB PB 106 O Comm Loss 121 O Failure 122 nput Phase Loss 17 R Volts Range 77 IXo VoltageRange 87 Load Loss 15 Motor Overload 7 Motor Thermistor 16 NVS I O 109 Checksum Publication 20B UM002C EN P Description Motor PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient Overtemp Heatsink temperature exceeds 100 of Drive Temp or is less than approximately 19 degrees C The drive output current has exceeded the hardware current limit Drive rating information stored on the power board is incompatible with the main control board UO Board lost communications with the Main Control Board 1 0 was detected but failed the powerup sequence The DC bus ripple has exceeded 8 preset level Calculate is the autotune default and the value determined by the autotune procedure for IR Drop Volts is not in the range of acceptable values Voltage calculated for motor inductive impedance exceeds 25 of Motor NP Volt
289. re If the application requires the drive to be disabled without software interpretation a dedicated hardware enable configuration can be utilized This is done by removing a jumper and wiring the enable input to Digital In 6 1 Remove the I O Control Cassette amp cover as described on page 1 18 2 Locate amp remove Jumper J10 on the Main Control Board see diagram 3 Re assemble cassette 4 Wire Enable to Digital In 6 see Figure 1 7 5 Verify that Digital In6 Sel parameter 366 is set to 1 Enable Publication 20B UM002C EN P 1 22 Installation Wiring UO Wiring Examples Input Output Connection Example Required Parameter Changes Potentiometer e Adjust Scaling Unipolar Speed Parameters 91 92 and 325 326 Reference e View Results 10k Ohm Pot Parameter 002 Recommended 2k Ohm Minimum Joystick Bipolar ei e Set Direction Mode Speed Reference 1 Parameter 190 1 Bipolar 10V Input e Adjust Scaling Parameters 91 92 and 325 326 e View Results Parameter 002 Analog Input 5 e Set Direction Mode Bipolar Speed Parameter 190 1 Bipolar Reference e Adjust Scaling 10V Input Parameters 91 92 and 325 326 e Vi
290. reased impedance of shielded cable may help extend the distance that the motor can be located from the drive without the addition of motor protective devices such as terminator networks Refer to Reflected Wave in Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives pub DRIVES INOOI Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated by the environment of the installation including temperature flexibility moisture characteristics and chemical resistance In addition a braided shield should be included and be specified by the cable manufacturer as having coverage of at least 75 An additional foil shield can greatly improve noise containment A good example of recommended cable is Belden 295xx xx determines gauge This cable has four 4 XLPE insulated conductors with a 100 coverage foil and an 85 coverage copper braided shield with drain wire surrounded by a PVC jacket Other types of shielded cable are available but the selection of these types may limit the allowable cable length Particularly some of the newer cables bundle 4 conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly with a foil shield This construction can greatly increase the cable charging current required and reduce the overall drive performance Unless specified in the individual distance tables as tested with the drive these cables are not recommended and their performance against the lead length limits supplied is not known See Table 1 B T
291. remember its location during power cycles or power loss unless the load is manually moved during power down conditions If this occurs simply reset the feature using the procedure above Figure C 4 Limit Switch Operation Stop Commanded Speed Normal Operating Speed Preset 1 Speed Slow this direction only ji Stop this direction Preset 1 Speed Slow Commanded Speed Normal Operating Speed only l j i i i V ii I i End Limit Decel Limit Decel Limit End Limit Switch Switch Switch Switch JI JI J JI J k b Ka Ka S C B A B C Minimum Speed Refer to Reverse Speed Limit on page C 31 Motor Control Technology Within the PowerFlex family there are several motor control technologies e Torque Producers e Torque Controllers e Speed Regulators Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 13 Torque Producers Volts Hertz This technology follows a specific pattern of voltage and frequency output to the motor regardless of the motor being used The shape of the V Hz curve can be controlled a limited amount but once the shape is determined the drive output is fixed to those values Given the fixed values each motor will react based on its own speed torque characteristics This technology is good for basic centrifugal fan pump operation and for most multi motor applications Torque production is generally good Sensorless Vector This techno
292. rences Analog Out 1 H Single ended bipolar current output is 340 Analog Out 1 not bipolar 10V 0 20mA 11 bit amp sign 347 Analog Out 2 Voltage mode limit current to5 mA Analog Out 2 Current mode max load is 400 ohms 0 HW PTC Input 1 1 8k ohm PTC Internal 3 32k ohm pull up 238 resistor 259 11 Digital Out 1 N C Fault Max Resistive Load 380 12 Digital Out 1 Common 240V AC 30V DC 1200VA 150W 391 13 Digital Out 1 N O 9 NOT Fault Max Current 5A Min Load 10 mA Ts DIGIe OU e E NDITIRUR 2 ACD SPA 105W E Dita ou 2 S Bu Max Current 3 5A Min Load 10mA 17 Current In Jumper Placing a jumper across terminals 17 amp 18 Analog In 1 18 or 19 amp 20 will configure that analog 19 Current In Jumper input for current 20 Analog In 2 21 10V Pot Reference 2k ohm minimum load 22 10V Pot Reference 23 HW PTC Input 2 See above 24 424NDC Drive supplied logic input power 25 Digital In Common 26 24V Common 9 Common for internal power supply 27 Digital In 10 Stop CF 115V AC 50 60 Hz Opto isolated 361 28 Digital In 2 Start Low State less than 30V AC 366 29 Digital In 3 Auto Man High State greater than 100V AC 5 7 mA 30 Digital In 4 Speed Sel 1 e Opts Geen TE 6 ow State less than S Diis d SE aware Sead High State greater than 20V DC 10 mA Enable see pg 1 21 DC Digital Input Impedance 21k ohm Im
293. rogrammable Controller Configurations Important Publication 20B UM002C EN P If block transfers are programmed to continuously write information to the drive care must be taken to properly format the block transfer If attribute 10 is selected for the block transfer values will be written only to RAM and will not be saved by the drive This is the preferred attribute for continuous transfers If attribute 9 is selected each program scan will complete a write to the drives non volatile memory EEprom Since the EEprom has a fixed number of allowed writes continuous block transfers will quickly damage the EEprom Do Not assign attribute 9 to continuous block transfers Refer to the individual communications adapter User Manual for additional details Supplemental Drive Information A 7 Logic Command Status Words Figure A 1 Logic Command Word Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description X Stop 0 Not Stop 1 Stop x Start Q Not Start 1 Start X Jog 0 Not Jog 1 Jog X Clear 0 Not Clear Faults Faults 1 Clear Faults Xx Direction 00 No Command 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Present Direction D Local 0 No Local Control Control 1 Local Control X MOP 0 Not Increment Increment 1 Increment X X Accel Rate 00 No Command 01 Use Accel Time 1 10 Use Accel Time 2 11
294. rough C 27 Power Loss Time 3 32 Power Terminal Block 1 11 Power Unit Fault 4 8 Power Wiring Access Panel 1 7 General 1 7 PowerFlex 700 Reference Manual P 1 Powering Up the Drive 2 1 Powerup Delay 3 30 PowerUp Marker 3 43 Precautions General P 3 Precharge 1 27 Precharge Active Alarm 4 12 Preferences Setting B 5 Preset Speed x 3 20 Process PI Group 3 22 Process PID C 28 Prof Step Cflct Alarm 4 12 Profile Step Group 3 67 ProfSetup Status Group 3 65 Programmable Controller Configurations A 6 Programming 3 1 PTC Conflict Alarm 4 12 PTC HW Value 3 8 Publications Reference P 2 Pulse In Loss Fault 4 8 Pulse In Scale 3 16 Pulse Input 1 20 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Index 12 Pulse Input Ref 3 20 PWM Frequency 3 27 Pwr Brd Chksum Fault 4 8 Pwr Brd Chksum2 4 8 PWR LED 4 2 R Ramp Rates Group 3 26 Ramped Speed 3 8 Rated Amps 3 8 Rated kW 3 8 Rated Volts 3 8 Ratings Drive A 9 Reference Control 1 24 Reference Manual P 1 Reference Mask 3 48 Reference Material P 2 Reference Owner 3 49 Regen Power Limit 3 27 Regenerative Units 1 26 Removing Cover 1 1 Repeated Start Stop 1 13 Replaced MCB PB Fault 4 8 Reset Meters 3 35 Reset to Defaults 3 35 B 4 Resistive Grounded Distribution Systems 1 14 Resistive Grounded Supply 1 3 Restart Modes Group 3 30 Rev Speed Limit 3 18 Reverse Speed Limit C 31 Rod Load Torque 3 61 Run Boost 3 14 S S Cur
295. rque Mod 181 Wake Time 90 93 Speed Ref X Sel 182 Sleep Level 91 94 Speed Ref X Hi 183 Sleep Time 92 95 Speed Ref X Lo 184 Power Loss Mode 96 TB Man Ref Sel 185 Power Loss Time 97 TB Man Ref Hi 186 Power Loss Level 98 TB Man Ref Lo 187 Load Loss Level 100 Jog Speed 1 188 Load Loss Time 101 107 Preset Speed X 189 Shear Pin Time 108 Jog Speed 2 190 Direction Mode 116 Trim Setpoint 192 Save HIM Ref 117 Trim In Select 193 Man Ref Preload 118 Trim Out Select 194 Save MOP Ref 119 Trim Hi 195 MOP Rate 120 Trim Lo 196 Param Access Lvl 121 Slip RPM FLA 197 Reset To Defalts 122 Slip Comp Gain 198 Load Frm Usr Set 124 PI Configuration 199 Save To User Set 125 PI Control 200 Reset Meters 126 PI Reference Sel 201 Language 127 PI Setpoint 202 Voltage Class 128 PI Feedback Sel 234 236 Testpoint X Sel 129 PI Integral Time 238 Fault Config 1 130 PI Prop Gain 240 Fault Clear 181 PI Lower Limit 241 Fault Clear Mode 132 PI Upper Limit 259 Alarm Config 1 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Parameter Record Number Parameter Name Setting Number Parameter Name Setting 261 Alarm Clear 478 496 ScaleX In Lo 270 DPI Baud Rate 479 497 ScaleX Out Hi 274 DPI Port Sel 480 498 ScaleX Out Lo 276 Logic Mask 596 Write Mask Cfg 277 Star
296. s Drive output torque current is below Load Loss Level for a time period greater than Load Loss time Internal electronic overload trip Enable Disable with Fault Config 1 on page 3 42 Thermistor output is out of range EEprom checksum error Action 1 Verify that maximum ambient temperature has not been exceeded 2 Check fan 3 Check for excess load 4 In cold ambient temperatures add space heaters Check programming Check for excess load improper DC boost setting DC brake volts set too high or other causes of excess current 1 Load compatible version files into drive 2 Frame 7 10 drives must have firmware version 4 009 or greater Check connector Check for induced noise Replace UO board or Main Control Board Replace Main Control Board Check incoming power for a missing phase blown fuse Re enter motor nameplate data Check for proper motor sizing Check for correct programming of Motor NP Volts parameter 41 3 Additional output impedance may be required 1 Verify connections between motor and load 2 Verify level and time requirements An excessive motor load exists Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by Motor NP FLA Verify that thermistor is connected 2 Motor is overheated Reduce load Cycle power and repeat function 2 Replace Main Control Board Pho Fault NVS UO Failure Output PhaseLoss O
297. s Verify system ground impedance follows proper grounding techniques Disable bus regulation and or add dynamic brake resistor and or extend deceleration time Refer to the Attention statement on page P 4 for further info Reduce load or extend Accel Time No fault displayed Used as a Power Up Marker in the Fault Queue indicating that the drive power has been cycled Motor did not come up to speed in the allotted time during autotune Requires differential encoder One of the 2 encoder channel signals is missing Both encoder channels changed state within one clock cycle Diagnostic code indicating a drive malfunction Uncouple load from motor Repeat Autotune Check Wiring Check motor rotation Check encoder pulses rotation etc Replace encoder Check for externally induced noise Replace encoder Cycle power Replace Main Control Board Contact Tech Support gt P N 3 No fault displayed Used as a marker in the Fault Queue indicating that the fault clear function was performed No fault displayed Used as a marker in the Fault Queue indicating that the clear queue function was performed The value for flux amps determined by the Autotune procedure exceeds the programmed Motor NP FLA A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Hardware enable is disabled jumpered high but logic pin is still low Gate array load error Dual port failu
298. s at Step x AccelTime to Step x Velocity in the direction of the sign of Step x Velocity The drive then decelerates at Step X DecelTime to zero The Step X Value is programmed to the desired time for the total time of the accel run and decel of the step Each step has a 1 second time programmed in Step X Dwell which is applied to the end of each step After the dwell time expires the profile transitions to the next step The absolute step is used to send the profile back to the home position This is done by programming Step 4 Value to zero Figure C 8 Time Example 350 50 e 5s 45 3 250 ZS 4 4 c 2 D s 150 a E S EI 35 F 2 lt 5s gt Fi 5 g 3 amp 13 33 53 73 93 113 133 153 50 25 E Note there is no At Position S 88 indication when using timed steps 20 9 S ur 15 250 o 10 5 Step 5 za Ke Step 3 Step 4 2 5 ZS tep S Step 1 Step 2 450 0 Time Encoder Speed 415 Profile Status 700 Units Traveled 701 Current Step Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 25 Step x Stepx Stepx Step x Step x Stepx Step x Step x Step Type Velocity AccelTime DecelTime Value Dwell Batch Next 1 Time 100 0 5 0 5 5 00 100 11 2 2 Time 200 0 5 0 5 5 00 100 1 3 3 Time 300 0 5 0 5 5 00 100 j1 4 4 Encoder Abs 400 0 5 0 5 0 00
299. s configured for Fast Stop and is enabled or TorqProve Setup parameter 601 bit 0 is enabled Last Stop Source Default Read Only Displays the source that initiated the Options 0 Pwr Removed most recent stop sequence It will be 1 5 DPI Port 1 5 cleared set to 0 during the next start 6 Reserved sequence 7 Digital In 8 Fault 9 Not Enabled 10 Sleep 11 Jog 12 Autotune 13 Precharge 3 39 Related I gt EE I o co IG I gt Ico IO IO Ka lO pra o o IN Ka lo IG o o A Ka lO lon o o iO Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 40 Programming and Parameters di Parameter Name amp Description ir See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 216 Dig In Status Read Only Status of the digital inputs 0 S 5 v SESS 1 Input Present x x x x x X X BAD plis 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 8 4 9 2 1 0 tria Bit 217 Dig Out Status Read Only Status of the digital outputs EE e S A AS Cee ZVS 1 Output Energized X XIXIX XIXI XIX XIX X X x 0 0 0 a i pisi 13 121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 taeog 9ed Bit 218 Drive Temp Default Read Only Present operating temperature of the Min Max 0 0 100 0 2 drive power section Units 0 1 E 5 219 Drive OL Count Default Re
300. s the lower value of the Adj Volt Min Max 100 0 of Drive Rated Select selection when the source is an Units Volts analog input 0 196 654 Adj Volt Preset1 Default 0 0 VAC 655 Adj Volt Preset2 Min Max 656 Adj Volt Preset3 ie E ee 657 Adj Volt Preset4 658 Adj Volt Preset5 659 Adj Volt Preset6 660 Adj Volt Preset7 Provides an internal fixed voltage command value that is available as a selection for Adj Volt Select 661 Min Adj Voltage Default 0 0 VAC Sets the low limit for the voltage Min Max 0 0 Drive Rated Volts reference when Motor Cntrl Sel is set to Units 0 1 VAC Adj Voltage 662 Adj Volt Command Default Read Only Displays the voltage value of the Min Max 0 0 Drive Rated Volts reference specified in Adj Volt Select Units 0 1 VAC Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 64 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description Group Related o ir ZS see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 663 MOP Adj VoltRate Default 1 0 V s Sets the rate for the MOP Min Max 0 1 100 0 V s Units 0 1 V s 669 Adj Volt TrimSel Default 2 Analog In 2 9 Selects the source of the voltage trim that Options 0 Reserved is added to or subtracted from the voltage 1 Analog In 1 reference 2 Analog In 2 3 6 Reserved 7 8 Not Used 9 MOP Level 10 Reserved 11 17 Preset Volt 1822 DPI Port 1 5
301. s using this conduit should be disabled This will help minimize the possible shock hazard from cross coupled motor leads Motor Cable Lengths Typically motor lead lengths less than 30 meters 100 feet are acceptable However if your application dictates longer lengths refer to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INO01 or the PowerFlex 700 Technical Data publication 20B TDO01 Cable Entry Plate Removal If additional wiring access is needed the Cable Entry Plate on 0 3 Frame drives can be removed Simply loosen the screws securing the plate to the chassis The slotted mounting holes assure easy removal Important Removing the Cable Entry Plate limits the maximum ambient temperature to 40 degrees C 104 degrees F Power Wiring Access Panel Removal Frame Removal Procedure Replace when wiring is complete 0 1 2 amp 6 Part of front cover see page 1 1 3 Open front cover and gently tap slide cover down and out 4 Loosen the 4 screws and remove 5 Remove front cover see page 1 1 gently tap slide panel up and out Single Phase Input Power The PowerFlex 700 drive is typically used with a three phase input supply Single phase operation of the drive is not currently rated under the UL508C listing Rockwell Automation has verified that single phase operation with output current derated by 50 of the three phase ratings identified on pages A 10 through A 15 will meet all s
302. s were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage Z Channel is selected as a pulse input and no signal is present The checksum read from the EEPROM does not match the checksum calculated from the EEPROM data The checksum read from the board does not match the checksum calculated Main Control Board was replaced and parameters were not programmed Encoderless TorqProve has been enabled but user has not read and understood application concerns of encoderless operation Programmed Current Lmt Val has been exceeded Enable Disable with Fault Config 1 on page 3 42 Microprocessor handshake error Microprocessor handshake error Drive output current has exceeded the 1ms current rating This rating is greater than the 3 second current rating and less than the hardware overcurrent fault level It is typically 200 250 of the drive continuous rating Difference between Commanded Speed and Encoder Speed has exceeded the level set in Spd Dev Band for a time period greater than Spd Band Integrat Action Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption 1 Check for damaged output transistors 2 Replace drive 1 Check wiring 2 Replace pulse generator Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive Cycle power to the drive 2 If problem persists replace drive
303. sed for end limit stops as many hoists require These inputs can be used with or without TorqProve enabled Decel Limit for Digital Inputs Decel Limit is enabled by selecting Decel Limit as one of the digital inputs in Digital In1 6 Select parameters 361 366 When this input is low opposite logic the speed reference command will change from the selected reference to the value in Preset Speed 1 parameter 101 The deceleration rate will be based on the active deceleration time This limit will be enforced only in the direction the drive was running when the switch was activated momentarily or continuously see B in Figure C 4 The opposite direction will still be allowed to run at the selected reference speed No speed limitation will occur between the limit switches A in Figure C 4 Two different switches can be connected in series to one digital input to provide a decel limit at both ends of the application i e lift conveyor etc With proper set up the drive will automatically apply the speed reduction based on the direction of the load even though only one digital input is being used See B in Figure C 4 End Travel Limit for Digital Inputs End Travel Limit is enabled by selecting End Limit as one of the digital inputs in Digital In1 6 Select A low at this input opposite logic will cause the drive to do a fast decel 0 1 sec and turn off This Stop limit will be enforced only
304. set Speed 1 12 Jog Reverse 9 Type 2 Alarms Some digital input 13 Stop Mode B 1 programming may cause conflicts that 14 Bus Reg Md B 156 will result in a Type 2 alarm Example 1517 Speed Sel 1 370 162 Digital In1 Sel set to 5 Start in 3 wire 18 Auto Manual 9 no control and Digital In2 Sel set to 7 19 Local 096 E Run in2 wire See Table 4 C for info on 20 Acc2 amp Dec2 E resolving this type of conflict 21 Accel 2 s 3 2 Spdtrq Mode 22 Decel 2 141 gt zn Mode 23 MOP Inc 2 14 Di ero Torque E 12 dk E 0 lo 1 SpdReg 24 MI Dee 195 oa O 1 0 Torque Reg 25 Excl Link 0 t Min Spd Trq 26 Pl Enable 1 0 0 Max Spd Trq 27 DI Hold 194 1 j SUM SPAT tq 28 PI Reset 29 Pwr Loss Lvl 1 1 1 Pos Spd Prof 30 Precharge En 12 380 3 When Digital Inx Sel is set to option 2 31 33 Spd Trq Sel1 3 2 124 Clear Faults the Stop button cannot be 34 Jog 2 used to clear a fault condition 35 PI Inver 4 Typical 3 Wire Inputs Only 3 wire 36 Torque Setpt 1 12 functions are allowed Including 2 wire 37 Fli MicroPos 11 12 selections will cause a type 2 alarm 38 Fast Stop 12 5 Typical 2 Wire Inputs Only 2 wire 39 Decel Limit functions can be chosen Including 40 End Limit 3 wire selections will cause a type 2 41 42 UserSet Sel1 2 13 alarm See Table 4 C for conflicts 43 Run Level 9 Auto Manual Ref
305. squared The output will decrease to zero at the rate determined by the programmed Maximum Freq and the programmed active Decel Time x 2 The reduction in output can be limited by other drive factors such as bus or current regulation 3 When the output reaches zero 3 phase drive output goes to zero off and the drive outputs DC voltage on the last used phase at the level programmed in DC Brake Level Par 158 This voltage causes a holding brake torque 4 DC voltage to the motor continues until a Start command is reissued or the drive is disabled 5 If a Start command is reissued DC Braking ceases and he drive returns to normal AC operation If an Enable command is removed the drive enters a not ready state until the enable is restored Fast Brake Output Voltage Time Stop Command This method uses drive output reduction to stop the load 1 On Stop the drive output will decrease according to the programmed pattern from its present value to zero at the rate determined by the programmed active Decel Time x This is accomplished by lowering the output frequency below the motor speed where regeneration will not occur This causes excess energy to be lost in the motor 2 The reduction in output can be limited by other drive factors such as bus or current regulation 3 When the output reaches very near zero DC brake will automatically be used to complete the stop then the output is shut off Publicatio
306. ssive Load Fault 4 5 External Brake Resistor C 3 F Factory Defaults Resetting to 3 35 B 4 Fan Pump Parameter Set 3 35 Fatal Faults Fault 4 5 Fault amp Alarm Types 4 1 Fault 1 Time 3 43 Fault Amps 3 41 Fault Bus Volts 3 41 Fault Clear 3 42 Fault Clear Mode 3 43 Fault Clr Mask 3 48 Fault Config x 3 42 Fault Descriptions 4 4 Fault Queue B 4 Fault Speed 3 40 Fault x Code 3 43 Faults Analog In Loss 4 4 Anlg Cal Chksum 4 4 Auto Rstrt Tries 4 4 AutoTune Aborted 4 4 Auxiliary Input 4 4 Cntl Bd Overtemp 4 4 Publication 20B UM002C EN P DB Resistance 4 4 Decel Inhibit 4 5 DPI Port 1 5 4 7 Drive Overload 4 5 Drive Powerup 4 5 Encoder Loss 4 5 Encoder Quad Err 4 5 Excessive Load 4 5 Fatal Faults 4 5 Faults Cleared 4 5 Fit QueueCleared 4 5 FluxAmpsRef Rang 4 5 Ground Fault 4 5 Hardware Fault 4 5 Hardware PTC 4 6 Heatsink OvrTemp 4 6 HW OverCurrent 4 6 UO Comm Loss 4 6 UO Failure 4 6 Incompat MCB PB 4 6 Input Phase Loss 4 6 IR Volts Range 4 6 IXo VoltageRange 4 6 Load Loss 4 6 Motor Overload 4 6 Motor Thermistor 4 6 NVS I O Checksum 4 6 NVS IO Failure 4 7 Output PhaseLoss 4 7 OverSpeed Limit 4 7 OverVoltage 4 7 Parameter Chksum 4 7 Params Defaulted 4 7 Phase Short 4 7 Phase to Grnd 4 7 Port 1 5 DPI Loss 4 7 Power Loss 4 8 Power Unit 4 8 Pulse In Loss 4 8 Pwr Brd Chksum 4 8 Pwr Brd Chksum2 4 8 Replaced MCB PB 4 8 See Manual 4 8 She
307. st Filter 59 Torq Attributes 3 11 PWM Frequency 151 Load Limits 3 27 TB Man Ref Hi 97 Speed Reference 3 20 Ramped Speed 22 Metering 3 8 TB Man Ref Lo 98 Speed Reference 3 20 Rated Amps 28 Drive Data 3 8 TB Man Ref Sel 96 Speed Reference 3 20 Rated kW 26 Drive Data 3 8 Testpoint X Data 235 237 Diagnostics 3 42 Rated Volts 27 Drive Data 3 8 Testpoint X Sel 234 236 Diagnostics 3 42 Reference Mask 280 Masks amp Owners 3 48 Torq Ref A Div 430 Torq Attributes 3 13 Reference Owner 292 Masks amp Owners 3 49 TorgAlarm Level 632 Oil Well Pump 3 61 Regen Power Limit 153 Load Limits 3 27 TorgAlarm Action 633 Oil Well Pump 3 61 Reset Meters 200 Drive Memory 3 35 TorgAlarm Dwell 634 Oil Well Pump 3 61 Reset To Defalts 197 Drive Memory 3 35 TorgAlrm Timeout 635 Oil Well Pump 3 61 Rev Speed Limit 454 Speed Regulator 3 18 TorgAlrm TO Act 636 Oil Well Pump 3 62 Rod Load Torque 631 Oil Well Pump 3 61 TorqLim SlewRate 608 Torq Proving 3 60 Run Boost 70 Volts per Hertz 3 14 TorgProve Cnfg 600 Torq Proving 3 59 S Curve 146 Ramp Rates 3 26 TorgProve Setup 601 Torq Proving 3 60 Save HIM Ref 192 HIM Ref Config 3 34 TorgProve Status 612 Torq Proving 3 61 Save MOP Ref 194 MOP Config 3 34 Torque Current 4 Metering 3 7 Save To User Set 199 Drive Memory 3 35 Torque Ref B Mut 434 Torq Attributes 3 13 ScaleX In Hi 471 495 Scaled Blocks 3 45 Torque Ref X Hi 428 432 Torq Attributes 3 13 ScaleX In Lo 478 496 Scaled Blocks 3 45 T
308. stic environment The installer is required to take measures to prevent interference in addition to the essential requirements for CE compliance provided in this section if necessary Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee an entire machine or installation complies with CE EMC requirements Many factors can influence total machine installation compliance PowerFlex drives generate conducted low frequency disturbances harmonic emissions on the AC supply system When operated on a public supply system it is the responsibility of the installer or user to ensure by consultation with the distribution network operator and Rockwell Automation if necessary that applicable requirements have been met Essential Requirements for CE Compliance Conditions 1 6 listed below must be satisfied for PowerFlex drives to meet the requirements of EN61800 3 1 2 Standard PowerFlex 700 CE compatible Drive Review important precautions attention statements throughout this manual before installing the drive Grounding as described on page 1 4 Output power control I O and signal wiring must be braided shielded cable with a coverage of 75 or better metal conduit or equivalent attenuation All shielded cables should terminate with the proper shielded connector Conditions in Table 1 J Publication 20B UM002C EN P Installation Wiring 1 29 Table 1 J PowerFlex 700 EN61800 3 EMC Compatibility Sec
309. t Mask 597 Write Mask Act 278 Jog Mask 598 Logic Mask Act 279 Direction Mask 600 TorgProve Cnfg 280 Reference Mask 601 TorgProve Setup 281 Accel Mask 602 Spd Dev Band 282 Decel Mask 603 SpdBand Integrat 283 Fault Clr Mask 604 Brk Release Time 284 MOP Mask 605 ZeroSpdFloatTime 285 Local Mask 606 Float Tolerance 298 DPI Ref Select 607 Brk Set Time 299 DPI Fdbk Select 608 TorqLim SlewRate 300 307 Data In XX 609 BrkSlip Count 310 317 Data Out XX 610 Brk Alarm Travel 320 Anlg In Config 611 MicroPos Scale 321 Anlg In Sqr Root 632 TorgAlarm Level 322 325 Analog In X Hi 633 TorgAlarm Action 323 326 Analog In X Lo 634 TorgAlarm Dwell 324 327 Analog In X Loss 635 TorgAlrm Timeout 340 Anlg Out Config 636 TorgAlrm TO Act 341 Anlg Out Absolut 637 PCP Pump Sheave 342 345 Analog OutX Sel 638 Max Rod Torque 343 346 Analog OutX Hi 639 Min Rod Speed 344 347 Analog OutX Lo 640 Max Rod Speed 354 355 Anlg OutX Scale 641 OilWell Pump Sel 361 366 Digital InX Se 642 Gearbox Rating 377 378 Anlg OutX Setpt 643 Gearbox Sheave 379 Dig Out Setpt 644 Gearbox Ratio 380 384 388 Digital OutX Sel 645 Motor Sheave 381 385 389 Dig OutX Level 647 DB Resistor 382 386 390 Dig OutX OnTime 648 Gearbox Limit 383 387 391 Dig OutX OffTime 650 Adj Volt Phase 412 Motor Fdbk Type 651 Adj Volt Select 413 Encoder PPR 652 Adj Volt Ref Hi 416 Fdbk Filter Sel 653 Adj Volt Ref Lo 419 Notch Filter Freq 654 660 Adj Volt Presett 7 420 Notch Filter K 661 Min Adj Voltage
310. t Security 3 50 596 Write Mask Cfg Security 3 50 597 Write Mask Act Security 3 50 598 Logic Mask Act Security 3 51 600 TorgProve Cnfg Torq Proving 3 59 601 TorqProve Setup Torq Proving 3 60 602 Spd Dev Band Torq Proving 3 60 603 SpdBand Integrat Torq Proving 3 60 604 Brk Release Time Torq Proving 3 60 605 ZeroSpdFloatTime Torq Proving 3 60 606 Float Tolerance Torq Proving 3 60 607 Brk Set Time Torq Proving 3 60 608 TorqLim SlewRate Torq Proving 3 60 609 BrkSlip Count Torq Proving 3 61 610 Brk Alarm Travel Torq Proving 3 61 611 MicroPos Scale Torq Proving 3 61 Programming and Parameters 3 77 Number Parameter Name Group Page 612 TorqProve Status Torq Proving 3 61 631 Rod Load Torque Oil Well Pump 3 61 632 TorgAlarm Level Oil Well Pump 3 61 633 TorgAlarm Action Oil Well Pump 3 61 634 TorgAlarm Dwell Oil Well Pump 3 61 635 TorgAlrm Timeout Oil Well Pump 3 61 636 TorgAlrm TO Act Oil Well Pump 3 62 637 PCP Pump Sheave Oil Well Pump 3 62 638 Max Rod Torque Oil Well Pump 3 62 639 Min Rod Speed Oil Well Pump 3 62 640 Max Rod Speed Oil Well Pump 3 62 641 OilWell Pump Sel Oil Well Pump 3 62 642 Gearbox Rating Oil Well Pump 3 62 643 Gearbox Sheave _ Oil Well Pump 3 62 644 Gearbox Ratio Oil Well Pump 3 62 645 Motor Sheave Oil Well Pump 3 62 646 Total Gear Ratio Oil Well Pump 3 62 647 DB Resistor Oil Well Pump 3 62 648 Gearbox Limit Oil Well Pump 3 63 650 Adj Volt Phase Adjust Voltage 3 63 651 Adj Volt
311. t be determined through an autotune Speed Desired BW is set to 0 when a manual adjustment is made to this parameter Related o SA IG o CO Ino SPEED COMMAND Speed Regulator An internal Error Filter BW is active when Kp or Speed Desired BW is changed It is set to Kp times Total Inertia with a minimum of 25 radians 447 Kf Speed Loop Default 0 0 Controls the feed forward gain of the Min Max 0 0 0 5 speed regulator Setting the Kf gain Units 0 1 greater than zero reduces speed feedback overshoot in response to a step change in speed reference 449 Speed Desired BW Default 0 0 Radians Sec Sets the speed loop bandwidth and Min Max 0 0 250 0 Radians Sec determines the dynamic behavior of the Units 0 1 Radians Sec speed loop As bandwidth increases the speed loop becomes more responsive and can track a faster changing speed reference Adjusting this parameter will cause the drive to calculate and change Ki Speed Loop and Kp Speed Loop gains o SA Ino o CO Ca Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 26 Programming and Parameters El 3 Parameter Name amp Description S Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 450 Total Inertia Default 0 10 Secs 053 Represents the time in seconds for a Min Max 0 01 600 00 motor coupled to a load to accelerate Units 0 01 Secs from zero to base speed at rated motor S S6 torque The drive calculates Total In
312. t of scale blocks parameters 354 355 342 SpdFb NoFilt Provides an unfiltered value to an analog output The filtered version Speed Fdbk includes a 125 ms filter Torque Est Calculated percentage of rated motor torque 342 Torque Geint 1 Selects Torque Stpt1 for Torque Ref A Sel when set otherwise uses value selected 361 in Torque Ref A Sel Vel Override When active multiplies value of Step X Velocity by value in Vel Override Publication 20B UM002C EN P Programming and Parameters 3 55 3 Parameter Name amp Description S See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E Digital In1 Sel Default 4 Stop CF Digital In2 Sel Default 5 Start Digital In3 Sel Default 18 Auto Manual Digital In4 Sel Default 15 Speed Sel 1 Digital In5 Sel Default 16 Speed Sel 2 Digital In6 Sel 19 Default 17 Speed Sel 3 Selects the function for the digital inputs Options 0 No r 1 Speed Select Inputs 1 Enable P pu 2 Clear Faults CF 3 2 1 Auto Reference Source 3 Aux Fault 0 fo o Reference A 4 Stop CF 0 l0 1 Reference B 5 Start 4 8 0 1 0 Preset Speed 2 u 4 D 1 1 Preset Speed 3 een SS 1 O JO PresetSpeed4 5 1 0 1 PresetSpeed5 8 Run Forward 1 1 10 PresetSpeed6 9 Run Reverse 5 1 1 1 Preset Speed 7 10 Jon 1 To access Preset Speed 1 set Speed 11 Jog Forward a Ref x Sel to Pre
313. ted Check parameter 214 Start Inhibits 4 10 Flashing An intermittent type 1 alarm condition is occurring Drive Running Check parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Steady A continuous type 1 alarm condition exists Drive Running Check parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Red Flashing Fault has occurred Check Fault x Code or Fault Queue See page 4 4 Steady A non resettable fault has occurred PORT Refer to the Communication Status of DPI port internal communications if present MOD Adapter User Manual Status of communications module when installed NET A Status of network if connected NETB Status of secondary network if connected Publication 20 B UM002C EN P Start Up 2 3 Start Up Routines The PowerFlex 700 start up routines allow the user to commission the drive more quickly and accurately If you have an LCD HIM two methods are provided e SMART Start This routine is accessible by using the ALT function key on the LCD HIM This keystroke brings up a list of parameters needed to program the eight most commonly adjusted drive functions These include Start Stop Minimum Speed Maximum Speed Acceleration Time Deceleration Time Reference source speed command and Electronic Overload setting for the motor No knowledge of parameter organization or access is required S M A R T Start can commission the drive in just a few minutes See page 2 5 e Assisted Start Up Three levels of Assisted Start Up B
314. tering 3 8 Speed Loop Meter 451 Speed Regulator 3 26 Speed Ref Source 213 Diagnostics 3 39 Speed Ref X Hi 91 94 Speed Reference 3 19 Speed Ref X Lo 92 95 Speed Reference 3 19 Speed Ref X Sel 90 93 Speed Reference 3 19 Speed Reference 23 Metering 3 8 Speed Units 79 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 16 Speed Torque Mod 88 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 18 Start At PowerUp 168 Restart Modes 3 30 Start Inhibits 214 Diagnostics 3 39 Start Mask 277 Masks amp Owners 3 47 Start Owner 289 Masks amp Owners 3 48 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Programming and Parameters 3 75 Parameter Cross Reference by Number Number Parameter Name Group Page Number Parameter Name Group Page 1 Output Freq Metering 37 87 Skip Freq Band Spd Mode amp Limits 3 18 2 Commanded Freq _ Metering 37 88 Speed Torque Mod Spd Mode amp Limits 3 18 3 Output Current Metering 3 7 90 93 SpeedRefXSel Speed Reference 3 19 4 Torque Current Metering 3 7 91 94 Speed Ref X Hi Speed Reference 3 19 5 Flux Current Meterin
315. tes Motor Cntl Sel 053 Autotune Torque 066 Torque Ref A Lon 429 Maximum Voltage 054 Inertia Autotune 067 Pos Torque Limit 436 Maximum Freq 055 Torque Ref A Sel 427 Neg Torque Limit 437 Autotune 061 Torque Ref A H 428 Speed Motor Fdbk Type 412 Encoder PPR 413 Feedback Speed Spd Mode amp Speed Units 079 Minimum Speed 081 Rev Speed Limit 454 Command Limits Feedback Select 080 Maximum Speed 082 Speed Speed Ref A Sel 090 Speed Ref BH 094 TBManRefLo 098 References SpeedRefAHi 091 SpeedRefBLo 095 Pulse Input Ref 099 Speed RefALo 092 TB Man Ref Gel 096 Speed RefB Sel 093 TB Man Ref Hi 097 Discrete Jog Speed 1 100 Jog Speed 2 108 Speeds Preset Speed 1 7 101 107 Dynamic Ramp Rates Accel Time 1 140 Decel Time 1 142 S Curve 146 Control Accel Time 2 141 Decel Time 2 143 Bee Load Limits CurrentLmt Sel 147 Current Lmt Val 148 Stop Brake Stop Brk Mode A 155 DC Brk Lvl Sel 157 BusRegModeA 161 Modes Stop Brk Mode B 156 DC Brake Level 158 Bus RegModeB 162 ae DC Brake Time 159 DB Resistor Type 163 i Restart Modes Start At PowerUp 168 Auto Rstrt Tries 174 Auto Rstrt Delay 175 Power Loss Power Loss Mode 184 Power Loss Time 185 Power Loss Level 186 Direction Config Direction Mode 190 Drive Memory Param Access Lvl 196 Load Frm Usr Set 198 Language 201 Reset To Defalts 197 Save To UserSet 199 Diagnostics Start Inhibits 214 Dig In Status 216 Dig Out Status 217 Faults Fault Config 1 238 Alarms Alarm Config1 259 Inputs amp
316. th Encoder Feedback When Find Home is commanded the homing routine is run when a start command is issued The Homing bit 11 in Profile Status will be set while the homing routine is running The drive will ramp to the speed and direction set in Find Home Speed parameter 713 at the rate set in Find Home Ramp parameter 714 until the digital input defined as Home Limit is activated The drive will then ramp to Publication 20B UM002C EN P C 22 Application Notes zero and then back up to first marker pulse prior to the Home Limit switch at 1 10 the Find Home Speed When on the marker pulse the At Home bit 13 is set in Profile Status and the drive is stopped Figure C 5 shows the sequence of operation for homing to a marker pulse Encoder Z Chan parameter 423 must be set to Marker Input or Marker Check for this type of homing Figure C 5 Homing to Marker 250 30 Homing 200 At Home 25 E 2 Ei amp 1850 2 E 20 co 2 a c gt 10 d 3 15 A E ZS 50 S s s 8 02 ui 0 S 2 7 12 17 22 27 32 37 42 e 50 3 E Start Command Home Limit Input Aen Find Home Command 0 Encoder Speed 415 Profile Status 700 Units Traveled 701 Dig In Status 216 e Homing to Limit Switch with Encoder Feedback When Find Home is commanded the homing routine is run when a start command is issued The Homing bit 11 in Prof
317. the Min Max 32767 0 Torque Ref B Sel selection Units 0 1 Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 14 E fo H E Ki D e e o g Ss E E lt co o E Programming and Parameters No 435 436 437 438 440 441 069 070 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Torque Setpoint1 Default 0 096 Provides an internal fixed value for Min Max 800 0 Torque Setpoint when Torque Ref x Sel Units 0 1 is set to Torque Geint Pos Torque Limit Default 200 096 Defines the torque limit for the positive Min Max 0 0 800 0 torque reference value The reference will Units 0 196 not be allowed to exceed this value Neg Torque Limit Default 200 0 Defines the torque limit for the negative Min Max 800 0 0 0 torque reference value The reference will Units 0 1 not be allowed to exceed this value Torque Setpoint2 Default 0 096 Provides an internal fixed value for Min Max 800 0 Torque Setpoint when Torque Ref x Sel Units 0 1 is set to Torque Setpt 2 Control Status Read Only Displays a summary status of any condition that may be limiting either the current or the torque reference S S S RS SS RAI e QU IR D S S S EE L SESS I VE SESS SESS S Gy AS SS IVE SR Q
318. this occurs the profile will transition to the next step after dwell and batch settings are satisfied It will then ramp to the programmed velocity without going to zero speed Encoder Incremental Blend EnclncrBlend When started the drive will ramp to the desired velocity and hold speed until the units of travel programmed is reached within tolerance window The profile will then transition to the next step and the drive will ramp to the speed of the new step without first going to zero speed Encoder Incremental Blend with Hold This profile is the same as the previous but contains the Hold function While Hold is applied the step transition is inhibited When released the step can then transition if the conditions to transition are satisfied Parameter Level Param Level When started the drive will ramp to the desired velocity hold speed and compare the parameter value of the parameter number programmed in Step Value to the Step Dwell level The sign of the Step Value defines less than or greater than Step Dwell When true the profile will transition to the next step End The drive ramps to zero speed and stops the profile It clears the current step bits and sets the Complete bit 14 in Profile Status parameter 700 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Application Notes C 21 Position Regulated Step Types and Parameters Each of the Position Regulated steps has the following associated p
319. tion Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core E Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 20B UM002C EN P January 2008 P N 349066 P03 Supersedes 20B UM002B EN P October 2005 20B DU008B EN P September 2005 amp 20B DU009A EN P February 2006 Copyright 2008 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
320. tion to stop the load Ramp mode can also include a timed hold brake Once the drive has reached zero output hertz on a Ramp to Stop and both parameters DC Brake Time and DC Brake Level are not zero the drive applies DC to the motor producing current at the DC Brake Level for the DC Brake Time 1 OnStop drive output will decrease according to the programmed pattern from its present value to zero The pattern may be linear or squared The output will decrease to zero at the rate determined by the programmed Maximum Freq and the programmed active Decel Time x 2 The reduction in output can be limited by other drive factors such as such as bus or current regulation 3 When the output reaches zero the output is shut off 4 The motor if rotating will coast from its present speed for a time that is dependent on the mechanics of the system inertia friction etc Publication 20B UM002C EN P Mode Ramp to Hold Application Notes C 39 Description Output Voltage Output Voltage Motor Speed Output Voltage DC Brake Level Time Stop 7 Zero Re issuing a Command Command Start Command Speed This method combines two of the methods above It uses drive output reduction to stop the load and DC injection to hold the load at zero speed once it has stopped 1 On Stop drive output will decrease according to the programmed pattern from its present value to zero The pattern may be linear or
321. uction in product life The most common causes are e Wiring AC line to drive output or control terminals e Improper bypass or output circuits not approved by Allen Bradley e Output circuits which do not connect directly to the motor Contact Allen Bradley for assistance with application or wiring Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors PowerFlex 700 drives contain protective MOVs and common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground To guard against drive damage these devices must be disconnected if the drive is installed on a resistive grounded distribution system an ungrounded distribution system or B phase grounded distribution system On ungrounded distribution systems where the line to ground voltages on any phase could exceed 125 of the nominal line to line voltage an isolation transformer should be installed To disconnect these devices remove the jumper s listed in Table 1 E Jumpers can be removed by carefully pulling the jumper straight out See Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI for more information on ungrounded systems voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before removing installing jumpers Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC amp DC terminals of the Power Terminal Block The voltage must be zero ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the Publication 20B UM002C EN P Installation Wiring 1 15 Table 1
322. ue Step 12 Value Step 13 Value Step 14 Value Step 15 Value Step 16 Value Sets the step value used for time time blend digital input number parameter level and encoder based units Also determines the condition to move to the next step Time Time Blend 0 00 3600 00 seconds Digital Input 1 to 6 decimal ignored The sign value makes inputs active high nn and a makes them active low Parameter Level parameter number Encoder Absolute Encoder Incremental Encoder Incremental Blend 99 999 00 units see Counts per Unit Programming and Parameters 3 69 Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Related 10 0 Secs 0 0 3600 0 Secs 0 1 Secs 6 0 Based on Step x Type 0 01 Units dependent on Step x Type Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 70 Programming and Parameters File Group 795 805 815 825 835 845 855 865 875 Profile Step 1 16 726 736 746 756 766 776 786 796 806 816 826 836 846 856 866 876 POS SPD PROFILE Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Step 1 Dwell Step 2 Dwell Step 3 Dwell Step 4 Dwell Step 5 Dwell Step 6 Dwell Step 7 Dwell Step 8 Dwell Step 9 Dwell Step 10 Dwell Step 11 Dwell Step 12 Dwell Step 13 Dwell Step 14 Dwell Step 15 Dwell Step 16 Dwell After the condition to move to the next step has been satisfie
323. ult Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Read Only Maximum Freq 0 1 Hz Read Only Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Read Only 0 0 Drive Rated Amps x 2 0 1 Amps Read Only Drive Rating x 2 2 0 1 Amps Read Only Drive Rating x 2 2 0 1 Amps Read Only 0 0 Drive Rated Volts 0 1 VAC Read Only 0 0 Drive Rated kW x 2 0 1 kW Read Only 0 00 1 00 0 01 Read Only 0 0 214748352 0 MWh 0 1 MWh Read Only 0 0 214748352 0 Hrs 0 1 Hrs Read Only Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Read Only 0 0 Based on Drive Rating 0 1 VDC Read Only 0 0 Based on Drive Rating 0 1 VDC 3 7 Related Ico Eat Ico KO Ei Ico Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 8 Group No 014 016 017 018 021 022 Metering 023 024 025 026 027 Drive Data 02 CO Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Elapsed kWh Accumulated output energy of the drive Analog In1 Value Analog In2 Value Value of the signal at the analog inputs PTC HW Value Value present at the drive s PTC input terminals Spd Fdbk No Filt Displays the unfiltered value of the actual motor speed w
324. ult Clr Owner 3 49 Fault Config x 3 42 Fault Speed 3 40 Fault x Code 3 43 Fdbk Filter Sel 3 15 Feedback Select 3 17 Find Home Ramp 3 66 Find Home Speed 3 66 Float Tolerance 3 60 Flux Braking 3 30 Flux Current 3 7 Flux Current Ref 3 12 Flux Up Mode 3 11 Flux Up Time 3 11 Flying Start En 3 30 Flying StartGain 3 30 Gearbox Limit 3 63 Gearbox Rating 3 62 Gearbox Ratio 3 62 Gearbox Sheave 3 62 Gnd Warn Level 3 32 Inertia Autotune 3 13 IR Voltage Drop 3 12 Ixo Voltage Drop 3 12 Jog Mask 3 48 Jog Owner 3 48 Jog Speed 1 3 20 Jog Speed 2 3 20 Kf Speed Loop 3 25 Ki Speed Loop 3 25 Kp Speed Loop 3 25 Language 3 35 Last Stop Source 3 39 Load Frm Usr Set 3 35 Load Loss Level 3 33 Load Loss Time 3 33 Local Mask 3 48 Index 9 Local Owner 3 49 Logic Mask 3 47 3 51 Logic Mask Act 3 51 Man Ref Preload 3 34 Marker Pulse 3 16 Max Rod Speed 3 62 Max Rod Torque 3 62 Maximum Freq 3 10 Maximum Speed 3 17 Maximum Voltage 3 10 MicroPos Scale 3 61 Min Adj Voltage 3 63 Min Rod Speed 3 62 Minimum Speed 3 17 MOP Adj VoltRate 3 64 MOP Mask 3 48 MOP Owner 3 49 MOP Rate 3 34 MOP Reference 3 7 Motor Cntl Sel 3 10 Motor Fdbk Type 3 15 Motor NP FLA 3 9 Motor NP Hertz 3 9 Motor NP Power 3 9 Motor NP RPM 3 9 Motor NP Volts 3 9 Motor OL Count 3 40 Motor OL Factor 3 10 Motor OL Hertz 3 10 Motor Poles 3 10 Motor Sheave 3 62 Motor Type 3 9 Mtr OL Trip Time 3 40 Mtr
325. ure contacts Digital signal inputs are wired with respect to the digital input common Refer to the drive User Manual regarding setup for either internal or external 24V DC or external 115V AC logic power depending on the type that is supplied in your drive Motor supplied contacts must have ratings compatible with the drive s input circuit ratings and applied voltage level Figure D 2 Wiring Example External Power Supply Internal 24V Power Supply Neutral 115V Common 24V 24 24V DC 25 i Digital In Common Ge OUO Motor Motor GIG Over Temperature Over Temperature o L 5 Sensor s 31 Sensor s 2 32 32 Digital Input 6 O Digital Input 6 Voltage is Board Dependent Not available with 115V UO Drive Configuration Both of the digital inputs required to monitor for motor over temperature must be configured correctly to assure that the drive will shut down independent of drive software operation and be put into a fault condition that will require a fault reset before the drive can be restarted Hardware Digital Input 6 must be configured as a Hardware Enable This is accomplished by removing Jumper J10 from the Main Control Board in the I O Control Cassette Refer to the instructions in the I O wiring section of the Installation Wiring Chapter in the drive User Manual Publication 20B UM002C EN P D
326. use this function without considering applicable local national and international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines 175 Auto Rstrt Delay Default 1 0 Secs 174 Sets the time between restart attempts Min Max 0 5 10800 0 Secs when Auto Rstrt Tries is set to a value Units 0 1 Secs other than zero Publication 20B UM002C EN P Programming and Parameters 3 31 5 Parameter Name amp Description Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values File Group Related 178 Sleep Wake Mode Default 0 Disabled 9 Enables disables the Sleep Wake Options 0 Disabled function Important When enabled the 1 Direct Enabled o following conditions must be met 2 Invert Enabled 7 e A proper value must be programmed for Sleep Level amp Wake Level e A speed reference must be selected in Speed Ref A Sel e Atleast one of the following must be programmed and input closed in Digital Inx Sel Enable Stop CF Run Run Forward Run Reverse ATTENTION Enabling the Sleep Wake function can cause unexpected machine operation during the Wake mode Equipment damage and or personal injury can result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do Not use this function without considering the information below and in Appendix C In addition all applicable local national amp international codes standards regulations or industry
327. ve 3 26 SMART Start Up 2 3 Safety Ground 1 4 Save HIM Ref 3 34 Save MOP Ref 3 34 Save To User Set 3 35 Saving Data B 4 Scale In Hi 3 45 Scale In Lo 3 45 Scale In Value 3 45 Scale Out Hi 3 45 Scale Out Lo 3 45 Scale Out Value 3 45 Publication 20B UM002C EN P Scaled Blocks Group 3 45 See Manual Fault 4 8 Setting Preferences B 5 Shear Pin Fault 4 8 Shear Pin Time 3 33 Shielded Cables Power 1 5 SHLD Terminal 1 4 Short Circuit Protection 1 5 Signal Wire 1 17 Single Phase Input Power 1 7 Skip Freq Band 3 18 Skip Frequency C 32 Skip Frequency x 3 18 Sleep Config Alarm 4 12 Sleep Level 3 32 Sleep Time 3 32 Sleep Wake Mode C 34 Sleep Wake Mode 3 31 Sleep Wake Ref 3 32 Slip Comp Gain 3 21 Slip Comp Group 3 21 Slip RPM FLA 3 21 Slip RPM Meter 3 21 Software Fault 4 8 Spd Fdbk No Filt 3 8 Spd Mode amp Limits Group 3 16 SpdBand Integrat 3 60 Specifications Agency Certification A 1 Control A 2 A 3 Drive Ratings A 9 Electrical A 2 Encoder A 4 Environment A 2 Protection A 1 A 2 Speed Command File 3 16 Speed Command Sources 1 24 Speed Desired BW 3 25 Speed Dev Band 3 60 Speed Feedback 3 8 Speed Feedback Group 3 15 Speed Loop Meter 3 26 Speed Pot 1 22 Speed Ref A Hi 3 19 Speed Ref A Lo 3 19 Speed Ref A Sel 3 19 Speed Ref B Hi 3 19 Speed Ref B Lo 3 19 Speed Ref B Sel 3 19 Speed Ref Cflct Alarm 4 12 Speed Ref Source 3 39 Speed Reference 3 8 Speed Refere
328. ve control of selecting Accel Time 1 2 Decel Owner Adapter that has exclusive control of selecting Decel Time 1 2 Fault Cir Owner Adapter that is presently clearing a fault MOP Owner Adapters that are currently issuing increases or decreases in MOP command frequency Local Owner Adapter that has requested exclusive control of all drive logic functions If an adapter is in local lockout all other functions except stop on all other adapters are locked out and non functional Local control can only be obtained when the drive is not running Data In A1 Link A Word 1 Data In A2 Link A Word 2 Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data table Value will not be updated until drive is stopped Refer to your communications option manual for datalink information Data In B1 Link B Word 1 Data In B2 Link B Word 2 Data In C1 Link C Word 1 Data In C2 Link C Word 2 Data In D1 Link D Word 1 Data In D2 Link D Word 2 Not available with Liquid Cooled drives Programm 49 ing and Parameters 3 o 2 T Values amp See Stop Owner 276 thru 285 See Stop Owner 276 thru 285 See Stop Owner 140 276 thru 285 See Stop Owner 142 276 thru 285 See Stop Owner 276 thru 285 See Stop Owner 276 thru 285 See Stop Owner 276 thru Default 0 0 Disabled Min Max 0 611 Units
329. ve will not reverse motor direction Cause s Indication Corrective Action Digital input is not selected for None Check Digital Inx Sel page 3 55 Choose reversing control correct input and program for reversing mode Digital input is incorrectly wired None Check input wiring See page 1 17 Direction mode parameter is None Reprogram Direction Mode page 3 33 for incorrectly programmed analog Bipolar or digital Unipolar control Motor wiring is improperly phased None Switch two motor leads for reverse A bipolar analog speed command None 1 Use meter to check that an analog input input is incorrectly wired or signal is absent voltage is present 2 Check wiring See page 1 17 Positive voltage commands forward direction Negative voltage commands reverse direction Stopping the drive results in a Decel Inhibit fault Cause s The bus regulation feature is enabled and is halting deceleration due to excessive bus voltage Excess bus voltage is normally due to excessive regenerated energy or unstable AC line input voltages Internal timer has halted drive operation Indication Decel Inhibit fault Screen LCD Status Line indicates Faulted Corrective Action 1 See Attention statement on page P 4 2 Reprogram parameters 161 162 to eliminate any Adjust Freq selection 3 Disable bus regulation parameters 161 amp 162 and add a dynamic brake 4 Correct AC i
330. verSpeed Limit OverVoltage Parameter Chksum Params Defaulted Phase U to Grnd Phase V to Grnd Phase W to Grnd Phase UV Short Phase VW Short Phase UW Short Port 1 5 DPI Loss Port 1 5 Adapter c 100 81 85 71 75 Type Description EEprom UO error Current in one or more phases has been lost or remains below a preset level Functions such as Slip Compensation or Bus Regulation have attempted to add an output frequency adjustment greater than that programmed in Overspeed Limit DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value The checksum read from the board does not match the checksum calculated The drive was commanded to write default values to EEPROM A phase to ground fault has been detected between the drive and motor in this phase Excessive current has been detected between these two output terminals DPI port stopped communicating A SCANport device was connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 500k baud The communications card has a fault Troubleshooting 4 7 Action 1 Cycle power and repeat function 2 Replace Main Control Board Check the drive and motor wiring Check for phase to phase continuity at the motor terminals Check for disconnected motor leads Remove excessive load or overhauling conditions or increase Overspeed Limit Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regener
331. w to calculate total Lifetime MegaWatt Hours Value of Code 9 Value of Code 10 x 01 Value of Code 5 Total Lifetime MegaWatt Hours Publication 20B UM002C EN P Appendix A Category Agency Certification Supplemental Drive Information For information on See page Specifications A 1 Communication Configurations A 6 Output Devices A 9 Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings A 9 Dimensions A 20 Frame Cross Reference A 34 Specifications Specification Listed to UL508C and CAN CSA C2 2 No 14 M91 C US Category Protection Marked for all applicable European Directives C EMC Directive 2004 108 EC EN 61800 3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC EN 50178 Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations Certified to IEC 61800 3 N223 Certified to ATEX directive 94 9 EC Group II Category 2 GD Applications with x ATEX Approved Motors 1I 2 G D The drive is also designed to meet the following specifications NFPA 70 US National Electrical Code NEMA ICS 7 1 Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection Installation and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems IEC 146 International Electrical Code CMAA Specification 70 Crane Manufacturers of America Association SEMIF47 RINA Registo Italiano Navale marine certification Specification Drive 200 240V 380 480V 600V 600 690
332. will dissipate energy in the motor use care to avoid motor overheating Table C A describes several braking capability examples Table C A Braking Method Examples Method Use When Application Requires Braking Power Ramp e The fastest stopping time or fastest ramp time for Most speed changes external brake resistor or regenerative capability required for ramp times faster than the methods below e High duty cycles frequent stops or speed changes The other methods may result in excessive motor heating Fast e Additional braking capability without use of external More than Flux Brake brake resistor or regenerative units Braking or DC Brake Flux e Fast speed changes and fast stopping time More than DC Brake Braking e Typical stop from speeds below 50 of base speed Flux Braking will likely stop the load faster than Fast Brake in this case Important This can be used in conjunction with Ramp or Ramp to Hold for additional braking power or with Fast Brake or DC Brake for speed changes DC e Additional braking capability without use of external Less than above Brake brake resistor or regenerative units methods Description Output Voltage Output Current Motor Speed Stop Coast Time is load dependent Command This method releases the motor and allows the load to stop by friction 1 On Stop the drive output goes immediately to z
333. wing the test at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode Used when motor cannot be rotated Rotate Tune 2 A temporary command that initiates a Static Tune followed by a rotational test for the best possible automatic setting of Flux Current Ref In FVC Vector mode with encoder feedback a test for the best possible automatic setting of Slip RPM FLA is also run A start command is required following initiation of this setting The parameter returns to Ready 0 following the test at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode Important If using rotate tune for Sensrls Vect mode the motor should be uncoupled from the load or results may not be valid With FVC Vector either a coupled or uncoupled load will produce valid results ATTENTION Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during this procedure To guard against possible injury and or equipment damage it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the load before proceeding Torq Attributes MOTOR CONTROL Calculate 3 This setting uses motor nameplate data to automatically set IR Voltage Drop Ixo Voltage Drop Flux Current Ref and Slip RPM FLA 062 IR Voltage Drop Default Based on Drive Rating 053 Value of voltage drop across the resis Min Max 0 0 Motor NP Volts x0 25 061 tance of the motor stator at
334. x Sel must be set to a speed reference source that will control the drive If Sleep Wake Ref Speed Ref x Sel the same analog signal will control start stop and speed reference At least one of the following must be programmed for Digital Inx Sel Not Stop Enable Start Run Run Forward Run Reverse Yes Is Required Input Closed No Stop Enable Run Which Mode is Selected Direct Invert oi Is Analog Signal Less than or equal to Wake Level and for time period greater than or equal to Wake Time Decrease Analog Input Signal and wait for a time period greater than or equal to Wake Time Is Analog Signal Greater Increase Analog Input than or equal to Wake Level Signal and wait for a time and for time period greater than period greater than or or equal to Wake Time equal to Wake Time Drive Was a Stop Issued Reset Fait Fault Occur or Power Cycled No Yes Y Run Run Forward Which Required Input Stop or Enable or Run Reverse was Chosen Open amp Close Input Issue a Start Command HIM Network or TB Publication 20B UM002C EN P C 36 Application Notes Start At PowerUp A powerup delay time of up to 30 seconds can be programmed through Powerup Delay parameter 167 After the time expires the drive will start if all of the start permissive conditions are met Before that time restart is not possible Start At PowerUp l
335. x Velocity holds speed then ramps to zero at encoder position defined by Step x Value within position tolerance window Encoder Abs 6 drive ramps to Step x Velocity in direction required holds speed then ramps to zero at position within tolerance window End Hold Pos 7 drive holds last position for Step x Dwell time then stops The drive must have Direction Mode set to Bipolar for the position regulator to function properly Current Torque and Regen Power Limits must be set so as not to limit the programmed deceleration time If one of the limits occur the position regulator may overshoot the position set point Sleep Mode must be turned off Publication 20B UM002C EN P 3 68 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 721 Step 1 Velocity Default 0 0 731 Step 2 Velocity TM 741 Step 3 Velocity deg Si SS E Speed 751 Step 4 Velocity 01 RPM 761 Step 5 Velocity 771 Step 6 Velocity 781 Step 7 Velocity 791 Step 8 Velocity 801 Step 9 Velocity 811 Step 10 Velocity 821 Step 11 Velocity 831 Step 12 Velocity 841 Step 13 Velocity 851 Step 14 Velocity 861 Step 15 Velocity 871 Step 16 Velocity Step Speed Sign of this value is used to determine direction for Time Time Blended Digital Input amp Parameter Level step types The value is an absolute number for all encode
336. y displaying the following e Faulted appears in the status line Fault P e Fault number OverVoltage e Fault name e Time that has passed since fault occurred Press Esc to regain HIM control F gt Faultea auto Time Since Fault 0000 23 52 Drive is indicating an alarm The LCD HIM immediately reports the alarm condition by displaying the following e Alarm name Type 2 alarms only e Alarm bell graphic Hz Main Menu Diagnostics Parameter Device Select Publication 20B UM002C EN P 4 4 Troubleshooting Manually Clearing Faults Step 1 Press Esc to acknowledge the fault The fault information will be removed so that you can use the HIM 2 Address the condition that caused the fault The cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared 3 After corrective action has been taken clear the fault by one of these methods e Press Stop e Cycle drive power e Set parameter 240 Fault Clear to 1 e Clear Faults on the HIM Diagnostic menu Fault Descriptions Table 4 A Fault Types Descriptions and Actions Fault Analog In Loss Anlg Cal Chksum Auto Rstrt Tries AutoTune Aborted Auxiliary Input Cntl Bd Overtemp DB Resistance S z 29 108 QO Type Publication 20B UM002C EN P Description An analog input is configured to fault on signal loss A signal loss has occurred Configure with Anlg

PowerFlex 700 AC Drives

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents